<![CDATA[ Latest from Woman and Home in Buying-guide ]]> https://www.womanandhome.com 2025-06-08T10:00:00Z en <![CDATA[ My family runs a pizza business – these are the 9 ovens that actually impressed us ]]> Nothing gets people outside and gathered together quite like a pizza oven. My family started using them when I was 13, so it’s safe to say I’ve grown up cooking with flames — and I’ve been hooked ever since. It’s one of the many reasons why I think every garden, balcony, and even kitchen should have a pizza oven.

For years, pizza ovens followed a fairly predictable format, but recently the market has exploded with innovation. Electric models now offer a fuss-free, air fryer–like experience, while gas ovens give you precise control — especially those clever ones with rotating pizza stones, perfect for beginners. And of course, there’s the timeless charm of wood-fired ovens, delivering that unbeatable smoky flavour.

With summer on the horizon, I’ve been putting the best pizza ovens to the test — roping in my family (who’ve run a pizza business for over a decade) to help me assess everything from big names like Ninja to pizza-specialist brands like Gozney and Ooni. So whether you’re just getting started with outdoor cooking or you’re ready to take your homemade pizzas to the next level, here’s everything you need to know to choose the right oven.

The quick list

The best pizza ovens, tested by industry experts

Pizzas cooked in the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer

(Image credit: Future)

I put all our pizza ovens through the same series of tests to get a good gauge of who they'll be best suited to. Not only did I cook many, many pizzas in each oven, I also experimented with nachos, vegetable skillets, cookies, and other recipes that brands recommended that we tested out. To see the results of my top picks, keep scrolling.

Best pizza oven for enthusiasts

1. Gozney Arc

Best pizza oven for ethusiasts

RRP: £599.99 | Dimensions: W 48 x D 56.4 x H 34.2 cm | Weight: 21.5 Kg | Fuel type: Gas and wood | Temperature range: Up to 500°C

Compact, yet sleek design
Dual-fuel options
Easy to control and use
Robust, top-quality build
Expensive for some

Any research into the world of pizza ovens will have shone a spotlight on Gozney. These pizza ovens are the crème de la creme for build quality, cooking capacity, aesthetics, and user-experience. My family — the ones that run the pizza business — cook on Gozney's commercial ovens and the Arc is just a mini version of those. In the summer, I swear I don’t touch my oven. I cook exclusively in here.

I’ll work from the outside in. Gozney’s ovens are beautiful. They look like something from a glossy Scandinavian magazine. They’re easy to set up and the extra features — such as an exterior thermometer and pizza stand — are seamlessly stylish. Setting them up is easy and cooking in the Gozney Arc is just as lovely. I made delicious, evenly cooked pizzas in here and have continued to use the Arc for almost two years in my garden, where I've hosted Mexican nights (you can cook wraps and fillings in the oven); tapas nights (falafels work really well in here too); and I've even made a roast dinner in here.

That all goes to say that if you have the money to spend, this is a smart investment. It’ll last you for a long time and you’ll get the admiration of all your friends. The one catch is that some of the smart accessories (the stand, cover, and peel) are all sold separately, so you need to buy these separately. It could blow your budget, but if you'll use this as much as I do, it's worth investing in them. My final piece of advice is to check out Gozney’s recipes too — you’ll be making peanut butter brownies, nachos, wraps, and curries in no time.

You can find out more in my full review.

Best pizza oven for beginners

Morsø Forno Spin

Best pizza oven for beginners

RRP: £499.99 | Dimensions: 35 H x 57 W x 53 D cm | Weight: 17.11 kgs | Fuel type: Gas (stone is rotated using electrics) | Temperature range: Up to 450°

Elegant design looks smart and premium
Really well-priced for the quality and performance
Electronic pizza stone is a game-changer for beginners
Versatile and speedy at cooking pizzas and more
Need to be careful with children as top gets hot

The place that everyone trips up with pizza ovens is turning the pizza. It’s very easy to thrust your perfect pizza into the flames at the back or the side of the oven — or to get distracted by guests and burn one half of the pizza. The simple solution that opens up pizza ovens for everyone from beginners to experts is Morsø's rotating pizza stone. Most pizza ovens that have this feature still require you to manually turn the stone, but the Forno Spin has an electric control, that you can leave to work its magic, freeing up brain space to enjoy the outdoors whilst your oven cooks the perfect pizza.

Not only is the Morsø Forno Spin attractive — following Gozney in the pebble-like look of the pizza oven — it’s lovely to use. I cooked even, delicious pizza in here with almost no error. I also made brownies, nachos, bread, wraps, grilled vegetables, and more in the Morsø Forno Spin. The sheer simplicity made it really motivating to return to time and time again. I found myself excited to cook in here.

My friends, who had never cooked in a pizza oven before, were able to match my decade of training thanks to the quality and ease of design that is so intrinsic to Morsø . To top it all off, this is a great price. It’s not the cheapest pizza oven, but if you want quality, this is one of the best places you can spend your money.

The only downside is that the oven is gas powered, but the wheel is electric. You’ll need a socket and gas cylinder nearby to have it working at full capacity, which limits where you’ll put it outside.

You can find out more in my full review.

Best wood fired pizza oven

Delivita Wood Fired Pizza Oven

Best wood-fired pizza oven

RRP: £899.99 | Dimensions: 590mm x 650mm x 350mm | Weight: 30 Kg | Fuel type: Wood | Temperature range: Up to 550°C

Chic, colourful design options
Makes delicious pizza and wood fired food
Fire is easy to control and manage (even if you're a beginner)
Heat-proof exterior
Expensive if you want dual-fuel option

Some people want to enjoy pizza ovens as they were intended: cooked by wood-fired flames, the Italian way. Going back to the roots might take more time and investment: you need to watch your fire constantly and learn special tricks, but with the DeliVita, it pays off.

Not only is this a gorgeous oven — I’ve never seen one with such personality, especially with all the colour options — it’s totally heat proof, so you could sit it anywhere in your garden without a care in the world. Mine was placed on an IKEA bistro table and, Marco, DeliVita’s expert, assured me that his has sat on the exact same table without a hitch for months upon months.

Flavour-wise, the DeliVita is hard to beat. The fire gives food flavour and character like no other pizza oven. If I closed my eyes, the pizza I made in the DeliVita could have been slid onto my table in authentic pizzeria in Naples. I also made some delicious Italian classics, including a vegetable bruschetta and veggie skillet, but could nail the more left-field tasks that I set it (including making a deliciously soft, sweet cookie) too.

The only downside of a wood-fired oven is that you have to buy kiln-dried wood and even then it’ll smoke a lot. I live in a zone where we can’t actually have outdoor fires, which meant I had to travel around to get this set up and tested. It’s worth it if you’re willing to learn the tricks of the wood fired trade — and will certainly wow guests with the flavours — but might not suit shy beginners.

You can find out more in my full review

Best electric pizza oven

Ninja Artisan Pizza Oven

Best electric pizza oven

RRP: £299.99 | Dimensions: H32 x W42 x D59cm | Weight: 11.9 kgs | Fuel type: Electric | Temperature range:

Makes incredible pizza every time
Excellent value for money
Multiple different functions including air frying
Patio-friendly and electric
Not as pretty as some

I love Ninja. I think they make some of the best air fryers and other kitchen appliances, but did I think they would be shoulder-to-shoulder with the likes of Gozney? No. Was I totally wrong? Yes.

The Ninja Artisan Pizza Oven well and truly knocked me off my feet. It warmed up in fifteen minutes and cooked my pizzas perfectly in just three more minutes. There's a handy timer and even controls that would let you play around with the temperature and time, but you won't need to. Ninja serves-up simple perfection on a plate, or should I say pizza stone? I'm serious though. This made some of the best pizzas on test, which I didn't expect. The crusts puffed up, the sauce was sweet, and my cheese was golden brown and stringy. I'm getting hungry just thinking about it again.

You've also got an air fryer function (which is good for an outdoor air fryer, but not as good as Ninja's dedicated models), as well as a prove and bake setting. That makes this one of the most obviously versatile ways to cook more than pizza outside. To the Ninja Artisan's credit, I made some impressive focaccia, cookies, nachos, and veggies in here and I really enjoyed the level of control that an electric oven has to offer.

The other boon of having an electric oven like this is that it can sit on balconies and patios, unlike gas and wood-fired alternatives. That makes it much more accessible for lots of homes. The only downside is that this isn't quite as beautiful as some of the more expensive models, but with the pizzas that this churned out, I'm willing to overlook a boxy design.

You can find out more in my full review.

Best gas pizza oven

Gozney Dome S1 Pizza Oven

Best gas pizza oven

RRP: £1,399 | Dimensions: 70 x 80 x 56 cm | Weight: 48.6 kgs | Fuel type: Gas (rolling flame) | Temperature range: 500˚C

Dual-fuel options
Can fit 2-3 pizzas in at once
Easy to control and set up
Looks really smart
Durable build (I've had these ovens for decades)
Expensive - the stand and cover cost extra too

I could fill a whole guide with Gozney: the Dome S1 is a stellar example of why. It’s slightly bigger than the Arc, so you could squeeze a couple of pizza in, or generally enjoy a more spacious cooking environment for all your fire-powered foods.

I’ve found the Dome to be really durable — it’s an oven that you can leave in the garden and not worry about — and really it's also really forgiving if you're not yet smooth with how you shuffle your pizzas around in the oven.

The Gozney Dome S1 warms up quickly; you’ll be able to cook lots of creative dishes in here; and it looks great too. My latest success in this was a curry night: I slow cooked curry in the day and made some sensational naan breads when my guests arrived. I've also made a bigger roast dinner in here (I tested that in the Gozney Arc too) as well as some amazing tray bakes.

As with all Gozney pizza ovens, you’re paying a little more than the likes of Ninja or Ooni, but I don’t know a single person who regrets their purchase. Gozney owners are proud and I’ve had lots of confessions from owners of less expensive ovens saying that they wished they had splurged on one as substantial as this.

You can find out more in my full review

Best multi-fuel pizza oven

Woody Pizza Oven

Best multi-fuel pizza oven

RRP: £250 | Dimensions: W 48 x D 56.4 x H 34.2 cm | Weight: 12.5 Kg | Fuel type: Gas, coal, and wood | Temperature range: Up to 500°C

Excellent value for money
Multi-fuel options - coal, gas, and wood
Compact and easy to position
Simple to use
Not as robust as some models
Gas set-up is quite fiddly

You won’t find a pizza oven that’s actually worth buying for any cheaper than this. Actually, you won’t find a triple fuel pizza oven that’s cheaper or smaller than this. So, if you are new to pizza making, or you want the flexibility to mix up the furl you use, this is a brilliant place to start.

The beauty of the Woody Pizza Oven is that it comes as a kit. You get your cover, your pizza peel, and all your attachments included, so the price of the oven on the Woody site is exactly what you’ll pay. Woody also provides lots of helpful videos for how to set the Woody up, because it's a little more fiddly with all the different attachments, but once you've dedicated about 30 minutes to getting it in place, you'll be proud of your work. You have to admit, it looks pretty good too, especially for the price.

I made some nice pizza, as well as grilled vegetables and cookies in the Woody. I think anyone would be suitably impressed with it, especially in the context of its price tag. Having cooked on the Gozney and Morso, I know that there are sleeker designs, more sensitive thermometers, and more robust builds. However, for a novice, that doesn’t really matter. This does everything you’d need.

You can find out more in my full review.

Best budget pizza oven

Tefal Jamie Oliver Pizza Oven

Best budget pizza oven

RRP: £300 | Dimensions: 69.3 x 50 x 34 cm | Weight: 10.93 kg | Fuel type: Liquefied Petroleum Gas | Temperature range: 400°C

Beginner-friendly spinning stone makes cooking easy
Quick and consistent cooking
Slim, simple design that suits small spaces
Great price point
Single-fuel
Relatively crude settings
Quite heavy to move aroun

Jamie Oliver is the king of casual cooking and his pizza oven is a brilliant example of why. Reasonably priced, with a neat, rotating pizza stone in the base, it’s a brilliant entry-level option for anyone new to the world of pizza ovens.

Given that I've just talked about what exceptional value the Woody pizza oven is, you might wonder why this (a £50 more expensive one) is my budget choice. I gave this Jamie Oliver Tefal oven the award, because it comes with simplicity as well as a great price tag. The Woody is great, but it can be fiddly and I think that deters people that don't fancy playing around with the different fuel types. Jamie's oven, on the other hand, is super simple.

Another aspect of Tefal's easy, breezy design is the dial. This is connected to the pizza stone and it'll let you rotate the pizza inside the oven without needing the skills of an Italian pizza chef. There are some ovens that can do this automatically, but it’s actually nice to have some control — it lets you focus on cooking your pizzas exactly where you want them.

I made delicious dishes — from a classic pizza through to cookies and nachos — in good time in here. My only caveats are that you need to set aside a couple of hours the first time that you use it — the instructions ask for a lot of heating. The oven also gets quite hot, so keep it high up and away from children. Aside from that, it's good fun, great value, and a really accessible model. Of course. It’s Jamie Oliver after all.

You can find out more in my full review.

Fastest pizza oven

Ooni Karu 2 Pizza Oven

(Image credit: Ooni)

Ooni Karu 12

Fastest pizza oven

RRP: £350 | Dimensions: 76.5 H x 41.4 W x 72 D cm | Weight: 15.3 kgs | Fuel type: Wood or gas | Temperature range: 500 °C

Portable and easy to move around
Wide fuel tray makes it easy to light
Multi-fuel sources
Gas burner sold separately

The iconic Karu is one you'll recognise from just about everywhere. This powerhouse is a favourite amongst influencers and it doesn't take much to work out why. The compact design weighs in at 16 kgs, making it easy to pick up and pop on a heat-proof table outdoors, but you could also take it camping or on your travels.

The impressive oven can reach 500 °C, promising to cook pizza in 60 seconds. I'm in the process of writing up a formal review for this model, but have taken this for a spin at my friend's place and it really is every bit as speedy as it promises to be. And that doesn't leave your ingredients raw — it actually crisps the bases and chars the veggies to absolute perfection.

You've got the benefit of cooking with wood, charcoal, or gas when it comes to the Karu 2, although the gas attachment is sold separately, so don't get caught out if you want to use both. I love the spacious grate, which makes it easy to stack wood into and it actually makes cleaning up the ashes really easy.

Lots of people love the clear glass door that lets you watch the pizza cook, whilst keeping all the heat inside, hence the speedy cheffing. And if you're worried about it fogging up, the team has integrated special technology that has been endlessly praised online, It doesn't mist up.

I am still formally testing the Karu 2, but these are some initial thoughts. I'll update you with a proper review once I've got the pizza sauce off my hands.

Best indoor outdoor pizza oven

Ooni Volt 12 Pizza Oven

(Image credit: Ooni)

Ooni Volt 12

Best indoor outdoor pizza oven

RRP: £799 | Dimensions: H28 x W53 x D62cm | Weight: 18 kgs | Fuel type: Electric | Temperature range: 450°C

The weather can be unpredictable (at the best of times), so if you're planning a pizza party and the clouds come over, it's really helpful to have a pizza oven that works indoors and outdoors. I'd argue that it's more helpful than a guest willing to hold an umbrella over the poor dedicated pizza chef all evening. For this precise reason, I love the Volt 12.

Ooni makes exceptionally good pizza ovens and this is their first foray into the all-electric world. Customers all agree that it delivers on its promise to produce perfect pizza in 90 seconds, which is really speedy. It warms up to 450°C in 20 minutes, which is bang on average for a pizza oven. Whilst some might spot that 450°C is a little lower for a maximum temperature in an oven, I wouldn't recommend cooking a pizza over 350°C, so you're not losing out.

Beginners seem to love the programmed, which help you to pick the perfect temperature for the kind of pizza you're cooking (a Detroit pizza will need more heat than a Neapolitan, for example), but if you're confident, you can scrap the pre-sets all together.

One of the stand-out extras seemed to be the 13" cooking area, which gives you room to roll an unusually shaped pizza (I would aim for a 10-12 inch base). You'll need to wait for it to cool and dry before you move it, so it's worth investing in an oven cover, if you want yours to really last out its warranty period.

I'm still testing the Volt 12, so these are my initial thoughts. You'll get a full update as soon as I am finished.

How we test pizza ovens

Pizzas cooked in the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer

(Image credit: Future)

I’ve been leading the testing at woman&home because my family is in the business of pizza. That means that my weekends, evenings, and school holidays were dominated by cooking in pizza ovens (and, to be honest, they still are).

I have tested all of these with my family, so that we have cast our commercial, expert eyes on the pizza ovens. I've also made sure to test alongside some friends who have never cooked in pizza ovens before, because not everyone approaches pizza ovens from a commercial perspective and I want to see how and where each oven appeals to total beginners. I don’t normally have a crowd for testing, but people seem to come out of the woodwork when they catch a whiff of pizza. Can you blame them?

My tests cover all the basics — making endless pizzas — through to vegetable skillets, nachos, cookies and brownies. I like to test the versatility of a pizza oven, which means determining whether it can do speedy and slow cooking. In my reviews, I’ll also talk about what a pizza oven is like to set up, clean up after, and I’ll compare it to other models on the market. That way, you’ll get a really comprehensive idea of what these ovens are like to live with.

If you still have questions, don’t hesitate to email me. I’m always happy to chat about these, possibly over a slice of pizza. Don't forget that you can read more about how we test pizza ovens on our dedicated page.

How to choose a pizza oven

When you’re buying a pizza oven, there are a few factors to take into consideration. I’ll talk you through these here, with some of my insights into how to find the right one for you.

Price: if you want a pizza oven that's decent, your budget will need to start around £250. These ovens might not be pretty, or they might be flimsy in some places, but they're a great place to start and will definitely show you whether pizza ovens are your thing. As you get more serious, you'll see the price creep up. I'd expect a nice electric oven to come up to £500 and your gas ovens might be around here too. Then, when you're looking at bigger, well-made ovens, you'll see these come into the realms of £1,000. I wouldn't recommend spending more than this unless you have borderline commercial needs.

Size and capacity: this will determine what you cook in your pizza oven, how many you can cater for, and where you can store it too. Most ovens can only take one pizza at a time, so if you know you want to cook more than one at once (very fancy) you'll want a Gozney Dome S1. the others might have quirks, such as chimneys, or heat sensitive bases that will affect where you put your pizza oven. These are all things you'll need to keep in mind when choosing.

Fuel type: most pizza ovens are single fuel, although some can cover multiple different options, but it’s good idea to gauge which you want. Electric pizza ovens are some of the most balcony friendly options and can often be used under cover. They’re reliable, perhaps not as authentic, but they get the job done on a very basic level. Next up, you have gas. This is still pretty easy to control, but you get the joys of a flame. This is a little more authentic and fun — you can play with holding food up to the flame — but gas can be expensive and a little ugly to store. The other classic fuel type is wood. This delivers an authentic, smoky flavour, but it’s a lot more high maintenance. You need a lot more time to heat the oven, you need ti tend to the fire, and it’s a lot less consistent. You also can’t use any old wood — it needs to be kiln dried. Some pizza ovens also take charcoal, which sits somewhere between gas and wood. It’s not really exciting and flavourful, nor is it as consistent as gas.

Special features: pizza ovens are generally really straight forward, but you'll get some nice extras in some models. That might be a rotating stone (handy if you've never cooked a pizza oven before), temperature gauge (really helpful for knowing when to cook), converter for different furl types, or, in the case of some electric models, you might get functions, such as air frying.

Included accessories: some air fryers come with their accessories included and others will require you to buy them separately. To get started, you really want a stand and a pizza peel, so check whether that's included in the price and then account for it depending on what you find. Then, you might be thinking about covers, pizza cutters, and other accessories. These are rarely included, but if you know you want them, it's worth looking out for a package deal, for example.

FAQs

What's better, Ooni or Ninja?

This will really depend on what you want from your pizza oven. I've just finished my tests of the Ninja Artisan Electric Pizza Oven and was really impressed both with the quality and versatility. If you want an oven that can air fry and bake, I'd go for the Ninja. Ooni, on the other hand, are more specialised, so they'll give you more nuanced, expertly tailored pizza ovens. The Volt, for example, works better both indoors and outdoors, whereas I wouldn't take the Ninja inside.

What's the best pizza oven for home?

This will depend on your skill. I love Gozney ovens, but they're more of an investment than a Ninja, for example. If you know you'll use yours a lot, go for a Gozney. They make commercial ovens (my family use them in the restaurant), so they know what good quality looks like). If this is the kind of thing you might buy and use a few times, go for a more entry-level friendly model, such as the Ninja, Tefal, or Woody instead.

What fuel type is best for a pizza oven?

The best fuel type for a pizza oven depends on the cooking style and flavour you’re after, but many pizza enthusiasts favuor wood as it imparts a traditional, smoky flavour and allows the oven to reach very high temperatures quickly. However, gas-fired ovens offer greater convenience, easier temperature control, and faster start-up times, making them a popular choice for home cooks. Some modern ovens are multi-fuel, allowing you to switch between wood, gas, or even charcoal for added versatility.

Personally, I always thought wood-fired was the way to go, because they're the ovens that I was raised on. However, at home, I really love gas. It's a lot easier, lower maintenance, and you still get great flavours.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/best-pizza-ovens/ pCPsUjpCMJoRdx9wMYsKmC Sun, 08 Jun 2025 10:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Our beauty team declare these the 9 best Tatcha products that are actually worth investing in ]]> Equipped with natural Japanese ingredients and timeless rituals, Tatcha's stellar assortment of skincare formulas work to unlock your inner glow.

Since making its debut back in 2009, Tatcha has gone on to make waves in the skincare scene thanks to its lineup of luxurious, quality formulas that are designed to work with the skin, rather than against it. With each formula crafted in Tokyo, the brand boast some of the best cleansers and best face moisturisers on the market - in fact, the Tatcha Dewy Skin Cream has gone on to become a firm favourite in our digital beauty writer's own routine.

For those new to the brand or wondering which formulas to add to your basket, we're here to act as your 'try before you buy' service as we reveal our nine favourite products that the brand has to offer - spoiler, they're truly worth the investment.

Get 20% off

You can currently enjoy a notable 20% discount across Tatcha's entire site for a limited time only! View Deal

The best Tatcha products, chosen by our beauty team

Due to their luxurious, quality formulas, Tatcha products tend to boast investment-worthy price tags. So, that said, we made it our mission to test a full skincare regime from the brand in order to scout out the very best buys that deserve a spot in your very own routine. Without further adieu, these are the 9 products we've hailed the crème de la crème.

How we tested the best Tatcha products

A variety of Tatcha products laid out on a bed

(Image credit: Future/Naomi Jamieson)

When it came to testing the best Tatcha products, we collectively spent the last few months putting the formulas to the ultimate test. We made sure to try our hand at a full skincare routine of products, with a plethora of picks from a number of their ranges. We also tested the buys on our different skin types to see how they fared, for example Naomi has fairly dry skin, whereas Sennen has sensitive combination skin.

When reviewing each product, we made sure to take the following factors into consideration, in order to see which buys came out on top as being worthwhile to part ways with your money for.

  • Ease of application
  • Finish on the skin
  • Results
  • Price
  • Ingredients
  • Amount of product

Your Tatcha FAQs, answered

What is Tatcha's best product?

The answer to this question is mainly down to your own personal preferences and skin needs. That said, Tatcha is mostly known for its popular lineup of moisturising creams, including the famous Dewy Skin Cream, Water Cream and Silk Cream.

While the brand is behind many other gems, of which feature in this guide, we must give honourable mentions to other formulas that impressed us but didn't quite make the cut. For those looking for a quality cleanser, the Matcha Cleanser and Indigo Cleansing Balm are great options that effectively cleanse the complexion of dirt, makeup and impurities.

If you're on the hunt for a kind-to-skin retinol alternative, the Silk Serum is definitely one to have on your radar as it boasts similar results to a retinol, without causing irritation - even on sensitive skin types.Additionally, the Texture Tonic makes one of the best toners for those with oily skin types - without stripping it of all its moisture.

Are Tatcha products suitable for mature skin?

Adorning white packaging, Tatcha's Silk range is designed specifically for those with mature skin in mind. This line makes home to the likes of a moisturiser, cleanser, retinol alternative and face polish, which work to firm, plump and smooth lines on the complexion. However, the rest of the brand's offering can also be incorporated into your routine to address other skin concerns - such as oily, dry or sensitive skin types.

What celebrities use Tatcha products?

It's not just our beauty team who rave about Tatcha, the brand has also amassed a fair few A-lister fans over the years. Harper's Bazaar reported that Jennifer Aniston posted to her Instagram story, revealing that she uses The Serum Stick. This pocket-sized serum is packed full of hydration and designed to blur the appearance of fine lines and minimise makeup creasing - in fact, our Digital Beauty Writer, Naomi is also a fan of the formula in question. Posting to her Shop My page, Meghan Markle also hailed the Serum Stick, as well as the iconic Dewy Skin Cream, as some of her skincare favourites.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/skincare/best-tatcha-products/ Hih97LbPeJfVrW6Cexvjb6 Sun, 08 Jun 2025 07:01:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Walking poles are an 'underrated' way to make hiking easier and boost stability - these are the 8 best ones for 2025 ]]> As an enthusiastic hiker for years now, I have my kit down pat, from my best walking shoes and water-resistant hiking trousers to my trusty thermos. But I have never taken walking poles with me. The reasons are varied, from the misguided presumption that poles are for older people to not feeling like a 'serious' enough hiker to warrant them, and not wanting the faff.

It's a decision I've lived to regret on multiple occasions, having scrambled my way hundreds of times around the Pennies where I live. I finally decided to change my ways this year and reap the benefits of reduced joint impact, more confidence, balance, and stability that come with having "an extra pair of limbs" on the trails, as Andrew Bennett, a buyer for hard goods and accessories for Mountain Warehouse, puts it.

"Walking distributes the effort more evenly between your arms and legs, which helps with fatigue and can make a longer walk feel easier," he says. "They’re especially useful when walking on uneven ground, going up or downhill, or carrying a heavy rucksack, but even on a gentle country path, they can help you walk more comfortably and confidently."

To find my perfect pair, I've been trialling over a dozen walking poles from Leki, Black Diamond, Komperdell and Silva these past few weeks. My favourites have included telescopic and foldable varieties offering different grips, straps, material types, and price points, bringing my roundup of the best to eight walking poles. I also asked the experts for guidance on buying (and using) walking poles for my next trip.

The best walking poles, tested by a true hiker

The best walking poles overall

1. Black Diamond Pursuit Shock Trekking Poles

Best walking poles overall

Useable length: 100-125cm (S/M) | Collapsed length: 62cm (S/M) | Weight (per pole): 232g (S/M) | Material: Cork grip, aluminium shaft

Solid pole, good for balance
Two colourways and two sizes (S/M and M/L)
Sweat-free grip
Easy adjustments
They are not super light
Do not fold

I had heard good things about the Pursuit Shock Trekking Poles from Black Diamond, and they didn’t disappoint. Not that it is all about style, but these walking poles look sleek, and they are available in two sizes: small/medium and medium/large. You don't always get this option with walking poles, so I was impressed.

Made with aluminium, which is sturdier but typically heavier than carbon fibre, these telescopic walking poles make an excellent choice if balance, as opposed to speed, is key for you. I tried them out on some steep hillsides in the Pennines across grassy and rocky paths. Normally, I scramble about on my hands and hope for the best, but this time, I was covered, and even as a walking pole novice, I felt confident using the Black Diamond Pursuit Shock Trekking Poles. I especially enjoyed using them downhill, when I benefited from better balance and less pressure on my legs.

The poles have an ergonomic cork grip, which felt comfortable to hold and didn’t get slippery despite the warm weather, and a ‘Bloom’ (an algae-infused foam, I learned) grip extension that offers another hold option when tackling particularly steep terrain. There are also wide, slightly spongy wrist straps for extra support that are tagged left and right.

Although they are not foldable walking poles, I found them easy to carry in my 15L rucksack. Compared to other poles, the ‘soft touch’ flicklock adjustments are easy to use when adjusting the length, and there's a hex tool for maintenance. They also have features for walking in the snow and colder climates, if that's a must-have for you. At £160 full price, these are not the cheapest walking poles on the market, but they are solid all-rounders that will last, and in that respect, I consider them the best investment.

The best walking poles on Amazon

2. FitLife Aluminium Trekking Poles

Best on Amazon

Usable length: 130cm | Collapsed length: 65cm | Weight (per pole): 270g | Material: Rubber grip, aluminium shaft

Feel sturdy to use
A tip kit and carry bag are included, as well as tips and baskets
Budget-friendly
Only one size
Not lightweight

Amazon is a one-stop shop for walking poles, but the sheer volume of choice can be overwhelming. And of course, it makes it trickier that you can’t try before you buy, so for guidance, I turned to the site’s reviews and with over 10k of them (90% above 4 stars), TheFitLife Aluminium Hiking Poles stood out. Priced at £24.99, they are a steal, especially when you consider what you get for that price, which includes five colour options (black, blue, purple, red and silver), a carry bag, tips (that go on the end to reduce sound and impact on the ground), baskets and clips for storage.

Being candid, they do lack the finesse of premium poles. After trying them for myself, I found the thin straps are not as comfortable as other softer options. There is a twist lock system to adjust the height of the poles, as opposed to the typically preferred flicklock, and they have a rubber (not cork) grip, which got a little slippery when my palms were sweating.

However, basic as they are, these walking poles do a great job and should be all you need to reap the benefits of walking. Despite the low price point, reviewers have talked about using them on Ben Nevis and Snowdon, and I found them a breeze to use when traversing tricky moorland. They also come with rubber tips, which are useful when walking on harder ground as they don’t make any noise. These are solid, no-nonsense walking poles. Time will tell as to how long the last, but as it stands, I thoroughly recommend them as a budget buy.

The best lightweight walking poles

3. Komperdell Borea Carbon Pro Walking Poles

Best lightweight poles

Usable length: 90 - 120cm | Collapsed length: 57cm | Weight (per pole): 213g | Material: Cork grip, carbon shaft

Very lightweight
Beautiful design
Very comfortable to use
Only one size option
May be too light for some

The Komperdell Borea Carbon Pro has been designed with women in mind and it looks beautiful, with a white pole shaft, delicate detailing, and metallic gold lever locks. But there is more to it than simply aesthetics, with technical features that make it a delight to use on walks and hikes.

These telescopic walking poles are divided into three sections. The two higher sections are carbon and the lower section is titanal (an aluminium alloy) for extra durability. Immediately, I noticed how lightweight these poles were. Handy for packing, but they came into their own when I'd been hiking for over an hour and wasn't experiencing any arm fatigue. I also loved the cork grip, which moulded beautifully to my hands from the off and remained comfortable throughout the hikes, even when there was a lot of climbing. An extended grip runs down the handle, which is useful for tackling steep ascents, and the padded wrist strap was extremely comfortable.

These poles are relatively pricey at almost £136 full price, but they are still cheaper than my top choice and some of the most stylish and comfortable walking poles I've ever used. The only thing I would say is that while they felt durable on my hikes, and I did feel like I was zipping along, you might want to consider a heavier, fully aluminium-based pole if you are tackling particularly challenging terrain for lengthy periods.

The best walking poles for seniors

4. Eurohike Trekker Antishock Walking Pole

Best for seniors

Usable length: 110 - 130cm | Collapsed length: 80cm | Weight (per pole): 280g | Material: Aluminium shaft

Focuses on anti-shock
Extended handle for added grip
Competitive price point
Sold individually
Not suitable for tougher terrains

There's no age limit on walking, but as the years go by, we (and those we love) need a little more support than we used to - even more than what most standard hiking poles offer. This particular category, and the Eurohike Trekker Antishock Walking Pole, fits the bill perfectly with its hybrid features.

It might not have all the bells and whistles offered by higher-end walking poles, but this is a simple, easy-to-use telescopic walking pole with an aluminium pole shaft that feels durable and robust. As the manufacturers highlight, the antishock system reduces impact and eases pressure on the lower spine, hips, knees and legs while walking. It also has an extended ergonomic handle and a wrist strap, so you don’t have to worry about crouching down to pick the pole off the floor if you drop it. At £16 too, it's a real steal.

However, to adjust the system, you use a twist lock system, rather than a lever lock system, which might prove tricky if you have reduced mobility and strength in your hands. The Eurohike Trekker Antishock Walking Pole also doesn’t collapse compactly, so you will be holding it one way or another when you are out, which is something to consider.

Although they are sold individually, which is how I trialled the pole, for optimum balance, gait, stability and confidence, expert advice is that it is always preferable to use two walking poles.

The best walking poles for trekking

5. Leki Cressida FX Carbon Trekking Poles

Best for trekking

Usable length: 100 - 120cm | Collapsed length: 40cm | Weight (per pole): 245g | Material: Cork grip, carbon shaft

Premium materials
An all-rounder that will last
Sleek, compact design
Suitable for longer distance
Not the lightest option
Wrist straps feel thinner

The Leki Cressida FX Carbon walking pole is the most expensive of all I trialled, so expectations were high, but thankfully, they didn’t disappoint. Not only is it a stylish walking pole, with its pop of turquoise, but the high-tech features create a comfortable and versatile hiking experience.

Although hiking and trekking involve walking, trekking trips tend to be longer and more challenging than traditional hiking, which could be as simple as an early morning walk. You'll be trekking if you're going for a multi-day trip, for instance. Lightweight, fast and supportive, these make an exceptional choice as trekking poles.

These foldable walking poles have been designed primarily for women, which is most noticeable in the ergonomic soft cork grip, created for smaller hands. The mini ledge on the grip and extended cork grip of over five inches meant my hands felt wonderfully supported when hiking on the uneven moorland and hills.

The pole shafts are made from carbon fibre, which is uber light while maintaining strength. They are easy to stretch out and click into place using the external locking system. You can also adjust the length. Poles at higher price points can be overly complicated, but as a walking pole novice, this was welcomingly simple. They also fold down compactly into sections and come with a mesh bag, which is handy when carrying them in your rucksack or storing them away.

Overall, these are impressive poles, which I felt confident using when trekking in both wet and dry conditions. They are expensive, so unless money is no object, I would only recommend these walking poles if you are a year-round avid hiker or gearing up for a big challenge. Otherwise, you could do as well with a cheaper option.

The best walking poles for speed

6. Leki Cross Trail Carbon Walking Poles

Best for speed

Usable length: 100 - 135cm | Collapsed length: 65cm | Weight (per pole): 217g | Material: Faux cork foam grip, carbon shaft

Suitable for running too
Lightweight
Very comfortable to use
Telescopic design might not suit all

If there is one thing I am keen to try this year, it's trail running. If I embark on that new journey, I will absolutely be utilising these Cross Trail Carbon poles from Leki. Created for moving lightly and swiftly across hills and fells, these telescopic carbon poles are light and can be used for speedier hikes as well as trail runs, with glove-like straps for freer movement on the trails.

On first impression, I loved the look of these walking poles with the marble-effect green and white design on the pole shaft. The grip is unique, too. At first, it looks like your regular cork grip, but it's a comfortable foam. Straps are attached and together, they make up what's described as a 'Shark System', which basically means you can attach or detach the glove by clicking it in and out of the grip. I'll admit this took a bit of work to figure out initially, but it's actually quite simple when you know how. For those looking to get into trail running, I certainly recommend it.

It is also easy to extend and retract the pole shaft and to clamp them into place, but a foldable, or collapsible pair of walking poles would obviously be quicker to adjust, and something to consider if you want to save time and effort.

The best mid range walking poles

7. Silva Aluminium Walking Poles

Best mid-range walking poles

Usable length: 100 - 140cm | Collapsed length: 86cm | Weight (per pole): 227g | Material: Rubber grip, aluminium shaft

Comfortable wrist straps
Feel secure to use
Suitable for longer distances
Cheaper than others on the list
Not very compact

It's fair to say that walking poles fall on the pricier side of the spectrum. So, I knew I had to add a middle-range option, and luckily, the Silva Aluminium Walking Poles fit that category perfectly at just under £50 for the pair. These one-size telescopic pale blue walking poles are made from aluminium, so they are intended to cope with varied terrain, and they are made to last.

The Silva Aluminium Walking Poles are not the most compact accessory, but I found they can be strapped to the side of your rucksack with little fuss, and given the reasonable price tag, I was happy to compromise on this. The simplicity of them is the main selling point, though - they are perfect if you're after poles that don't need tweaking or a manual to know how to use them. You can just get out there.

The plain rubber grip doesn't stand out, but the wrist gloves do, as they are as substantial as those on the Leki Cross Trail Carbon poles I tried, but they don't clip on and off as easily and are a fraction of the price. These ones also have rubber 'paws' that protect the tips of the poles and prevent that click-clacking sound on hard ground.

These might not be the most unique or high-tech walking poles on the market, but like the price tag, they make a modest choice. I found them the ideal option if you want dependable poles without parting with a lot of cash.

The best budget compact walking pole

8. Decathlon Forclaz 1Ultra Compact Trekking Pole

Best budget compact walking pole

Usable length: 110 - 130cm | Collapsed length: 36cm | Weight (per pole): 284g | Material: Foam grip, aluminium shaft

Great price point
Brilliantly compact
Comfortable to use
Lightweight but sturdy
Extended handle
Tubes are wider than average

Whether you need some walking poles for a holiday or you're just getting into walking and want to know what to take hiking as a beginner, you don't want to spend serious money on this accessory, especially with all the other kit you have to buy. When I tried Decathlon’s Forclaz 1Ultra Compact Trekking Pole, I knew I'd found my budget option.

I should note that these are sold individually, but it is always advisable to use two walking poles when hiking.

Reading about the design, a lot of effort was put into making them as durable as possible, hence the wide aluminium pole shafts. Despite this, they feel light, and I found them easy to assemble. You do this by extending the poles, which are connected by a tension string, and clicking them into place with a lever lock and a push pin locking system, which sits around a third of the way down the pole.

These poles have an extended handle and an extended grip beneath that. The former might not be to everyone’s tastes, but I found it secure and comfortable, and the combination provided plenty of hold options when hiking, especially when the terrain was undulating. I noticed some customers complained in reviews that the pole hadn’t coped well in soft ground, but I didn’t find this to be the case - at least so far on my travels. The poles felt comfortingly robust to use, fit snugly in your rucksack, and don’t cost the earth. There is a lot to like.

Testing the best walking poles

Susan Griffin testing the best hiking poles in the Pennines

Susan Griffin spent weeks testing the best walking poles in the Pennines. (Image credit: Susan Griffin)

How we tested the best walking poles

I am no stranger to hiking and have written extensively about the benefits of hiking, whether an early morning walk or a lengthy hike out in the Pennines close to where I live. I've also tested plenty of hiking kit over the last few years, from the best hiking sandals to workout leggings.

For this trial, I went on a minimum of two walks with each of the walking poles, a shorter walk to get to grips with the pole, and longer ones to see how it fared with extended use.

In the name of fairness, I used them on similar terrain. This was typically hilly, uneven moorland and pathways. I assessed how they looked, how they felt to hold and use, how confident and stable I felt, how easy they were to adjust in length, and how compact they were for carrying. Note: I did not trial the Eurohike walking pole under these conditions as that's not the intended purpose. Instead, I trialled it in my local park, which has gentle slopes.

I also requested advice and tips from three experts (two buyers from leading outdoor companies and one hiking leader) about the benefits of using walking poles and how to use them optimally, incorporating my own experience with the expert advice.

I considered the following:

  • Comfort: As with all outdoor clothing and kit, comfort is absolute key when using walking poles. I took into account how light (or heavy) they were and how the handle felt in my hands, both on opening and during the hikes.
  • Support: The main reason for using walking poles is undoubtedly to enjoy greater balance and stability, so this was key when reviewing the walking poles. Essentially, did it make me feel more confident going up and down hills, or did it feel like a hindrance? If it was the latter, they didn't make this list.
  • Grip: Another essential factor to get right is the handle grip. I considered the type of materials used and how that would impact use and cost, as well as the shape and whether it was ergonomic.
  • Material: I took into consideration the types of material used for the walking poles, and what impact this would have on weight, durability, comfort and use.
  • Price point: Walking poles are a luxury for many and don't always come cheap. I tried to find a set that met the other criteria in all different price brackets and assessed whether pricier options were worth the spend.
  • Additional details: Aside from the specific specs of each walking pole, I also looked at the design, whether there were colourway options, whether they came with storage clips, a storage bag, and various tips and baskets, and if modifications had been made with women in mind.

Susan Griffin

Susan Griffin has been hiking for about a decade, exploring routes around the Pennines and in Europe. (Image credit: Susan Griffin)

How to choose the best walking poles for you

  • What are you using them for? “For mixed or rough terrain, look for something adjustable and sturdy, with click-lock mechanisms and robust materials. For flatter ground, a simpler, lighter option might be all you need,” says Bennett.
  • How are you, and how long are your arms/torso? This is crucial for determining the correct pole length,” says Steve Davies, the head buyer for Trekitt. "Adjustable poles are versatile for different terrains and can be shared, but fixed-length poles can be lighter overall."
  • How important is weight vs durability? For long distances, lighter poles (made of carbon fibre) are preferable, but they are often more expensive and can be less durable depending on their design. "Aluminium poles offer a good balance of durability and weight,” says Davies.
  • Do you need to carry and store them? Folding poles pack down small and can easily be stowed inside a rucksack. "Telescopic poles also collapse down well and can be strapped to the outside of most walking packs. If you plan to store them regularly, check the collapsed length and storage method,” says Bennett.
  • What season are you using them in? "Not all poles will have the relevant accessories available for different conditions, so checking the available accessories (sometimes included in the description online) is a useful step for getting the most out of your poles and making sure you choose the right pair,” says Davies.
  • Are they going to need repairing? Both Black Diamond and Leki have comprehensive spare parts catalogues for their poles, parts like carbide tips and rubber protectors, and spare pole sections, locking mechanisms and spare straps should they be needed, says Davies.

What are the benefits of using walking poles?

I was always aware of the benefits of using walking poles, even if I never previously committed to them. This trial experience, however, has made me a convert. It's not only the physical benefits I’ve noticed, such as less pressure on my joints, but mental ones like increased confidence.

Siân Brewer, an outdoor enthusiast and hiking leader who runs Discover Your Outdoors, has used walking poles for years.

“I find poles really handy when walking on uneven ground," she tells me. "They support my body on more challenging walks, provide extra balance and are great for testing out how boggy the ground is before I overcommit and find myself up to my knees! That said, poles are also great on flat terrain for building up a bit more speed."

She also notes that "using poles can help take pressure off your legs, especially when going downhill or carrying a heavier rucksack."

Walking poles can also improve your walking workout by targeting other muscles in the body. "Using them can also activate the triceps more, and for anyone returning from injury or building up to more challenging activity, they can help spread the load," she says. Throw in a weighted vest for walking, and you have a full-body weighted workout, complete with stability exercises.

How to use walking poles

  • Adjust the height: When you hold the pole, your elbow should make a right angle, Brewer says.
  • Make sure the pole is under your hand: "Slip your hand through the wrist strap so the pole is dangling under your hand," says Brewer. "Move your hand down to grip the handle, with the wrist strap tucked under your thumb and palm. You should be able to push down into the strap, with your palm using that pushing movement to propel you along."
  • Keep the poles angled backwards: Its more energy efficient to keep the poles angled slightly backwards with every step rather than flicking them forwards, she notes.
  • Find a rhythm: "On flat ground, swing the poles in rhythm with your stride," says Bennett. "When going uphill, shorten the poles slightly and use them to push yourself up. On descents, lengthen them and use them to absorb the shock.”

Tips for using walking poles

  • Keep your poles clean: It will be tempting to put your poles away after your hike, but Davies suggests checking the locking mechanisms and tips of the poles regularly, and giving them a clean before putting them away. This will help them last longer.
  • Find your technique: "Try to keep a natural rhythm, planting the pole opposite your lead foot," says Bennett. But don't worry if you don't get it right the first time. "As with all things outdoors, it’s important to figure out what works for you and that might take a few goes," adds Brewer.
  • Check your surroundings: "You might want to avoid poles when scrambling or using your hands for balance. Also, in areas with fragile ecosystems or historic sites, it’s best to check if poles are permitted. Using rubber tips can help minimise impact on sensitive ground," says Bennett.
  • Make use of the help there is: "Some outdoor retailers or walking groups offer introductory sessions on how to use walking poles correctly, or head to YouTube for instructional videos on using walking poles," says Davies.

Meet the experts on walking poles

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/health-wellbeing/fitness/best-walking-poles/ DeaAW487iV2qoQLCSqEaJJ Mon, 02 Jun 2025 14:17:17 +0000
<![CDATA[ The best KitchenAid mixers to help you up your baking game ]]> Think of a stand mixer and the best KitchenAid mixers will likely come to mind. The iconic brand has become synonymous with stylish, colorful products that are designed to be easy to use, and produce practically perfect results every time.

I've been testing the best stand mixers and hand mixers for years. Whilst competitors can offer more affordable prices and modern extras, KitchenAid has always consistently delivered on stylish designs and products that will last. There's a reason people have been using the KitchenAid Artisan (my favourite stand mixer) for nearly a century.

As you start to browse KitchenAid's offering, you'll see that there's a lot on offer, so I've brought in my practical experience to help you find the right one for you. Whether that's a hand mixer that you can hide in a drawer or the famously stunning Design Series with a wooden bowl. Here's everything you need to know about KitchenAid's mixers, including which KitchenAid attachments are worth the extra investment.

The quick list

If you want a little flavour of what the best KitchenAid mixers have to offer, here's a short summary of what I found them like to use. You can find more detail further down the guide:

Load the next 2 products ↴

Best KitchenAid mixers for fluffier cakes, better bread, and whipped cream that's light-as-air

KitchenAid Artisan Bowl Lift vs KitchenAid Classic

(Image credit: Future)

The KitchenAid shelves are richly decorated with over 40 different colour options, plenty of impressive KitchenAid accessories, and various bowls and bowl sizes. They're careful to ensure that each new model offers something different to every kind of baker. Here are my top picks:

Best KitchenAid stand mixer overall

Image 1 of 6

KitchenAid 4.8-litre Artisan Stand Mixer

(Image credit: Future)
Image 2 of 6

KitchenAid 4.8-litre Artisan Stand Mixer controls

(Image credit: Future)
Image 3 of 6

KitchenAid 4.8-litre Artisan Stand Mixer bread dough

(Image credit: Future)
Image 4 of 6

KitchenAid 4.8-litre Artisan Stand Mixer whipped cream

(Image credit: Future)
Image 5 of 6

KitchenAid 4.8-litre Artisan Stand Mixer chocolate cake mix

(Image credit: Future)
Image 6 of 6

KitchenAid 4.8-litre Artisan Stand Mixer accessories

(Image credit: Future)

1. KitchenAid 4.8L Artisan Stand Mixer

The best KitchenAid stand mixer overall

RRP: £549 | Colourways: 36 | Wattage: 325W | Speeds: 10 | Capacity: 4.8 litres | Attachments included: 3 | Dishwasher-safe attachments: Yes

Extensive range of colour, attachment and bowl options
Versatile, sturdy, and robust design
Covers the needs of most home bakers
Impressive power
Weighty
Expensive in comparison

If you spot a KitchenAid stand mixer in someone's kitchen, I'd put money that it's going to be this model. The Artisan is the brand's most popular stand mixer, loved by Princess Katherine, Paul Hollywood, and Nigella Lawson. After testing it, you can add me to that list too.

With the Artisan, you get to enjoy the KitchenAid aesthetics. It comes in 36 different colours, with a stylish bowl and your essential accessories. The Artisan fits all KitchenAid's extra bowls and special accessories, so you could re-style it with some ceramic bowls and a blending attachment.

I didn't just give this the top spot for its looks though. The Artisan made perfect cake, thick cream, and smooth bread dough in all my tests. It isn't noisy, nor is it fiddly to work. In short, it's a dream come true.

Read more in my full KitchenAid Artisan 4.8L Stand Mixer review.

Most stylish KitchenAid stand mixer

Image 1 of 5

KitchenAid Design Series 4.7L Artisan Evergreen Stand Mixer unboxed on the counter

(Image credit: Future)
Image 2 of 5

KitchenAid Design Series 4.7L Artisan Evergreen Stand Mixer accessories

(Image credit: Future)
Image 3 of 5

KitchenAid Design Series 4.7L Artisan Evergreen Stand Mixer whipping cream

(Image credit: Future)
Image 4 of 5

KitchenAid Design Series 4.7L Artisan Evergreen Stand Mixer making bread dough

(Image credit: Future)
Image 5 of 5

KitchenAid Design Series 4.7L Artisan Evergreen Stand Mixer making cake batter

(Image credit: Future)

2. KitchenAid Evergreen 4.7L Artisan Stand Mixer

The most beautiful KitchenAid stand mixer

RRP: £899 | Colourways: 1 | Wattage: 325W | Speeds: 10 | Capacity: 4.7 litres | Attachments included: 3 | Dishwasher-safe attachments: Yes, but not the bowl

Special, limited edition design that makes a style statement
Robust and powerful KitchenAid motor
Versatile attachments 
Expensive

All the rumours are true. The KitchenAid Evergreen Design Series Stand Mixer, informally known as "the one with the wooden bowl" is as beautiful as you would expect it to be. The deep moss green body pairs with a walnut bowl that's truly one-of-a-kind.

With a 4.7L capacity and all the signature KitchenAid parts, this works as well as the Artisan that scored top spot in this buying guide. Astute readers will have spotted that this has 0.1L less capacity in the bowl, but that makes almost no difference in baking. My cake was just as delicate, my whipped cream was light-as-air, and my bread dough melted in the mouth.

The only reason this isn't the only stand mixer in this buying guide is that it's expensive. The Design Series is a limited edition stand mixer and it's widely coveted, which comes at a cost. If you like the finer things in life, this is worth the splurge. Just take good care of that gorgeous walnut bowl, please.

You can find out more in my full KitchenAid Evergreen Design Series Stand Mixer review.

Best KitchenAid stand mixer for serious bakers

Image 1 of 8

KitchenAid 5.6L Bowl Lift Stand Mixer on counter

(Image credit: Future)
Image 2 of 8

KitchenAid 5.6L Bowl Lift Stand Mixer box

(Image credit: Future)
Image 3 of 8

KitchenAid 5.6L Bowl Lift Stand Mixer unboxing

(Image credit: Future)
Image 4 of 8

KitchenAid 5.6L Bowl Lift Stand Mixer cupcake

(Image credit: Future)
Image 5 of 8

KitchenAid 5.6L Bowl Lift Stand Mixer cream

(Image credit: Future)
Image 6 of 8

KitchenAid 5.6L Bowl Lift Stand Mixer attachments

(Image credit: Future)
Image 7 of 8

KitchenAid 5.6L Bowl Lift Stand Mixer dough

(Image credit: Future)
Image 8 of 8

KitchenAid 5.6L Bowl Lift Stand Mixer funnel

(Image credit: Future)

3. KitchenAid 5.6L Tilt-Head Stand Mixer

Best KitchenAid stand mixer for serious bakers

Colourways: 1 | Wattage: 325W | Speeds: 10 | Capacity: 4.7 litres | Attachments included: 3 | Dishwasher-safe attachments: Yes, but not the bowl

Special, limited edition design that makes a style statement
Robust and powerful KitchenAid motor
Versatile attachments 
Expensive

One of the largest of the KitchenAid stand mixers, this whopping bowl-lift model is just as efficient as it looks. Tall, sleek, and sturdy, it has a large, 5.6-litre, stainless steel bowl that can mix enough cake batter for four cakes; knead 3.7 kgs of dough, and make 11 dozen cookies.

Alongside the immense capacity comes some neat, extra features. My favourite is the half-speed setting, which mimics hand-folding. I've made lemon and raspberry cake as well as blueberry muffins without the batter being dyed red or blue. Thanks to the bowl-lift mechanism, this remains grounded and stable, even when full to the brim of thick, dense dough.

This is also really quiet, so if you know you need something heavy duty, it's worth spending the extra money on a bowl-lift model. However, if you don't feel that your baking really pushes the limits of the average stand mixer, you'll be fine opting for a cheaper, tilt-head model. It's a lot less confusing.

You can find out more in my full review of the 5.6-litre KitchenAid stand mixer.

Best KitchenAid for small spaces

KitchenAid 9-Speed Hand Mixer KHM926ER

(Image credit: Image credit: KitchenAid)

4. KitchenAid 9-Speed Hand Mixer KHM926ER

Best KitchenAid mixer for small spaces

RRP: £109 | Speeds: Nine | Tools: Two x beaters, two x dough hooks, whisk, blending rod, storage bag | Wattage: 85W

Lots of speeds with soft start
Lockable swivel cord
Great range of accessories
More expensive hand mixer

It's easy to get whipped up in all the stand mixer madness when, actually a hand mixer will do the job you need. An elaborate hand mixer can cover the same basic functions of a stand mixer and nobody makes hand mixers better than KitchenAid.

With their 9-speed model, you get the choice of all KitchenAid's classic colourways, so you don't lose out on style, whilst benefitting from a range of attachments. KitchenAid sends two beaters, two dough hooks, a whisk, and a blending rod (ideal for smoothies and sauces). That's plenty to be baking with, and trust me, I did.

Over time, I appreciated the soft-grip handle, which makes it easy to hold, as well as the durable stainless steel beaters. I felt like I could use this forever, except on max speed (9). That's a workout. Whilst the ninth speed setting is strong, there's a soft start function that made sure I didn't make any flour clouds or spills in each task.

Tasks with a higher liquid content, such as whisking and mixing, are really easy with the hand mixer. However, if you're making a thick bread dough, you might be in better hands with a KitchenAid Stand Mixer.

The formal review for this is pending. These are my initial thoughts.

Best KitchenAid stand mixer for big batches

Image 1 of 7

KitchenAid 6.6-litre Artisan Bowl Lift Stand Mixer with accessories

(Image credit: Future)
Image 2 of 7

KitchenAid 6.6-litre Artisan Bowl Lift Stand Mixer accessories

(Image credit: Future)
Image 3 of 7

KitchenAid 6.6-litre Artisan Bowl Lift Stand Mixer conttrols

(Image credit: Future)
Image 4 of 7

KitchenAid 6.6-litre Artisan Bowl Lift Stand Mixer dough

(Image credit: Future)
Image 5 of 7

KitchenAid 6.6-litre Artisan Bowl Lift Stand Mixer cookie dough

(Image credit: Future)
Image 6 of 7

KitchenAid 6.6-litre Artisan Bowl Lift Stand Mixer whisk working

(Image credit: Future)
Image 7 of 7

KitchenAid 6.6-litre Artisan Bowl Lift Stand Mixer on the counter

(Image credit: Future)

5. KitchenAid Artisan 6.6-litre Stand Mixer

Best KitchenAid stand mixer for big batches

RRP: £899 | Weight: 15.7 kgs | Colourways: 4 | Wattage: 375W | Speeds: 10 (including 1/2 speed) | Capacity: 6.6 litres | Attachments included: 4 | Dishwasher-safe attachments: Yes

Stable, even when working with tough dough
Incredibly powerful, without overheating
Stylish design and good range of colour options
Huge capacity caters to bigger bakes (but can be adjusted for smaller ones)
Weighty
An investment price point
Bowl-lift design isn't for everyone

This is almost identical to the 5.6-litre bowl lift KitchenAid Stand Mixer that stole a spot as the best KitchenAid stand mixer for serious bakers. The only difference is that this is 1 litre bigger: you can add half a dozen cookies, another couple of pizza's worth of dough, and another 12 cupcakes worth of mix into the bowl. It's rare that you'll actually need this kind of capacity, but if you're a professional baker, this is the one you'll want.

I came across this because everyone was asking "which stand mixer do professionals use?" I asked around and all the bakers, from Australian TV baking icons through to Artisan bakers, pointed me in the direction of this stand mixer. It's powerful, versatile, boasts the impressive half-speed setting, and unbeatable stability. In short, it's perfect for serious bakers.

Much as I love the quality and power of this model, it's expensive and would be overkill for most homes. You can find out more about whether this is for you in my breakdown of the bowl-lift vs. tilt-head stand mixers.

You can find out more in my full review of the KitchenAid Artisan 6.6-litre Stand Mixer.

Best KitchenAid stand mixer for beginners

Image 1 of 7

KitchenAid Classic Stand Mixer

(Image credit: Future)
Image 2 of 7

KitchenAid Classic Stand Mixer cake mix

(Image credit: Future)
Image 3 of 7

KitchenAid Classic Stand Mixer bread dough

(Image credit: Future)
Image 4 of 7

KitchenAid Classic Stand Mixer cookie dough

(Image credit: Future)
Image 5 of 7

Side controls of the KitchenAid Classic Stand Mixer

(Image credit: Future)
Image 6 of 7

KitchenAid Classic Stand Mixer power scale

(Image credit: Future)
Image 7 of 7

KitchenAid Classic Stand Mixer accessories

(Image credit: Future)

6. KitchenAid Classic Stand Mixer

It's got the prestige, without the price

RRP: £449 | Weight: 10.5 kgs | Colourways: 2 | Wattage: 275W | Speeds: 10 | Capacity: 4.3 litres | Attachments included: 3 | Dishwasher-safe attachments: Yes

Comes with the KitchenAid name
Powerful and versatile
Cheapest KitchenAid you can buy
Still an expensive stand mixer
Smaller capacity than most
Limited colour options
No handle on bowl

KitchenAid refers to this as its entry-level stand mixer model but it certainly doesn’t skimp on quality. It has a nice roomy bowl, feels super sturdy and does all the basics—mixing, whipping and kneading—flawlessly.

Lots of people ask me what the difference is between the Artisan and the Classic and there isn't very much. There are fewer speed settings, the bowl doesn't have a handle, and it's a little less powerful. It's a much more humble stand mixer, but you can buy a nicer bowl and all the KitchenAid accessories are compatible with the Classic, so you can accessorise it until it rivals an Artisan.

As with the hand mixer, this does a really good job of whipping cream and mixing cake batters, but when it comes to tougher doughs, you might see the Classic wobble. Quite literally. For a casual baker, it's all you need. However, if you're ready to invest in your baking accessories, you might need something extra.

You can find out more in my full KitchenAid Classic review.

Most colourful KitchenAid stand mixer

Image 1 of 7

KitchenAid COTY Artisan 4.7L Stand Mixer on the counter (2)

(Image credit: Future)
Image 2 of 7

Side shot of the KitchenAid COTY Artisan 4.7L Stand Mixer

(Image credit: Future)
Image 3 of 7

Side profile of the KitchenAid COTY Artisan 4.7L Stand Mixer whipping cream

(Image credit: Future)
Image 4 of 7

KitchenAid COTY Artisan 4.7L Stand Mixer kneading dough

(Image credit: Future)
Image 5 of 7

KitchenAid COTY Artisan 4.7L Stand Mixer making cake batter

(Image credit: Future)
Image 6 of 7

KitchenAid COTY Artisan 4.7L Stand Mixer whipping cream

(Image credit: Future)
Image 7 of 7

KitchenAid COTY Artisan 4.7L Stand Mixer pouring shield

(Image credit: Future)

7. KitchenAid Artisan 5KSM175PS stand mixer

Best KitchenAid stand mixer for an iconic colour

RRP: £499 | Weight: 10.98kg | Wattage: 300W | Speeds: 10 | Capacity: 4.8 litres & 2.8 litres | Attachments included: Five | Dishwasher-safe attachments: Some

Two bowls included alongside a pastry cutter
Powerful motor and versatile attachments
Limited edition colour of the year
Heavy

I just had to show you this stand mixer, as it comes in KitchenAid's 'Colour of the Year' — Butter Yellow — which interior designers are calling "the new neutral". It's a bright and happy hue that's still subtle enough to integrate into tonal homes.

As well as the three standard attachments, this 10-speed design comes with a flexi-beater, pastry cutter, splash guard, and a second bowl. It's more expensive — both because you get an upgraded set of accessories and because this will only be available for a year — but I think it's worth the splurge if you're a serious baker.

As with the Design Series Evergreen KitchenAid Stand Mixer, the Colour of the Year riffs off the main KitchenAid Artisan model that's in top spot. It has the same power and the same capabilities, but you can actually make more of them. I used the two bowls to make different batches of bread dough and the pastry cutter inspired me to write a dedicated article to this clever attachment too.

You can find out more in my full KitchenAid Colour of the Year Stand Mixer review.

Best cordless KitchenAid mixer

KitchenAid Cordless Hand Mixer 5KHMB732

(Image credit: Image credit: KitchenAid)

8. KitchenAid Cordless Hand Mixer 5KHMB732

Best cordless KitchenAid mixer

RRP: £149 | Speeds: Seven | Tools: Two x beaters, electric charger | Volts: 110

Cordless
Easy to store and compact
Stand-up design
No whisk or dough hook
Needs charging

If you're looking for one of the best hand mixers to do light work and take up limited storage, then this KitchenAid cordless model is a fantastic option. With no need to plug it in, you have the freedom to use it anywhere, rather than simply where your power point is situated. The only thing to keep in mind is to charge your mixer when the battery is low. If you don't remember to charge it, you may be waiting a while to start mixing when you next want to use it as the charge point is only accessible when the mixer is off, meaning you can’t plug it in while using it. This shouldn’t be an issue though, as KitchenAid say that this model should be able to make a whopping 200 cookies in four batches on a full charge.

I tested the matte charcoal grey mixer (which also comes in Black, Empire Red and White) and its super-shiny appearance is ideal for matching up with KitchenAid’s other appliances.

This mixer has a rounded shape with a curvy handle that makes it almost retro in design. Power-wise I can’t fault it, as the seven speeds adjust smoothly without splattering ingredients everywhere. Could I have done with a whisk for the egg whites? Yes. Is it the lightest hand mixer around? No. What it is though, is easy to use, powerful enough, flexible and the best KitchenAid mixer if you have few power points in your kitchen.

I'm still testing this in our kitchen, so these are my initial thoughts. A full review will be coming soon.

How we test the best KitchenAid mixers

Hand mixer vs stand mixer - making cake

(Image credit: Future)

I test the KitchenAid stand mixers and hand mixers in exactly the same way that I would any other stand mixer and hand mixer. I have a series of set recipes that will highlight the strengths and weaknesses of the mixer overall, but also of specific attachments.

The main three tests that I run are: mixing cake batter with the beater, kneading bread with the dough hook, and whipping cream with the whisk. These are classic tasks that your mixer should fly through. I'll be able to tell whether the mixer has enough power to do a good job, whilst picking up on how versatile it is, how thorough, and how nice it is to use. The best models fly through tasks, delivering well-mixed results without a splash.

After the formal tests, I'll clean and store the mixer before coming to a conclusion on whether it offers good value for money. At this point, I'll compare it to similar models that offer the same functions for a little less or a little more money.

You can find out more in our dedicated section for how we test stand mixers.

How to choose the best KitchenAid mixer

Purchasing a KitchenAid mixer is an investment, so it's important to think about which model would best suit your needs at home. It can be helpful to think about:

  • Capacity—this one really only applies to the stand mixers that come with a bowl. If you’re an avid bread baker for example, going for a mini stand mixer with a smaller bowl isn’t going to cut it. Similarly, if you only cook for two people, you’re not going to need a design with a huge bowl, and a hand mixer may well suffice instead.
  • Power—Look for a model that has a motor of 300W or more to make sure it’s delivering enough power, and if you can find a model with a flexi beater (or add it as an optional extra), so much the better.
  • Size and weight—think about where you're going to be storing your mixer, as some models are more compact than others. Or, do you have room on your worktop for one? And, if you’re going to be lifting it out of a cupboard, you might want to choose a lighter option. If you’re short on space, then a hand mixer may well be more suitable.
  • Attachments—KitchenAid has more than 10 motor attachments that work with all its stand mixers, from pasta cutters to meat grinders and food processors, so you can add to your collection as and when you need them, but you'll want to choose the ones you need the most immediately. Hand mixers will include beaters, a wire whisk, dough hooks and a mixing rod.
  • A tilt head or a bowl lift—consider which one you'd prefer—a tilt head has a bowl that twists onto the base of the mixer, with the head of the machine tilting forward when in use and lifting back when you want to change ingredients or attachments. A bowl lift has a bowl that extends from the body of the mixer, with a lever to raise and lower it. The latter is a more sturdy option, but bear in mind that it takes up more space.
  • Speed—the more speed settings you have, the easier the mixer will be to adjust and control, so generally, a mixer that has six speed settings or more will cover all bases when prepping food. You don’t want a model that’s too powerful if you’re only ever mixing lighter ingredients, for example.

FAQs

What kind of attachments do I need for a stand mixer?

Every stand mixer — and most hand mixers — come with three attachments: a wire whisk, dough hook, and a flat beater. These will cover your cakes, cookies, breads, meringues, whipped cream, and much more.

If you wanted to expand your mixer's capabilities, KitchenAid sets you up for success. The KitchenAid accessories can grind meat, chop vegetables, grate cheese, and even make ice cream. Whilst none of these are essential, they're fun to consider later down the line. You can also upgrade your stand mixer bowl to a special KitchenAid one (there's black stainless steel, fired clay, and hammered copper up for grabs).

Is a KitchenAid mixer worth buying?

Quite frankly, if you know without a shadow of a doubt that you’re going to be baking time after time, then a stand mixer is a must-have. And you really can’t get a much more consistently reliable and efficient model than a KitchenAid mixer. And that aside, there are so many different KitchenAid models with different capacities, attachments, power and price points—meaning there’s literally one for everyone, whatever your baking/cooking needs.

Plus, most of the best KitchenAid mixer options come with a five-year warranty, and you can buy an extended three years of coverage should you want. You also have the luxury of being able to choose from a whole kaleidoscope of colors which is one of the most fun parts—especially when you consider that some of the stand mixers are available in up to 47 different colors.

a red KitchenAid stand mixer on a counter with baking ingredients around it

(Image credit: KitchenAid)

What size mixer is best for me?

This completely depends on the size of your kitchen and how much cupboard or worktop space you have to store it. Check the dimensions of the mixer you’re keen on and measure the space you plan to keep it in. In terms of volume, a 4.8-litre bowl is enough for a family of four and will handle most food prep tasks with ease.

Those that are 5.6 litres and above are ideal for those who cook in large quantities. If you’re short on worktop space though, then a hand mixer may be the better option.


In my book, you can't go wrong with any of KitchenAid's mixers. They're some of the best and most famous on the market for a good reason. The only downside is that they can get expensive, but if your committed to quality and a regular baker, you won't regret investing in your kitchen. You'll be the envy of all your friends too.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/best-kitchenaid-mixer/ yyMbYWsvcaqaDX4YakwECg Mon, 17 Mar 2025 17:57:40 +0000
<![CDATA[ The best KitchenAid attachments and accessories - tested and approved by bakers ]]> The best KitchenAid attachments and accessories can expand your stand mixer's culinary capabilities. It'll become your food processor, pasta maker, ice cream churner, and much much more. Just make sure you buy the right ones.

I've owned a KitchenAid stand mixer for nearly a decade, but it was only when I was looking into ice cream makers that I discovered KitchenAid's attachments. These compact, simple accessories will take even the best stand mixer to a whole new level.

From slicers and dicers to shavers, graters, and grinders, KitchenAid's range of stand mixer accessories is as vast as it is useful. I've been making my way through the whole collection and these are the ones that are actually worth buying.

The best KitchenAid attachments for baking

KitchenAid ice cream maker

(Image credit: Future)

If you own a stand mixer, it's highly likely that you're a budding baker. Grab your apron, roll your sleeves up, and get your hair out the way. These accessories will expand your repertoire to patisserie levels.

The best KitchenAid attachments for chefs

The KitchenAid ice cream maker attachment on the work surface

(Image credit: Future)

If you make your family call you by 'chef' as soon as they step foot into the kitchen, I have something exciting for you. Rather then pushing your stand mixer out of the way, pull it forward to centre stage. Who needs a sous chef when they have a stand mixer? You're welcome, chef.

The best KitchenAid bowls

KitchenAid Design Series 4.7L Artisan Evergreen Stand Mixer bowl

(Image credit: Future)

Lots of people don't know that KitchenAid sells bowls separately to their KitchenAid stand mixers. If you've had your eye on the copper design, a glass bowl, or even just the stainless steel bowl with a handle, you can buy yourself another one. It's a simple way to style-up and personalise your baking buddy. Are you not bowl-ed over?

FAQs

Are all KitchenAid stand mixers compatible with the accessories?

Whether you've got a tilt head or a bowl-lift model, all KitchenAid attachments fit all KitchenAid stand mixers that are currently in production. If you need some more reassurance, here's KitchenAid's dedicated page answering your very question.

What KitchenAid attachments do you love?

For me, the must-have KitchenAid attachment is the ice cream maker. I love making my own batches of ice cream all year round: you can mix up the flavours and cut out all the additives that you'll find in the supermarket.

Do KitchenAid attachments work on other stand mixers?

Lots of stand mixers are compatible with KitchenAid attachments and accessories. For example, the ProCook stand mixer fits all KitchenAid's kit, so you'd be fine to mix and match over there. Make sure to double check with the manufacturer before you commit to anything.

Is the wooden KitchenAid bowl for sale?

Ah, the iconic KitchenAid Evergreen, with its dark green body and wooden bowl. Sadly, the bowl isn't sold separately, but watch this space. The Evergreen's Design Series predecessor had a hammered copper bowl that's now available. If you can wait a year, you might be able to nab one of the beautiful, walnut bowls.


KitchenAid ice cream maker

(Image credit: Future)

If you're smart about where you invest, the best KitchenAid attachments and accessories can work hard for you. The bowls look good and the functional extras can expand your stand mixer's repertoire beyond your baking basics. It's an exciting time to be a stand mixer owner.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/best-kitchenaid-attachments-for-stand-mixers/ Wwiqf4rYFeAuwAksYXghFV Sun, 02 Mar 2025 09:00:20 +0000
<![CDATA[ Call off the search, I've found 18 of the best Valentine's gifts for him (and you'll totally benefit too) ]]> As a woman in my late (very late...) forties, I don’t often think about the best Valentine’s Day gifts for men. The thing is, I've been with my Valentine for a lifetime so I know what he likes - and doesn't - at this stage in life.

While our wedding anniversary and thoughtful birthday gifts mean more than a commercialised holiday like Valentine’s Day, we do exchange cards. I’ve never forgotten the first Valentine’s card he gave me – a cheeky Purple Ronnie one if you’re wondering, which tells you it was the '90s. And - three kids and 26 years of marriage later - I still appreciate it when he pops a bunch of my favourite flowers in his basket while grabbing bits for dinner. Those little gestures mean more than an overpriced bouquet on February 14th ever could. But this year, like 54% of Brits who also mark the occasion, according to a Valentine's Day survey by M&S, I've decided to treat him to a little gift. We no longer need babysitters and might even get the telly to ourselves, so perhaps I'll even pop open some bubbly to celebrate the fact that we’re still going strong, all those years after Purple Ronnie sealed the deal.

If you’re planning something similar, here’s my roundup of the best Valentine’s Day gifts for men – especially midlife ones. Note that I've chosen items you'll enjoy too because the best Valentine’s Day gifts for him are all about sharing a token of love that benefits you both. After all, it’s a day to celebrate your love, not just your lover.

Best Valentine's gifts quicklinks

In a hurry? Jump straight to these retailers who, in my expert opinion, stock some of the best Valentine's gifts for him:

For the foodie

For homebodies

For the fitness fan

Grooming gifts

Loungewear gifts

For outdoorsy men

How to buy the best Valentine's gifts for him

“Many of us can find it tricky to buy gifts for the men in our lives, especially for Valentine’s Day when there is the increased pressure to give them something that represents how much you love and care for them," agrees Jo Reason, Brand & Range Director at Bloom & Wild.

The firm recently ran a survey on male gifting and gender stereotypes which found that men appreciate thoughtful gifts just as much as practical ones - putting an end to the idea, once and for all, that socks and smellies will do when it comes to gifts for men. "Show them you’ve noticed all the things they do for you and treat them to something that means they can indulge or take a moment to themselves," adds Jo. "Look for a gift that ties to their interests, whether that’s a hobby or a newfound passion. That way, you can’t go wrong.”

"When choosing a gift for a male partner, consider his interests, lifestyle, and personality," advises gifting expert and entrepreneur Katrina Aleksa. "Think about what he enjoys - whether it’s tech gadgets, fashion, fitness, or experiences like travel or dining. Personalisation adds a special touch, so consider customised items or something with sentimental value. If you’re unsure, pay attention to things he talks about wanting or needing. Lastly, experiences often make great gifts, offering memories rather than just material items.

"For a refined and personal touch, customised cufflinks make a timeless statement, whether engraved with initials or a meaningful date. For those who value experiences over objects, a luxurious weekend retreat - be it a spa escape, an adventure trip, or a curated wine-tasting getaway - offers unforgettable memories and relaxation. For the tech-savvy, smart home devices bring sophistication and convenience. From voice-controlled assistants to intelligent lighting and security systems, these innovations enhance daily life with seamless efficiency. Whether it’s a bespoke accessory, a curated experience, or cutting-edge home technology, the perfect gift is one that elevates his lifestyle."

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/life/best-valentines-gifts-for-him/ 5gjB2oCHehGMXMnrVh5no9 Fri, 31 Jan 2025 16:16:21 +0000
<![CDATA[ The best LED face masks to shop in 2025, reviewed by our beauty experts ]]> With the boom of light therapy and all its benefits, the best LED face masks have been increasingly sought after over the past few years, with everyone trying to make use of the technology at home. But with so many to choose from and so many factors to consider, our expert testers have picked out the very best performers for different needs.

While our pick of the best red light therapy devices is full of options that are great for brightening skin, stimulating collagen and boosting the elasticity in the skin in lots of different formats - from mask to wand - here, our experts have narrowed in on LED masks to discover which ones are the best for usage, comfort and - most importantly - results on the skin.

From our top pick, the CurrentBody Skin LED Light Therapy Mask that visibly improves skin texture, firmness, fine lines and inflammation all in a comfortable and flexible format, to lesser-known but just-as-good options like the Sensse Professional LED Face Mask and UNICSKIN UnicLED Korean Mask, which offer different coloured LED therapies to target different skin concerns like acne and dullness, these are the best LED face masks our expert testers would recommend to everyone.

The best LED face masks, reviewed by our experts

Best overall LED face mask

CurrentBody Skin LED Light Therapy Mask

The CurrentBody Skin LED Light Therapy Mask (Image credit: Current Body)

1. CurrentBody Skin LED Light Therapy Mask

RRP: £299 | Type: Mask | Target issues: Texture, firmness, lines and inflammation

Very flexible and comfortable
Can be used with hydrating masks
A-list approved
Pricier than some other models

Not only is CurrentBody's LED Mask one of the most comfortable red light therapy devices we've tried, but we also found it the quickest to use and easiest to store. This comes down to its unique flexible silicone material, which hugs the face so you can sit up and wear it for the required 10 minutes while you watch television, for example. The grippy material also ensures that the red and near-infrared LED lights can reach and evenly penetrate the contours of your complexion.

A combination of two different types of light boosts collagen production and helps to calm the skin for long-term effects, as well as revving up circulation for instant radiance. You can also opt to use a hydrating hydrogel mask underneath for extra glow, or simply apply it after your best cleanser and before your best face moisturiser. Aside from a sizeable initial investment (which is common for an LED mask), this tool ticks all our boxes. No wonder it won a woman&home Beauty Award in 2020 and is loved by many celebrities, including Halle Berry, Renée Zellweger and Carey Mulligan. You may also recognise it from the Netflix hit Emily In Paris.

The best reasonably-priced LED face mask

Sensse Professional LED Face Mask

The Sensse Professional LED Face Mask (Image credit: Sensse )

2. Sensse Professional LED Face Mask

RRP: £140 | Type: Mask | Target issues: Fine lines & wrinkles, blemishes, firmness & elasticity

Pre-programmed and manual settings
Four different colours of light
Cordless; comes with a remote control
Can be a little uncomfortable
USB cable included but no plug
Requires frequent charging

Made from flexible silicone and with 90 LED lights, the Sensse Professional LED Face Mask utilises several different colours of light: red for fine lines and skin damage, yellow to improve skin's elasticity, blue to manage excess sebum and blemishes, and purple to target pigmentation and uneven skin tone. It also claims to improve blood circulation and tighten the skin.

Our head of shopping Millie Fender tested this one out. "The biggest appeal for me is the four light options," she says in her dedicated review. "As someone with a myriad of skin problems, this all-rounder has improved a number of my main concerns. It's a great option for people of any age and will suit just about every skin type."

Read our full Sensse Professional LED Face Mask review

The best LED face mask for comfort

MZ SKIN Light Therapy Golden Facial Treatment Device

The MZ SKIN Light Therapy Golden Facial Treatment Device (Image credit: MZ Skin)

3. MZ SKIN Light Therapy Golden Facial Treatment Device

RRP: £500 | Type: Mask | Target issues: Skin texture, lines, collagen and inflammation

Four LED wavelengths
Comfortable; no need to lie down
Slick and visually appealing
Though not the most expensive here, it's a pricey investment

The MZ Skin Light-Therapy Golden Facial Treatment Device brings visual appeal in abundance. It's hard to make skincare tech look desirable, but you could happily display this slick gold-toned mask on a shelf, should you wish. This red light therapy device isn't just a pretty face; it's another that's been created by a highly-respected aesthetic doctor and oculoplastic surgeon, Dr. Maryam Zamani, combining not one but four LED wavelengths (red, blue, green, and yellow) to achieve results on skin texture, tone and firmness in one hit.

You only need to wear it for 10 minutes per day, a couple of times a week, at first, then you build up to longer, 30-minute sessions with time. Unlike some LED masks, this one fits securely to the face thanks to a robust adjustable strap at the back. While it's not the cheapest red light therapy device on our list, it's far from the priciest, either. And given its medical pedigree, multitasking results and user-friendly feel, it is a great investment in your skin. We're hooked!

Read our full MZ Skin Light-Therapy Golden Facial Treatment Device review

Best LED face mask for travelling with

The Light Salon Boost LED Face Mask

The Light Salon's Boost LED Face Mask (Image credit: The Light Salon)

4. The Light Salon Boost LED Face Mask

The best plumping red light therapy device

RRP: £395 | Type: Mask | Target issues: Skin tone, fine lines, wrinkles and hydration

Lightweight silicone material
Combines red and near-infrared light
Works in 10 minutes
Adjustable strap is a little fiddly 

If you haven’t had a chance to visit The Light Salon in real life, we suggest rectifying that, pronto. Located in department stores across the UK, the station boasts an impressive menu of LED treatments from The Blue to target acne to The Full-Body Signature for top-to-toe results. If, however, you can’t book in, why not invest in their at-home alternative instead? The Boost LED Face Mask delivers 10-minute treatments of near-infrared and red light to soften fine lines, calm inflammation and plump the skin.

For best results, the brand recommends wearing this mask three times a week over four weeks. (Clinical trials found that wrinkle depth was reduced by 36% in this timeframe.) With its soft silicone shell and adjustable straps, we found this one super comfortable to wear. It’s also portable, boasting an impressive 5,000 hours of use. If you’re a frequent flyer, it's worth noting that this is also an ideal choice for travel as it can be laid entirely flat in its protective bag and help give your skin a pick-me-up post-flight. Big tick!

Read our full The Light Salon Boost LED Face Mask review

The best LED face mask for targeting different skin concerns

UNICSKIN UnicLED Korean Mask

The UNICSKIN UnicLED Korean Mask (Image credit: Unicskin)

5. UNICSKIN UnicLED Korean Mask

RRP: £315 | Type: Mask | Target issues: Wrinkles, sun damage, hyperpigmentation, acne, sebum regulation, redness, sagging and inflammation

Seven different colour modes
Results can be seen after three sessions
Brightens and smooths skin
Has to be plugged in while wearing
Harder to find in stock than others on this list

If you’re after an LED mask that tackles every major skincare concern going, this is the one for you. With seven (yes, seven) different light modes, the device tackles wrinkles, sun damage, hyperpigmentation, melasma, acne, sebum regulation, redness, inflammation and sagging. So, how does it work? Despite sounding complicated, we found it incredibly easy to use. Plug the mask in, set your preferred time and intensity (there are five options), select a colour (red, blue, green, purple, yellow, aqua blue or white), then sit back and relax.

The downside is this tool does have to be plugged in while wearing, which we found slightly less convenient than some other models on the list – but it is comfortable to wear and sometimes it's nice to have a reason to just kick back and relax. The best thing about this mask is that you can create a treatment that's bespoke to your skin's needs. For instance, if you want to treat pigmentation and acne try the green light for 15 minutes, followed by the blue light for another 15 minutes. Clever!

How we tested these LED face masks

In order to make sure we tested each of these masks thoroughly and gave them a chance to work on our testers' skin, each tester used the product everyday (or as often as recommended by the brand) for a few weeks. Our expert testers made their judgments based on the following criteria:

  • Comfort: If you find using tools like this tricky, this is important to consider - especially if you're planning to use while moving around, as some like the MZ Skin Light-Therapy Golden Facial Treatment Device have robust fastenings to keep it put while multi-tasking, while others, like the CurrentBody Skin LED Light Therapy Mask, are comfortable in a different way as they are more flexible to wear.
  • Colours of LED offered: With LED, different colours work towards different skincare concerns, so it's important to choose something that will target your particular issues, like the UNICSKIN UnicLED Korean Mask or Sensse Professional LED Face Mask, which come with different colour options to target concerns such as acne, redness or skin sensitivity.
  • Ease of use
  • Results on skin tone, texture and clarity
  • Price and value for money

Our testers assessed skin after each use for any post-treatment reactions, looked at the progress throughout the weeks they were using it, and compared how skin had changed overall once the testing period finished.

How do I choose a good LED face mask?

Today's saturated market can make it difficult to choose a model that's right for you - but there are some factors that can help you make your decision. "For at-home LED devices, you should look for a device that incorporates red and blue LED and sits flush to the face – this allows the LED to penetrate the skin," says board-certified dermatologist and dermatologic surgeon Dr. Dennis Gross. It's also helpful to consider:

  • LED colour: Use red or infared for wrinkles, fine lines and general anti-ageing, while blue if best for acne and build-up. Red and yellow light can help to plump and reduce the appearance of uneven skin tone.
  • Mask type: Consider whether you would prefer a hard shell or soft, more flexible mask.
  • Usage instructions: You may want something that you can walk around and multitask with or something that will allow you a more peaceful treatment for some time out. Or maybe you want something that's easy to pack away and travel with. Familiarise yourself with the usage of each product in order to make your decision.
  • Price point: While there are a lot of good models on the market, most of them are pretty expensive. Consider whether the features on the pricier versions are something you actually need or not.

Our expert panel

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/skincare/best-led-masks/ pXrwgRCu9kiPQDbuEWKyMZ Fri, 29 Nov 2024 07:01:40 +0000
<![CDATA[ Into natural beauty? These 6 Tropic Skincare products should be on your radar ]]> Tropic Skincare offers a stellar lineup of naturally derived skincare and body care gems that suit numerous skin types and concerns. But, for those unsure of what products are worth adding to your virtual basket, we're here to share our favourite buys from the brand...

The Tropic Skincare range makes home to some of the best toners and best hyaluronic acid serumswith an extended lineup that includes makeup and haircare products. The brand is well-known for its extensive yet curated selection of beauty buys on offer, each packed with an array of powerful and sustainably sourced ingredients. Which can make deciding what to add to your shopping basket even more complicated.

However, worry no more as we're here to make your shopping experience a breeze. After trying and testing a variety of the brand's best-sellers, from a smoothing creamy cleanser to a refreshing natural deodorant, here are the best Tropic Skincare products that we think deserve a spot in your beauty routine...

The best Tropic Skincare products, tested by our beauty experts

Where is Tropic Skincare sold?

Tropic's products can purchased online through the brand's own website or face-to-face via their 20,000+ ambassadors located across the UK. You may notice the vibrant colours of each individual formula, this is because these products do not contain artificial preservatives and are therefore not suited to being stocked in stores due to the amount of time they may spend on shelves. Although you may not find Tropic stocked in your local drugstore, the brand offers fast delivery times, so you can have the products on your doorstep as soon as 24 hours after purchasing.

Why is Tropic Skincare good?

Since launching in 2004, Tropic Skincare has gained positive traction for its use of natural, nutrient-packed ingredients. Boasting a myriad of vitamins, antioxidants and essential oils, the brand's product offering is perfect for those on a journey to adopt more natural yet effective beauty products into their regime or simply looking for quality buys to improve their skin's health.

Is Tropic Skincare natural?

Tropic Skincare offers naturally-derived skincare, makeup and body care products, with sustainably sourced ingredients from the tropical regions located around the equator. Nearly all of the brand's products are freshly made on a daily basis in the UK throughout a small batch production process. Plus, it's worth noting that the brand is certified organic and helps to support the local economy, too!

What charities does Tropic Skincare work with?

On a mission to create a healthier, greener, more empowered world, Tropic Skincare donate 10% of their profits to an array of charities, including funding education for children in the most remote regions of the world with United World Schools, growing coral reefs with Reef Restoration Foundation, working with the Trussell Trust to stop UK hunger and championing LGBTQ+ rights throughout the UK with Pride in London.

Not just that, every year the brand also rewrite Black Friday to Give Back Friday, where shoppers can access exclusive free products while also helping to fund education to children in remote parts of the world through its partnership with charity United World Schools. 2023's shopping event saw the brand fund an extra 74,000 days of education, on top of the 6.8 million days that Tropic and its customers have funded in the past five years, plus the opening of three schools (soon to be four) across the world.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/skincare/best-tropic-skincare-products/ tg85PuU6MHj7t9FdSahBM3 Sat, 23 Nov 2024 07:01:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ I don't normally get excited about Christmas crackers, but I'm sold on these (surprisingly affordable) options ]]> In my house, finding the best Christmas crackers for the table is no joke (or paper crown). Chosen carefully, this simple table favour can be a beautiful ornament, a source of hilarity, and the foundation for a lovely little extra gift around dinner. I've tested all the best on the market, to bring something to every table.

Fifteen years ago, my family decided that we needed to take Christmas crackers seriously. We moved away from the sets of plastic mini screwdrivers and thimbles and we started making our own. Whilst that was a lot of fun, there's also been an immense amount of innovation since. The likes of Jo Malone and Hotel Chocolat have infused the industry with a touch of luxury. Following suit, ASDA, Tesco, Lakeland and John Lewis have upped their game too. And now, my family has outsourced the crackers back to the high street.

You can buy crackers that help you to decorate for Christmas as well as eco-friendly Christmas crackers; plantable seed-paper crackers; musical crackers; chocolate crackers; beauty crackers; boozy crackers; board game crackers; special crackers for the little ones; and more sophisticated options for adults. I've pulled them all, worn the crowns, and told the jokes. Now, I'm here to share the very best of them with you.

The best Christmas crackers of 2024

A birdseye view of the best Christmas crackers on the market

(Image credit: Future)

You'd be surprised at just how many people make different kinds of Christmas crackers. To help you work out what you want, I've split these crackers into some specific categories and opted for the three best on the market. Here's a little more information about each one:

Eco-friendly Christmas crackers

These crackers put eco-credentials first. Almost all crackers are plastic-free these days, but these responsibly sourced options go above and beyond to look after the planet whilst supporting small businesses.

Christmas cracker games

For the little and big kids in the family, game-filled crackers will be on a par with Christmas dinner for how much excitement they garner. These are the ones my family looks forward to every year.

Luxury Christmas Crackers

You can take Christmas crackers to the next level, stepping-up from the signature nail clippers and screwdrivers. These are the most impressive options.

Gift Christmas crackers

If you want to personalise your crackers without having to make them for yourself, this is the way to do it. There's something for everyone on offer here.

Supermarket Christmas Crackers

Sometimes, it's nice to just deliver on what people expect. When you think of Christmas crackers, you think of a pretty pattern, a good paper crown, a cheesy joke, and a simple gift. These are those to a tee. I had some bell Christmas crackers (still available on Amazon) one year and we still get them out for the table, over seventeen years later.

The Christmas crackers that I couldn't miss

If you know you're a family that can't get competitive (we had to stop Monopoly years ago), these Christmas crackers can make a nice change. Whether you use them for something extra on the tree, or for an extra piece on the mantle. The big benefit of these Christmas crackers is that you'll get to use the gifts year after year.

What are the different types of Christmas crackers?

You'd be surprised at just how many people make different kinds of Christmas crackers. To help you work out what you want, I've split these crackers into some specific categories and opted for the three best on the market. Here's a little more information about each one:

  • Eco-friendly Christmas crackers: lots of brands (even supermarkets) are opting for recyclable, plastic-free crackers, but some take it one step further. You can find plantable, FSC-certified crackers packed with gifts from sustainable, independent businesses.
  • Game Christmas crackers: rather than give a gift, some cracker sets are offering up games, whether that's a murder mystery, bingo, or a guess who. This can be a really fun way to keep the table occupied, especially if you're a competitive family
  • Luxury Christmas crackers: arguably, a lot of these crackers are luxury options, but my section of this list is the super premium ones. These are hand-crafted, designed to adorn the table, whilst looking too good to pull. Inside, don't expect a real crown, but something close
  • Supermarket Christmas crackers: you're most likely to remember to pick up crackers when you're doing the food shop and, rather shockingly, some of my favourite cracker shops came at the lower pricepoints. I'm not complaining
  • Gift Christmas crackers: buying crackers individually can make it really easy to tailor the gift to a specific person. Lots of luxury brands do this really well, such as Jo Malone and Hotel Chocolat. You'll have a good idea of what you're getting inside and the gift will be very welcome.
  • The Christmas crackers that I couldn't miss: my final category takes a little from everything. I've got some cocktail crackers (always a hit with the grown-ups), a sleigh game (which makes for a lovely ornament, and musical crackers (that you'll bring out year-after-year).

FAQs

Which Christmas crackers does the King use?

According to the internet, Tom Smith Ltd has held the Royal Warrant as the supplier of Christmas crackers to the monarchs since 1906. They're credited by some as the original creators of the Christmas cracker, so it's no surprise that they're his majesty's choice. The extra piece of good news is that these are not too expensive; you could pick up a pack for £14.99 on Amazon, for example.

Which supermarket has the best Christmas crackers?

Having tested them all, ASDA makes the best. Their diamond-shaped crackers add something special to the table; they have a wonderful snap; and the gifts are exactly what you'd expect. For the price, they're great.

What are the best luxury Christmas crackers?

It depends on what you're after. Graham & Green's hand-marbled crackers are the most beautiful crackers that I've seen. They certainly deliver on the festive-wow factor. However, for those who like the sweeter things in life, Hotel Chocolat's crackers are a delicious treat for the table.

Which Christmas crackers are the most sustainable?

The RHS and The Little Green Cracker Company have flawless sustainable credentials. If you want to minimise your carbon footprint and have some guilt-free fun, these will more than deliver. They're plastic-free and made from seed papers, or FSC-approved carboard, recycled materials where possible, and the RHS crackers are plantable.

How I tested the best Christmas crackers

Some of the luxury Christmas crackers we tested

Siobhan tested all the products featured in this guide to find the best luxury Christmas crackers of 2022 (Image credit: Siobhan Grogan)

If it were up to me, I'd launch Christmas in September (yes, I'm one of those people). So you can imagine my excitement when I got to test all the best Christmas crackers. I've been pulling and popping these sets for months, rating them to choose which would go in this guide.

The collection might look simple, but to get a covetable spot in the guide, the cracker had to score top marks. I rated the box that they came in, how festive the crackers looked, and whether I would be happy to add them to my Christmas table on the big day.

I also made careful notes on the quality of the snap and bag (ASDA was the best), as well as the hats, jokes, and gifts. I don't want to sound like a snob, but I think it's reasonable to expect a decent little extra in these Christmas crackers, not something that'll be relegated to piles of rubbish in an instant. In this day and age, I also recognise that sustainability plays an important role. So, I checked whether the crackers were plastic-free, plantable, recyclable, and sustainable. You'd be pleasantly surprised at how many are.

Whilst some of these are firmly in the 'luxury Christmas crackers' band, I made sure to keep a careful check on the value of the crackers. Prices have been creeping up and I wanted to check whether they were genuinely good value for money or not. Christmas is an expensive time of year, so you will want to save money where you can.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/best-christmas-crackers/ 6HFMvQfwQJePsn6HnqNszh Thu, 21 Nov 2024 13:00:49 +0000
<![CDATA[ There are no bad Victoria Beckham Beauty products, but we love these most of all ]]> Do you want to know what the best thing about Victoria Beckham Beauty is? This line of makeup, skincare and fragrance is so much better than it needs to be.

It's easy to feel cynical about celebrity beauty. Famous faces have a huge headstart on the attention, financial means and distribution connections it takes to start a brand. This means they can unfairly leapfrog small founders (with decades of industry experience) and lay claim to having made the best lightweight foundation or best face mask, say, at scoffably high prices. Naming no names.

There are of course exceptions. As proven by her metamorphosis from Spice Girl to credible fashion designer, Victoria Beckham is a woman who commits to her craft. Hence, VB Beauty - a thoughtfully-curated range of luxurious and high-performing products that have won over the industry, our beauty team included. Fancy trying it yourself? There's nothing unloveable here, so fill your boots. But if you must pin us down, these are the absolute crème de la crème.

These are the very best Victoria Beckham Beauty products, reviewed by our team

We can't claim to have tried and tested every last shade of every single Victoria Beckham product. But between the woman&home beauty team, we've made our way through pretty much everything the brand has to offer. As for what's best, we had so much to say on the matter it was impossible to pick just one product each, so settled on a top three for every team member. From the best long-lasting perfume that's perfect for winter nights to the cult classic kohl that all four of us rely on for party-ready eyeliner looks, these are our favourite Victoria Beckham Beauty products - tried, tested and revealed.

Beauty Channel Editor, Fiona McKim's top 3

woman & home beauty editor fiona mckim pictured wearing victoria Beckham beauty products including a kajal eyeliner in orchid and face highlighting stick as well as a picture of the products on a wooden desk

(l-r) Fiona wearing Satin Kajal in Orchid, her top 3 products, wearing Highlighter Stick in Pearl (Image credit: Future / Fiona McKim)

Digital Beauty Editor, Aleesha Badkar's top 3

Digital beauty editor Aleesha Badkar pictured wearing the Victoria Beckham Satin Kajal Eyeliner in Cocoa, alongside an image of the portofino and San Ysidro drive perfumes and her hand holding the eyeliner

(l-r) Aleesha wearing Satin Kajal in cocoa, Aleesha's top 3 products, her Satin Kajal pencil (Image credit: Future / Aleesha Badkar)

Digital beauty writer, Naomi Jamieson's top 3

Beauty writer Naomi Jamieson pictured wearing her favourite victoria Beckham beauty makeup, with an image of the products in their packaging and swatched on her arm

(l-r) Naomi wearing Victoria Beckham makeup, her top 3 products, Eyewear and Featherfix swatches (Image credit: Future / Naomi Jamieson)

Digital beauty writer, Sennen Prickett's top 3

An image of Sennen's hand holding Victoria Beckham eyeliner, next to a picture of Sennen wearing the kajal liner in Bordeaux, then an image of Sennen's hand with cell priming moisturiser on it

(l-r) Sennen holding Kajal Liner in Bordeaux, wearing the liner, swatching the Cell Rejuvenating Priming Moisturizer (Image credit: Future / Sennen Prickett)
]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/victoria-beckham-beauty-team-review/ 8fWudUETdKgDJTgNn6wZ5X Sat, 16 Nov 2024 07:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ The 9 best lightweight foundations of 2025 for a fresh and radiant complexion ]]> The best lightweight foundations strike the balance of a finish that looks just like your skin, but better, with a comfortable and barely-detectable feel. Ideally, they'll also pack in some skincare benefits, such as hydrating ingredients.

With myriad options on the market, choosing the best foundation with a lightweight formula may not seem that easy initially – especially when you take factors like your skin type into account. But one positive to lightweight foundations is that they tend to suit most people’s needs. For those with dry skin, the barely-there texture doesn’t cling to rough patches or settle in lines, but also won't won't overwhelm easily congested skin.

To save you the job of scouring the shelves or mindlessly scrolling the internet to find the top performing buys, we've tested every lightweight foundation we could get our hands on to bring you a reliable, beauty editor-approved guide to the best on the market. Here are our detailed reviews of those that came out on top...

Lightweight foundation deals

Get 25% off now

IT Cosmetics Your Skin But Better CC+ Nude Glow Foundation currently has 25% off. Its formula is made up of 90% skincare, with 2% niacinamide, hyaluronic acid, green tea extract and SPF 40, which makes for a boost of hydration and a radiant, healthy glow finish.View Deal

Up to 64% off

Save up to a huge 64% on Pixi's H20 SkinTint, a tinted water-based formula designed to even out the skin tone and reveal a healthy glow. Suitable for a variety of skin types, this hydrating tint lasts throughout and is water-resistant. View Deal

The best lightweight foundations, reviewed by our experts

How we tested the best lightweight foundations

image of best lightweight foundations ready for testing

A selection of the foundations we tested for this guide (Image credit: Jess Beech)

In order to write this thorough and comprehensive guide to the best lightweight foundations, we tested and compared an array of products from several different price points to ensure our final list included options for various budget levels – the selection included both high street and high-end options. Each one was worn for at least one full day and our evaluations were based on all of the following factors...

  • Texture: Most importantly these products had to have a lightweight feel – undetectable and comfortable on the skin.
  • Finish: From sheer to soft matte, we assessed how the finish looked both initially and with time.
  • Ingredients: Each foundation in this guide has had its ingredient list thoroughly scrutinised, with skincare actives and base liquids assessed (as this will differ hugely between the best serum foundations vs a traditional foundation vs CC cream, for example).
  • How it wore through the day: Each product was applied to the face and worn for at least a day, often several, to see how it developed with wear.
  • Packaging: Ease of application also extended to the user experience, dispensation and portability.
  • Value for money: Finally, we paid close attention how the product performed in line with its price tag. We know that comparing a £60 foundation with one that costs £9.99 isn’t apples for apples, so this context was carefully considered.

How to choose the best lightweight foundation

When shopping for the best lightweight foundation, there are a few things that are worth considering to ensure your base of choice meets your expectations. Our experts expand on these later in the guide, but the quick list to bear in mind covers the following.

  • Your skin type and needs
  • The key ingredients in the formula and the results they give
  • The texture you prefer
  • Price point

A good candidate for a lightweight foundation is one that allows your skin to peep through, offering a fresh and natural finish. Those without many concerns, "Can have their pick of lightweight foundations," says pro makeup artist Rose Gallagher. "Those who want glow can look for a skincare base, or for something more skin-like opt for an oil-free formula." To find the best foundation for oily skin, Gallagher recommends looking for balancing ingredients, such as niacinamide, clay or charcoal.

Sensitive or dry skin types should “Look for formulas that include ceramides, squalane and hyaluronic acid to ease the dryness," she adds. "Soothing ingredients like vitamin B5 and E are a bonus as they nourish and protect the skin."

Aside from this, think about finish and texture. "Lightweight foundations can be quite sheer, and if you want more coverage you might have to use another layer or a little concealer on top," adds Elanna Pecherle, makeup artist and founder of Pearl Beauty. "Choosing a foundation that is either buildable or pairs well with other liquid products on top is key. There are also lightweight powder foundations that can work better on oily skin types than liquids."

Pecherle continues: "Lightweight foundations will usually have water at the top of the ingredient list, as well as water-soluble actives like hyaluronic acid, peptides and fermented extracts that are highly compatible with the skin. These formulas absorb easily and enhance the skin-like feel.".

What are the common ingredients in a lightweight foundation?

When it comes to the formulas of lightweight foundations, they aren’t packed full of pigment like a typical full-coverage base, which means there is more space for extra ingredients. Not only will these enhance the finish of your foundation but also improve the all-round health of your complexion. The ones to look out for are:

  • Antioxidants: Antioxidants, including vitamins C and E, shield skin from free radicals, which are emitted by pollution, UV rays and smoke. Free radicals can damage our healthy cells, accelerating the look of fine lines and hyperpigmentation. Antioxidants do their best work during the day when our skin is most exposed to these kinds of stressors.
  • Hyaluronic acid: This is a kind of ingredient called a humectant, which means it works like a magnet to attract water into the skin and hold it there. Small but mighty, a single molecule of hyaluronic acid can hold up to a thousand times its weight in water.
  • Glycerin: Like hyaluronic acid, this is also a humectant, which makes it another brilliant ingredient for preventing dehydration so that skin looks plump and dewy rather than dull and tight.
  • Aloe vera: A lovely calming ingredient that's great for soothing dry or sensitive skin experiencing a flare-up.
  • Ceramides: If you picture the outer layer of our skin like a wall, then ceramides are the mortar that helps to hold the cells together. If that mortar isn’t structurally sound, moisture can escape and things like pollution and bacteria can sneak in. Using ceramides in your skincare and makeup will help prevent this from happening, keeping your complexion soft and healthy.
  • SPF: It’s crucial to wear sunscreen year-round, even when it’s gloomy outside. UVA rays, which are responsible for the majority of skin ageing, can penetrate through clouds. We advise using a dedicated sunscreen to ensure your skin is fully protected, but having a little extra in your foundation as a supporting act is never a bad thing.

Which types of foundation are the most natural looking?

"The most natural foundation finishes are soft, lightweight and breathable formulas, giving you just enough coverage," says makeup artist Mira Parmar. "The perfect natural-looking formulas are sheer tints which provide a hint of colour whilst evening out skin tone. Tinted moisturisers are heavier but still lightweight and tend to be dewy and fresh."

Beauty balms and colour correctors are other great options for a natural base. "BB creams also provide skin benefits like blemish control, and CC creams are 2-in-1 makeup and skincare, so work to neutralise and colour correct the skin," Mira continues. "Some light formulations are dewy and radiant and some are matte, so which you choose will depend on your preference."

What's the best way to apply lightweight foundation?

This depends largely on the formula you opt for. Compared to other base products, lightweight foundations also make for a simpler application, Lan Nguyen-Grealis says: “They tend to be quick and easy to apply, often just with your fingers, and don’t require extensive blending or layering – which will save time in your makeup routine.”

As a general starting point, a light and buildable coverage can often work well with a fluffier brush or blended with your fingertips, whilst thicker formulas often benefit from being buffed into the skin to create a flawless finish. If improving your base product's longevity is important, applying one of the best primers with gripping properties beforehand will help to lock your foundation down.

Which is better, cream or liquid foundation?

Those with dry and/or mature skin may benefit from a cream formula, as they are often slightly richer in consistency and more hydrating. Not only do they hydrate dry skin, but they are often more flattering on fine lines. However, if you're after a truly weightless finish, this can be harder to find in a cream formula.

Meanwhile liquid foundations are great for quick application and have more of a lightweight consistency. Ranging anywhere from velvety matte to fresh and glowy in finish, it’s good to have an idea which one you’re looking for before you start shopping. If you want to manage a particular skin concern – such as oiliness – but also want something lightweight and undetectable, liquids tick both boxes.

Which type of foundation is best for a no-makeup-makeup look?

No-makeup looks actually require a fair bit of effort, even if you want the result to look like you barely made any. The right foundation is important here, as you want your skin to still look like skin. “I’d recommend a tinted foundation or a tinted moisturiser as they’re sheer with light coverage, which allows your natural skin to show through without looking cakey,” says Nguyen-Grealis. “These tend to be less matte and more satin or dewy in texture, mimicking the natural look of healthy skin.”

Applying your base with your fingers is fine if you're on the go (or in a hurry in the mornings), but make sure to warm your hands first and press the product into your skin, to maximise its staying powder. However, ideally, you'll opt for a brush with relatively spaced-out bristles to help buff your lightweight foundation or tinted moisturiser into your complexion, resulting in an even finish.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/makeup/best-lightweight-foundation/ SjZ4uFhqDndzgoNM7LLV6X Mon, 04 Nov 2024 16:40:38 +0000
<![CDATA[ Not sure what to get your friends for Christmas? These desirable last-minute gifts will arrive in time for the big day ]]> If you've not yet chosen all your Christmas gifts for friends, you're in luck. Below is a list of amazing present ideas, all of which will arrive in time for the big day.

Gifts will obviously be different depending on the individual, but to help offer some inspiration, the woman&home team and I have been making notes of products we think would make great Christmas gifts for friends for a while now, and below is our curated list. Everything below is something we believe has a lot of appeal, and many have an element of personalisation to help make any recipient feel extra special.

All of the products included in this list are ones we either have real experience of, or we really rate – and I'll be very clear which is which in the descriptions. Whether your friend loves fashion or beauty, is a home or fitness enthusiast, or loves all or some of the above, there's ideas here for all, at a range of budgets.

Christmas gifts for friends: Top retailers

Christmas gifts for friends: The best friend

Christmas gifts for friends: The beauty queen

Christmas gifts for friends: The fashionista

Christmas gifts for friends: The homes enthusiast

Christmas gifts for friends: The fitness fiend


Looking for more gift inspiration? Check out our guide to the best Valentine's Day gifts for him for 2025.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/life/gifts/christmas-gifts-friends/ 76dZJurxGVrbwgywjhZrVL Sun, 27 Oct 2024 23:14:08 +0000
<![CDATA[ These 6 musky perfumes are like being wrapped in a cosy cashmere blanket ]]> If you’re the kind of person who likes to change up their fragrances depending on things like the season, time of day or occasion for which you’ll be wearing said scent, I can tell you that musky perfumes go hand in hand with cosy season.

These notes give the feel of being wrapped in something comforting; they’re soft, warming and ever so slightly sweet all at once. While qualities like sillage, projection and whether your chosen scent is a long lasting perfume can all be observed, preferences for the best perfume are so subjective. I have go-to olfactory families whose fragrances I’m more likely to enjoy – woody or amber perfumes, for example – but there are always exceptions to the rule.

Similarly, there are some brilliantly formulated perfumes that I wouldn’t wear on myself but know would suit and appeal to others. However, in my experience musks score highly in terms of universal appeal. Here are six musky scents I think you'll love.

Six beauty editor-approved musky perfumes to have on your radar

What is musk in perfume?

Musks have long been used in perfumery, but though they were once animal-derived, alternatives have been used in their place for decades. Today, as luxury fragrance house Creed notes, musk notes in perfume are either down to synthetic musk or a plant-derived alternative.

What does musk smell like in perfume?

Musk is an animalic note that manages to be lots of things at once; creamy and softly sweet, some describe it as being slightly woody or powdery. There are no hard or fast rules in perfume, but musks are often middle or base perfume notes that you smell as the perfume wears, which is what gives off that cosy impression.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/musky-perfume/ pnbPm2kMD5YdEKtUyZdHbX Sun, 20 Oct 2024 06:01:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Our beauty team's 9 best Charlotte Tilbury products for glow and glamour ]]> For those new to Charlotte Tilbury, the woman&home beauty team has shared our tried and tested picks that we reach for on a daily basis.

From the best lightweight foundations and long-lasting lipsticks to the best face moisturisers, Charlotte Tilbury hosts an array of must-have makeup and skincare essentials. After gaining popularity in recent years, the brand now makes home to a lineup of highly sought-after, trending beauty buys, including the iconic Hollywood Flawless Filter to the cult classic Airbrush Setting Spray.

With a plethora of products to choose from, our beauty team has plenty to say about the best Charlotte Tilbury products - and these are the nine that we rely on for glow, glamour and party season style...

Best Charlotte Tilbury deals

Get 20% off now

Save 20% on Charlotte Tilbury's limited edition nine shade rosy eyeshadow palette. With five matte shades and four shimmers, this palette makes home to everything from chocolate hues to rose gold glitters, made with sparkling duo-chrome pearls. View Deal

The best Charlotte Tilbury products, chosen by our beauty team

With an ability to create a myriad of effective makeup and skincare products, several of which have reached viral status, Charlotte Tilbury has quickly become a household name. So, our team has made it our mission to trial an array of the brand's abundant selection, narrowing them down to just nine must-have buys that are worth investing in.

Best glow-booster

Image 1 of 3

Charlotte Tilbury Hollywood Flawless Filter

(Image credit: Charlotte Tilbury)
Image 2 of 3

Image of Charlotte Tilbury Hollywood Flawless Filter open in hand with red nails

(Image credit: Future/Sennen Prickett)
Image 3 of 3

Swatch of Charlotte Tilbury Hollywood Flawless Filter on hand

(Image credit: Future/Sennen Prickett)

1. Charlotte Tilbury Hollywood Flawless Filter

Best glow-booster

RRP: £39 | Formula: Liquid | Finish: Dewy

I've never been a huge fan of foundation thanks to it often settling into my smile lines and clinging to dry patches on my combination complexion. So, a tinted glow-booster, like the Charlotte Tilbury Hollywood Flawless Filter, is more to my liking. This hybrid product can be worn in four ways, either alone, underneath your foundation, mixed in with your foundation or over the top of your makeup for an extra glow.

I prefer wearing it as a lightweight replacement for foundation as it adds a healthy radiance to my face, whilst also evening out my skin tone. Although it doesn't have the ultimate coverage for my blemish-prone skin, it's super lightweight so it allows me to spot conceal my blemishes without completely weighing my skin down.

I cannot knock the formula, however, the only (tiny) downside I have to note is with the packaging of the product. The printing on the bottle seems to flake off, leaving tiny specks of red and gold amongst the rest of my makeup bag's contents. Overall, it's a small problem but one that I have seen other makeup users also stress.

Best bronzer

Image 1 of 3

Charlotte Tilbury Beautiful Skin Sun-Kissed Glow Bronzer

(Image credit: Charlotte Tilbury)
Image 2 of 3

Charlotte Tilbury Beautiful Skin Bronzer open in hand

(Image credit: Future/Sennen Prickett)
Image 3 of 3

Swatch of Charlotte Tilbury Beautiful Skin Bronzer on hand

(Image credit: Future/Sennen Prickett)

2. Charlotte Tilbury Beautiful Skin Sun-Kissed Glow Bronzer

Best bronzer

RRP: £45 | Formula: Cream | Finish: Matte

I am an avid cream bronzer fan, however, I struggle to find formulas that don't go patchy on my skin - take it from me, someone who has a small circular patch that doesn't like to be covered on my left cheekbone.

So, when I say that this compact has crept its way into my everyday makeup routine, it's a true testament to how good this product is. It boasts an incredibly creamy formula, of which you don't need a lot to achieve that sun-kissed glow - just one or two taps with your brush should be enough. Most importantly, it doesn't have that classic orange hue that other bronzers tend to sport, meaning it looks beautifully natural on your face, almost as if you've just gotten back from a holiday in the sun.

It is worth noting that it's slightly pricey, however, you are treated to 21g of product that arrives in a large pan, which will keep you bronzed for a while before needing to be replaced.

Best setting spray

Image 1 of 3

Charlotte Tilbury Airbursh Flawless Setting Spray

(Image credit: Charlotte Tilbury)
Image 2 of 3

Image of Charlotte Tilbury Airbrush Setting Spray

(Image credit: Future/Naomi Jamieson)
Image 3 of 3

Hand holding Charlotte Tilbury Airbrush Setting Spray

(Image credit: Future/Naomi Jamieson)

3. Charlotte Tilbury Airbrush Flawless Setting Spray

Best setting spray

RRP: £32 | Formula: Liquid | Finish: Dewy

With a smoothing and hydrating formula of aloe vera, Japanese green tea and aromatic resin, Charlotte Tilbury's waterproof Airbrush Setting Spray hydrates, primes and sets the complexion in place for up to 16 hours. Since testing this setting spray, it has gone on to become a firm favourite in Digital Beauty Writer, Naomi Jamieson's makeup bag, she says: "This setting spray has made such a difference to my makeup routine, so much so that I consider cancelling plans on the rare occasion that I've run out and thus, can't set my face with this magical mist."

As for the mist in question, Naomi raves about its lightweight formula that also boasts top-tier staying power. "Speaking of the mist, it's lightweight and soft unlike some more aggressive sprays I've tried and not only manages to lock my foundation and cream products in place but adds a fresh, radiance to my complexion. When I want my makeup to last, I spritz my face right after my foundation and concealer steps and then again at the end of my regime, as a final flourish," she recommends.

The only downside? A 100ml bottle is priced at £32, placing it on the more expensive side of setting sprays. So, for those who can be haphazard with their setting sprays (just like me), it might be worth limiting your spritzes or investing in a jumbo-sized 200ml bottle.

Best setting powder

Charlotte Tilbury Airbrush Flawless Finish Powder

(Image credit: Charlotte Tilbury)

4. Charlotte Tilbury Airbrush Flawless Finish Powder

Best setting powder

RRP: £38 | Formula: Powder | Finish: Matte, blurring

Charlotte Tilbury's Airbrush Flawless Finish Powder is undoubtedly a cult classic product in the makeup world, so it had high expectations to live up to. However, the powder exceeded our tester's expectations - which came as no surprise. Acting as the perfect finishing touch to any look, this powder sets makeup in place while offering a smoothing, blurring and soft-focus finish to the complexion.

So much so, this powder has become another of Naomi's go-to products in her makeup kit, she says: "This powder is a true game-changer especially if you're someone (like me) with an oilier T-Zone and some noticeable pores. It instantly mattifies and blurs the skin, living up to its name and works harmoniously with all my cream products (no piling or separation in sight)."

Like many of us, Naomi previously struggled with her under-eye concealer creasing, that was until she adopted this pressed powder into her makeup routine. "I've also found that it stops my concealer from creasing as obviously under my eyes and it really lasts - it has taken me months to reach the pan and I still have plenty around the edges to tide me over until my next makeup haul," she says.

Best blush

Image 1 of 3

Charlotte Tilbury Beauty Light Wand Pillow Talk

(Image credit: Charlotte Tilbury)
Image 2 of 3

Image of Charlotte Tilbury Beauty Light Wand in hand with brown nails

(Image credit: Future/Sennen Prickett)
Image 3 of 3

Swatch of Charlotte Tilbury Beauty Light Wand on hand

(Image credit: Future/Sennen Prickett)

5. Charlotte Tilbury Beauty Light Wand

Best blush

RRP: £30 | Formula: Liquid | Finish: Dewy

If you haven't yet heard about Charlotte Tilbury's Beauty Light Wands, take this as your sign to get acquainted with them. This liquid blush-highlighter hybrid product is the answer to nailing that healthy, radiant complexion. That beautifully natural, glow-from-within finish, along with its fun and easy-to-use applicator, might just be the reason this wand went viral on TikTok

I opted for the shade 'Peachgasm' which is a perfectly peachy hue with a pearlescent finish to it. A positive I noted about this product is how little you need to apply to achieve the perfect flush of colour to the apples of your cheeks. I tend to apply it slightly higher on my cheekbones as it serves well as a rosy-toned highlighter, too.

It's worth mentioning that the spherical sponge applicator can get a little messy, especially when used frequently. Plus, be sure to work on one cheek at a time, applying and blending in straight away as the formula can become slightly stubborn to blend if left to sit for a while.

Best foundation

Image 1 of 3

Charlotte Tilbury Airbrush Flawless Foundation

(Image credit: Charlotte Tilbury)
Image 2 of 3

Image of Charlotte Tilbury Airbrush Flawless Foundation in hand with brown nails

(Image credit: Future/Sennen Prickett)
Image 3 of 3

Swatch of Charlotte Tilbury Airbrush Flawless Foundation on hand

(Image credit: Future/Sennen Prickett)

6. Charlotte Tilbury Airbrush Flawless Foundation

Best foundation

RRP: £39 | Formula: Liquid | Finish: Soft matte

Accompanying the entirety of the Airbrush Flawless collection, this foundation promises to deliver a lightweight, full-coverage matte formula that lasts all day - and that it does.

This foundation boasts excellent high coverage, smoothing and evening my skin tone, whilst covering any red blemishes. Despite its full coverage, the formula still feels weightless on my skin (so much so, that I forget I am wearing makeup), which is a huge tick in my books as I despise foundations that leave that heavy, claggy feeling. While it does offer a matte finish, its hydrating serum-based formula means that it isn't overly mattifying or cakey in the slightest, leaving my complexion very natural-looking. Most notably, after wearing it all day, I don't notice any cracking or creasing - not even in my deeply in-set smile lines or under my eyes.

I chose to apply one pump of foundation with a damp makeup sponge, which helped to boost radiance and aid a seamless natural-looking blend. However, you can opt to apply it with a dense foundation brush if you require a more full-coverage finish.

Best eyeshadow

Charlotte Tilbury Colour Chameleon Bronzed Garnet

(Image credit: Charlotte Tilbury)

7. Charlotte Tilbury Colour Chameleon Eyeshadow Stick

Best eyeshadow

RRP: £23 | Formula: Crayon | Finish: Shimmer

Infused with synthetic sapphire for a soft-focus finish, the Colour Chameleon cream eyeshadow pencils offer that pop of party to your eyelids, whilst brightening and widening the eyes for a youthful appearance. These dazzling formulas are incredibly easy to use, making them ideal for those who feel overwhelmed when applying eyeshadow or often find themselves in a time crunch, as they only require a quick swipe onto the eye.

Digital Beauty Editor, Fiona McKim finds herself often reaching for this crayon when wanting to achieve an effortlessly easy eyeshadow look, she says: "I find evening eye makeup a bit of a faff - unless I'm using one of these. They're chunky, creamy crayons in metallic shades that you can draw on as eyeliner or smudge out for an instant smoky eye. They set beautifully and don't transfer."

These eyeshadow sticks make the perfect candidate for throwing into your handbag and quickly nailing that day-to-night look. With nine shimmery shades to choose from, Fiona opts for a warm bronzed red shimmer that perfectly enhances blue eyes: "I regularly scribble on the Bronzed Garnet shade when I have five minutes to get ready - or just chuck it in my bag to do on the train into town - they really are that easy."

Best moisturiser

Image 1 of 3

Charlotte Tilbury Charlotte's Magic Cream Moisturiser

(Image credit: Charlotte Tilbury)
Image 2 of 3

Hand holding Charlotte Tilbury Magic Cream

(Image credit: Future/Naomi Jamieson)
Image 3 of 3

Swatch of Charlotte Tilbury Magic Cream on back of hand

(Image credit: Future/Naomi Jamieson)

8. Charlotte Tilbury Charlotte's Magic Cream

Best moisturiser

RRP: £79 for 50ml | Formula: Cream | Finish: Dewy

Throwing it back to where it all started, Charlotte's Magic Cream marks the debut product of the Charlotte Tilbury brand and after hearing rave reviews, I highly anticipated testing this iconic moisturiser. Enriched with a plumping peptide complex, hyaluronic acid and vitamins C and E, this skin-reviving cream works to smooth, firm, hydrate and prime the complexion.

Ideal for those with normal to dry skin, this moisturiser is perfect for those looking for an ultra-rich and hydrating formula. It certainly leaves your face feeling moisturised and with a healthy glow. It also boasts a slightly tacky finish, which is perfect for giving your makeup something to grip onto.

For context, I have combination skin, which can fluctuate anywhere between super dry and excessively oily. So, when my skin was particularly oily throughout testing, I found this moisturiser to be slightly on the greasy side, rather than hydrating - therefore, it may not be the best option for those with oil-prone skin.

Best lipstick

Image 1 of 3

Charlotte Tilbury Pillow Talk Lipstick

(Image credit: Charlotte Tilbury)
Image 2 of 3

Image of Charlotte Tilbury Pillow Talk Lipstick in hand with brown nails

(Image credit: Future/Sennen Prickett)
Image 3 of 3

Swatch of Charlotte Tilbury Pillow Talk Lipstick on hand with brown nails

(Image credit: Future/Sennen Prickett)

9. Charlotte Tilbury Pillow Talk Lipstick in shade 'Pillow Talk Original'

Best lipstick

RRP: £28 | Formula: Cream | Finish: Satin

I'm not much of a lipstick person, instead I usually tend to opt for the lip liner and gloss combination. However, if I do reach for a lipstick, you'll always find me wearing a neutral or rosy-hued shade, so Charlotte Tilbury's Pillow Talk Lipsticks are right up my street.

Again, staying true to the brand's original products, Charlotte Tilbury's lippie in shade 'Pillow Talk Original' is my number one choice. Its shade sits somewhere between a nude and a pink, making it the go-to neutral pout that accompanies any and every makeup look.

Infused with orchid and Lipstick Tree extracts, this formula is moisturising on the lips yet offers a smoothing matte finish that leaves your lips looking softer and more youthful. I prefer a high-shine finish, so I typically complete the look with a clear gloss that still allows the colour to peep through. When freshly opened, its square-shaped tip makes for easy and precise application, however I did find this wears down like any other lipstick with time.

How we tested the best Charlotte Tilbury products

Image of some of the Charlotte Tilbury products we tested, including Beautiful Skin Bronzer, Airbrush Flawless Foundation, Beauty Light Wand, Pillow Talk Mascara, Pillow Talk Lipstick and Hollywood Flawless Filter, on a fluffy grey background

(Image credit: Future/Sennen Prickett)

Our beauty team has years of experience extensively trying and testing an abundance of makeup buys, including Charlotte Tilbury's stellar lineup of products, to find the very best products that are worth investing in. While many products made their way into our every day makeup bags, there were also a number that didn't make the final cut when weighing them up against our key testing details. That said, our testers took into account the following factors when reviewing each product

  • The formula
  • Packaging
  • User experience, such as how easy it was to apply
  • Finish, including the coverage offered
  • Longevity of wear time
  • Price

Whether you're looking for more information on the brand's extensive range, wondering what the best-selling lipstick shade is or the best way to apply their go-to blush wands? Discover the answers to everything you need to know in our FAQS below.

Do Charlotte Tilbury take part in Black Friday?

Yes, Charlotte Tilbury does indeed take part in Black Friday. Although the day has now passed, there are still deals available for a limited time only - with the brand offering up to 40% off on bundles and giftsets, as well as up to 30% off its best-sellers until Wednesday 4th December. There's still time to score discounts on your favourite Charlotte Tilbury beauty buy - but don't delay, as these savings are likely to last for one more day only.

Historically, Black Friday and Cyber Monday are renowned as some of the best times of the year to nab a great deal on the brand's best-sellers, such as the Hollywood Flawless Filter and the iconic Beauty Light Wands. Last year, we saw a significant 30% discount on products across the site, including a sizeable 50% saving on the highly sought-after annual Charlotte Tilbury mystery box.

When does Charlotte Tilbury go on sale?

Taking into account our shopping experience, we've noticed Charlotte Tilbury is a brand that rarely goes on sale throughout the year. However, Black Friday and Cyber Monday are undoubtedly the best opportunities for you to snap up a bargain on your go-to Charlotte Tilbury product or the perfect Christmas gifts for friends, via the brand's website. It's also worth noting that there are plenty of other retailers who stock the brand, such as Sephora, Cult Beauty and John Lewis, offer spontaneous yet worthwhile discounts throughout the year and on Cyber weekend.

Is Charlotte Tilbury makeup good for mature skin?

The brand dubs themselves as having created makeup and skincare products for everyone, everywhere - meaning their products certainly work well for mature skin. Take Charlotte's Magic Cream for example, this day cream is enriched with hyaluronic acid and BioNymph Peptide which encourages a hydrated, plumper and youthful appearance - making it the perfect base before applying makeup.

As for makeup, the brand offers an array of lightweight products that work well for mature skin, such as the Charlotte Tilbury Unreal Foundation Stick, an illuminating formula that offers light, natural-looking coverage. Equipped with hyaluronic acid, Daikon radish seed oil, vitamin E and Collageneer that aims to improve the appearance of wrinkles and boost elasticity, this foundation stick is an ideal choice for those with mature skin. Complete the look with Charlotte Tilbury's Beauty Light Blush Wand and Beautiful Skin Bronzer, both of which boast featherlight formulas that will lift your complexion and offer a healthy-looking, radiant glow.

What is Charlotte Tilbury's best-selling lipstick?

Charlotte Tilbury's Pillow Talk Lipstick in shade 'Pillow Talk Original' was the first lipstick the brand launched and, to this day, is still undoubtedly their best-seller. While it's a popular choice amongst many, this particular lipstick shade also has amassed a few celebrity fans, including Salma Hayek, Nicole Kidman and Meghan Markle - Amal Clooney even sported the rosy pout on her wedding day.

Is the Charlotte Tilbury Beauty Light Wand a blush or a highlighter?

The Charlotte Tilbury Hollywood Beauty Light Wands have grown immensely in popularity in recent years, mainly because they went viral on TikTok. Acting as a hybrid between a blush and highlighter, the wands are loved for their softly cushioned, spherical applicator and easy-to-blend, light-reflecting formula. Essentially, this nifty product can be applied onto the tops of the cheekbones to add a flush of colour and a pearlescent glow. In short: it's both!

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/makeup/best-charlotte-tilbury-products/ tMkPwND4hzRV4ywi7tAo5C Sat, 19 Oct 2024 06:30:30 +0000
<![CDATA[ Our beauty team picks the best Kérastase shampoo for every hair type and need ]]> Kérastase offers a lineup of luxe products devoted to combatting hair concerns, including a plethora of cleansing shampoos designed for a variety of hair types...

Whether you're looking for the best shampoo for fine hair or the best conditioner for curly hair, nailing your hair-washing routine can be a real trial-and-error job. Between the extensive options available to shop on the market and trying to pinpoint exactly what your hair type is, finding your staple shampoo that provides the salon-worthy results you desire can be a real mission

Since 1964, Kérastase has been an innovative force on the haircare scene, pioneering must-have formulas from nourishing hair oils to the best hair masks. One area of expertise, in particular, that the brand is known for (and the woman&home beauty team is well versed in) is their stellar range of luxury cleansing shampoos. From a youth-revitalising formula to a brightening violet shampoo for blondes - and all the ones in between - here are the Kérastase shampoos that we think are worthy of a place in your haircare arsenal.

Best Kérastase shampoo deals

Get 25% off now

Kérastase Première Bain Décalcifiant Réparateur Shampoo: was £32.40, now £24.45 (save £7.95) | Amazon

Save 25% on Kérastase's Premiere Decalcifying Shampoo, designed to nourish, cleanse and repair damaged locks. Not only working to reverse signs of damage, this shampoo also aims to restore your hair's strength and revive softness and smoothness, perfect if you're starting your healthy hair journey. View Deal

Get 20% off now

Kérastase Symbiose Bain Crème Anti-Pelliculaire Shampoo: was £28.25, now £22.58 (save £5.67) | Amazon

For those with dry, dandruff-prone scalps, opt for the brand's Symbiose shampoo. This moisturising shampoo is formulated with salicylic acid and piroctone olamine to help exfoliate the scalp and remove dandruff flakes, without completely stripping away moisture. Plus, it now has 20% off!View Deal

Get 24% off now

Kérastase Chronologiste Bain Régénérant Shampoo: was £32.40, now £24.60 (save £7.80) | Amazon

Give lifeless locks a well-need boost with 24% off Kérastase's Chronologiste Bain Régénérant Shampoo. Equipped with hyaluronic acid, abyssine & vitamin E, this shampoo works to provide long-lasting moisture to the scalp and hair, while strengthening strands and protecting against damage from external elements.View Deal

The best Kérastase shampoos, ranked by our beauty experts

Do Kérastase shampoos go on sale?

Kérastase shampoos can boast hefty price tags thanks to their quality, science-backed formulas. But, we come with good news as you can often find regular deals on the brand's shampoos - specifically on retailers such as Amazon and Look Fantastic.

Amazon's Big Deal Days set to take place this week on Tuesday, 8th October and Wednesday, 9th October. If this two-day sale event follows in the footsteps of previous years, there'll be some amazing Kérastase deals that are worth snapping up, so be sure to keep your eyes peeled.

Are Kérastase shampoos good for your hair?

With a lineup of innovative haircare formulas, this brand's array of shampoos arrive boasting several hair-loving ingredients, such as niacinamide, glycerin, hyaluronic acid and a cocktail of vitamins. So, naturally, when you match the correct shampoo to your specific hair needs and concerns, they can offer healthy, salon-worthy results.

Which Kérastase shampoo is best?

There is not one sole answer as to which shampoo is best as it heavily depends on your individual hair type and needs, but luckily Kérastase have an extensive haircare offering, each created with specific hair types and problems in mind.

For example, those with oily hair would be best suited to the Specifique shampoo as it targets congested, oily-prone scalps, reducing excess sebum and hydrating the locks. Whereas, dry and dull locks would benefit from the Nutritive Bain Satin Shampoo as it boasts an ultra-hydrating formula, packed full of niacinamide and glycerin to intensely moisturise the strands for a silky soft finish.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/hair/best-kerastase-shampoo/ DFJQHrMdxAubmxptWXC42f Mon, 07 Oct 2024 10:31:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ 7 of the best hair dryers for Afro hair - designed to style and protect textured strands ]]> On the hunt for a blowdryer that offers effective styling whilst also being gentle on your hair's natural texture? Our team have rounded up the best dryers for Afro hair - touted for their ability to smooth curls and coils...

When considering what might be the best hair dryer for our hair type, we are often told that Afro-textured hair is the weakest. It breaks easily, it can be dry and we have to be careful when it comes to using heat and chemicals. While I’m tired of hearing such negative connotations with my texture, I can’t completely disagree. Although usually thicker, Afro hair textures are more fragile due to the shape each strand takes on at the root. While European and Asian hair textures have a cyclical shape, Afro-Caribbean hair has a more oval shape - and because of the curves in each coil and curl type, even when straightened strands can be more prone to breaking.

If you heat style your hair, strands obviously can become more damaged, so you have to be very careful with the tools you pick. There are so many hair dryer options nowadays, it can be hard to whittle down the best hair dryers for curly hair, and Afro hair specifically. Luckily though, we’ve put many to the test to figure out exactly which ones work the best...

The 6 best hair dryers for Afro hair in 2025

The quick list

Best overall hair dryer for Afro hair

The Dyson Supersonic Hair Dryer in the colour Nickel/Copper.

(Image credit: Dyson)

1. Dyson Supersonic Hairdryer

Best overall hair dryer for Afro hair

RRP: £329 | Heat settings: 4, plus a cold shot | Weight: 659g | Included diffuser: Yes, and a wide tooth comb

High-tech hair dryer
Fast-drying and powerful
Expensive

The Dyson Supersonic is the priciest tool we tested but was by far the best experience when drying. The motor is small but mighty, delivering a powerful and fast blow-dry in less than 20 minutes, which, for my thick type 4 hair, is normally unheard of. The tech in the dryer measures the temperature 40 times a second to give an even heat and prevent heat damage. Despite the high tech within the tool, it’s incredibly lightweight compared to other hair dryers we tested. The attachments are what seal the Dyson’s spot at the top of this hair dryer hot list, particularly the flyaway attachment which can make even the biggest frizz halo super smooth.

Best for quick styling

A white Shark SpeedStyle 3-in-1 Hair Dryer for Curly and Coily hair.

(Image credit: Shark)

2. Shark SpeedStyle 3-in-1 Hair Dryer for Curly and Coily Hair

Best for quick styling

RRP: £179 | Heat settings: 3, plus 3 airflow settings and a cool shot | Weight: 752g | Included diffuser: Yes

Lightweight
Powerful
Multi-styling attachments
If you want a heavy-duty dryer

This dryer really bridges the gap between dryer and multi-styler so well. If you’ve been thinking about getting a multi-styler, such as the Shark FlexStyle or Dyson Airwrap but still want a traditional hair dryer, this is the best pick for you. Not only is it extremely high tech the attachments are great for smoothing coily hair. The Quick Smooth brush attachment is particularly good for this thanks to the duo-fibre bristles.

Best for travel

A orange and pink printed Amika Mighty Mini hair dryer with a matching travelling case.

(Image credit: Amika)

3. Amika Mighty Mini

Best for travel

RRP: £50 | Heat Settings: 1 | Weight: Not specified | Included diffuser: Yes

Compact size
If you're a frequent traveler
Tired of hotel dryers 
If you need a hair dryer for regular use

One of the worst things about travel has to be poor amenities, right? I know I’m not the only curly/coily girl who shudders at the thought of using a slow, low-powered tool that leaves your hair a tangly frizzball after a day in the sun. This dryer is super compact but does function almost as well as standard-sized. Even if you are travelling with hand luggage only, this will take up no space in your travel essentials kit and give you the styles that you’re used to at home while away. This mini packs 1100 watts of power and thanks to infrared technology, it’s able to dry hair more quickly than the average tool, working from the inside of the cuticle, out.

Best for healthy hair

A black ghd helios hair dryer is the best for Afro hair.

(Image credit: ghd)

4. Ghd Helios Hair Dryer

Best for healthy hair

RRP: £179 | Heat settings: Two, plus a cool shot | Weight: 780g | Included diffuser: No

If you struggle with hair health
Available in different colours
Fast-drying
If you want a small tool
Diffuser has to be purchased separately

The ghd Helios hair dryer is the latest hair dryer launch from ghd and while the Air is lighter, this is the higher tech of the two. Its trademarked Aeroprecis technology makes for a fast blow-dry that leaves hair really smooth. The concentrator nozzle is particularly good on this dryer, teamed with a small paddle brush or round brush you can straighten coily hair flat if that’s the way you like to style it. Equally, the diffuser (bought separately) is sizeable, so will work well for you if you quickly want to dry your wash-and-go style.

Best for frizz control

Babyliss Hydro Fusion hairdryer with diffuser

(Image credit: Babyliss)

5. BaByliss Hydro-Fusion Anti-Frizz 2100 Hair Dryer

Best for frizz control

RRP: £60 | Heat settings: 3 | Weight: 550g | Included diffuser: Yes

Frizz is your biggest issue
Affordable
Sturdy
Advanced Plasma Technology to balance moisture and reduce frizz
You want something high-tech

Price-wise this hair dryer is pretty mid-range. And while the tech doesn’t hit that of the Dyson or Shark, you do get a clever tool that works for bringing out the best in naturally-styled hair but also if you want to straighten too. That’s because frizz can be Afro hair’s biggest nightmare and the tech in this dryer blends positive and negative ions to help keep hair moisture balanced and frizz-free.

See our full BaByliss Hydro Fusion review for more details on this dryer.

Best for a salon finish

A icy blue coloured Parlux Advance Light Ceramic Ionic Hair Dryer.

(Image credit: Parlux)

6. Parlux Advance Light Ceramic Ionic Hair Dryer

Best for a salon finish

RRP: £159.99 | Heat settings: 3, plus a cool shot | Weight: 490g | Included diffuser: No

You're a pro at doing your own hair
Ionic technology for smooth results
Compact yet powerful
If you're a styling newbie

Ask most hairdressers what their most reliable hair dryer is and they’ll say a Parlux. And it’s a hairdresser’s favourite for a reason. It’s not light by any means but the horsepower is ferocious and if you are after a real professional feel, the Parlux brand is great. This model is the lightest of the range yet packets a 2200-watt motor. If you’re looking for a sturdy, classic hair dryer to straighten Afro hair, this is a great pick.

Best for an old-school silk press

A black Wahl Hair Dryer with two attachments to the left of it.

(Image credit: Wahl)

7. Wahl Hair Dryer

Best for an old-school silk press

RRP: £22.99 | Heat settings: 3, plus cool shot | Weight: 796g | Included diffuser: No

If you're after a traditional hair pik dryer
Includes two pik attachments and a concentrator nozzle
You want something a little more up-to-date
Noisy

It’s a little clunky and noisy but this retro dryer still works well for a classic use. A lot of us would have had this dryer used on us at the hairdressers back in the day when we had a traditional silk press - and while it’s been slightly updated it’s still retained the same look and feel. Also, it’s the only readily available hair dryer that was designed for Afro hair, the pik attachment is secured tight for stretching even the thickest, tightest coils with no issue. At under £25, it’s the cheapest on the list but at that price, you know you aren’t going to get a super high-tech tool with multiple attachments.

How we tested the best hair dryers for Afro hair

To ensure that all hair dryers were tested fairly we used the highest speed and heat setting and were as fair as possible when comparing the power and wattage of each hair dryer, considering price versus performance. All of these dryers were tested on damp, freshly washed hair with a heat protector applied.

How to use a hair dryer safely on Afro hair

"Using a hair dryer alongside a good brush is key," says Lorraine Dublin, celebrity hairdresser and co-owner of My Hair Bar. "Make sure you take small sections as you’ll get more of an even blow dry. Plus, it gives you more control."

Depending on the finish you want, you’ll need to adjust your techniques slightly. "For a super straight finish, pre-blow-dry with a comb attachment before going back over with a Denman brush and small sections."

"For a twist out, you have a few options. You can do a light pre-blow-dry to extend the length then re-wet with the product, depending on your texture, before twisting and drying with a diffuser. If you don’t care about length then just go straight in with your twists and then dry gently on a medium heat."

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/hair/best-hair-dryers-for-afro-hair/ VHeMNaCCrHSa9gexQhPnET Sun, 06 Oct 2024 06:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Scented body oils are the chicest way to soften your skin and make perfume last ]]> Scented body oils can be used in two ways; either layered with your perfume of the same scent for double the potency or bought instead of your perfume to save on cash. Whether you want to invest or save, I’ve become a huge advocate for perfumed oils recently – particularly because some of my favourite brands have released them in their most iconic scents. These include the likes of Phlur, Chanel, and Sol de Janeiro, to name a few.

Not only do these oils smell beautiful, they also remove the need for body lotion. In fact, if you ask me, an oil formulation is actually preferable to a cream – even the best scented body lotions – for keeping limbs feeling smooth. They are ultra-nourishing and add to the user experience, feeling luxurious and decadent after a long bath or hot shower.

You may not know it, but it’s likely that your go-to best perfume may already come in an oily counterpart – and whether you use it to double up and layer or save the coins to forgo your usual fragrance purchase, I’d recommend giving them a go. If you need ideas on where to start, these are my current favourites.

The best scented body oils, reviewed by a beauty editor

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/scented-body-oil/ MuSnDKAxP3aKNCJzXXitMA Sat, 28 Sep 2024 07:01:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Which Garmin should I buy? We weigh up the most popular options ]]> If you're looking for a new fitness tracker and have decided on Garmin, you may be asking which one you should buy. Given that there are over 70 options live on the website right now, we don't blame you for wondering where to begin.

Garmin devices sit among the best fitness trackers and are specifically designed for those who regularly exercise and want to record their workouts, monitor recovery, and improve their overall health. What makes them different from other devices are the features that help along the way though - from superior GPS navigation for runners and hikers to on-screen, follow-along workouts for the gym.

It's rare to find fitness trackers that wrap so many brilliant features into one wrist-sized device. However, there are a few ranges and different watches to choose from. As woman&home's digital health editor, I've been testing and wearing this brand for years - my favourite being the Garmin Forerunner 945, which I bought in the Garmin sale a couple of years ago and still wear every day. Here, I reveal which Garmin is likely to fit you best based on lifestyle and exercise habits.

Top 3 picks

Which Garmin should I buy?

The best Garmin for most people

Garmin Vivoactive 5

(Image credit: Garmin)

1. Garmin Vivoactive 5

Best Garmin for most people

RRP: £249.99 | Dimensions: 42.2 x 42.2 x 11.1 mm | Battery life: Up to 11 days | Waterproof: Yes, up to 50m | In-built GPS: Yes

More than 40 workout modes
In-built GPS
Touchscreen and manual navigation
Advanced health data 
Four colourways
No barometric altimeter for counting 'floors'

Excellent fitness tracking sensors, advanced health monitoring and must-have smartwatch features wrapped up in a smooth design for less than an Apple Watch? It must be the Garmin Vivoactive 5, with over 40 workout modes from running to pickleball, advanced sleep and stress tracking, and on-wrist call and text notifications. If I had to choose just one device that could work for most people, it would be this one.

Start a workout in just a few taps and get all your 'must-have' information displayed on a full-colour AMOLED screen. Take walking, for instance - start a walking workout and you'll see your distance, pace, duration, and your heart rate zone on your wrist. When your workout is finished, you'll see the session logged in the Garmin app (which is the same across all devices) and be able to view more detailed insights, including the route you took.

This watch offers the same sleep insights as most other devices from Garmin, with sleep quality and duration recorded and an overall Sleep Score (a rating out of 100) provided, so long as you wear the watch to bed. It can even detect any naps you take - one of few devices with this feature - and add them to your sleep profile for a complete overview of your recovery efforts.

The Garmin Vivoactive 5 is more than a fitness tracker though. With this watch, you can pay with one tap of Garmin Pay, control your music with phone-free access, and view photos, bridging the gap between tracker and smartwatch just as seamlessly as the newest Apple Watch. Plus, the Vivoactive 5 is smaller than many others from the brand (screen size: 30.4 mm), comes in four colour options off the shelf (you can customise all Garmin devices to some degree), and lacks the classic 'rugged' design seen on models of the Forerunner and Fenix, so it's more suitable for daily wear. It also offers 11 days of battery life in smartwatch mode between charges, so provided you're only doing a couple of workouts a week, you could go for almost a fortnight between charges.

However, the device is missing a barometric altimeter. This is a floor counter essentially, so this device won't be able to count how many 'flights' of stairs you climb every day and may lack some accuracy when it comes to tracking undulating terrains on a run or bike ride. Unlike the Vivoactive 4 - the previous model - it also doesn't offer workout animations for the gym, yoga, Pilates, HIIT, and so on (go the Garmin Venu 3 for that feature) and the hardware is made from aluminium rather than stainless steel, so it may lack the same durability as other devices.

Yet, while it's not the top choice for hikers or cycling obsessives (though you can connect this watch to a power sensor and other indoor cycling kit), this is the watch that'll work for most people. It has all the essentials for tracking workouts and recovery, helping to improve your health without any faff. Our tester Ciara McGinley, who reviewed the watch, said: "I can't fault this device for accurate stats and useful insights into my workouts, daily life, and sleep. It's also so easy to use, which is a big plus."

The best Garmin for runners

Garmin Forerunner 265 in multiple colours

(Image credit: Garmin)

2. Garmin Forerunner 265

Best Garmin for runners

RRP: £429.99 | Dimensions: 46.1 x 46.1 x 12.9mm | Battery life: Up to 13 days | Waterproof: Yes, up to 50m | In-built GPS: Yes

Very accurate GPS
Plenty of workout modes to choose from
Offers music playback via Spotify
Connects to cycling equipment
Has a barometric altimeter 
No on-board maps
Similar to the (cheaper) Forerunner 165

If you're a keen runner, you may already be familiar with the Forerunner range - of the lot, it's the one that's best suited for regular runners - whether that's indoor track running, running on the treadmill, or city jogs. The Garmin Forerunner 265 is widely considered to be the 'catch-all' of the range, offering advanced insights into running and cycling workouts, with on-wrist programmes to follow, advanced health sensors, and sleep and stress tracking.

There are over 30 workout modes to choose from - with seven just for running and eight if you include Triathlon. Complementing these, there are individual HIIT, strength, yoga, and Pilates modes to choose from with workouts available to download to your watch and follow in real-time. The watch also uses your VO2 max and your previous running data to predict your time in a 5km, giving you a simple idea of how your fitness is progressing - the faster the time, the fitter you are.

Unlike the Vivoactive 5, the Forerunner 265 has a barometric altimeter - which means it can record how many 'flights' you're doing. When you're running, this means the watch can detect when you're going up a hill and recognise you'll be putting in a harder effort while doing so.

As standard across all Garmin types, you'll be able to record your sleep duration and quality, as well as stress scores, to give you an overview of your recovery. Together, your efforts and recovery come together to create a Body Battery score. This is a score that can offer a good indication of what your body needs on any given day - more sleep, more rest, gentle workouts, or full-on efforts - and is included in the Morning Report, which sits on the screen of your watch at the start of every day.

The AMOLED display is excellent, offering a complete view of the watch face even in bright sunshine, and dual touchscreen and manual navigation offer easy access no matter how you're moving.

The Forerunner 265 also comes with plenty of useful smartwatch features that complement your workouts, enough to rival the Venu 3. All versions of the 265 offer music storage and playback directly via your headphones - no need to buy a special model for this or take your phone with you. Training Readiness is also included on the 265 - a feature which takes into account your stats to advise on the best type of exercise to do that day.

My only gripe with the 265 is that there is no feature for on-board maps. For the £399 price tag, that's to be expected but it's still an investment, so if the 265 isn't quite in your budget, you'll find similar features on the Garmin Forerunner 165 for just over £230. For on-screen maps, you'll have to go up the levels to the Forerunner 965, which is currently on sale for £539 at Amazon. This means you can't get turn-by-turn navigation on-wrist for your runs, so you'll need to do this on your phone or know where you're going.

The best Garmin for gym workouts

Garmin Venu 3

(Image credit: Garmin )

3. Garmin Venu 3

Best Garmin for gym workouts

RRP: £449.99 | Dimensions: 41 x 41 x 12 mm | Battery life: Up to 10 days | Waterproof: Yes, up to 50m | In-built GPS: Yes

Advanced health insights
Send and receive texts and calls
Comfortable to wear
Detailed sleep insights
More expensive than others at RRP
Some smartwatch features only available on Android phones

The Garmin Venu 3 could have easily made our top pick. The Vivoactive 5's excellent features for a lower price tag won us over in the end but this excellent device comes in a very close second and is the closest you'll get to an advanced smartwatch with lifestyle tools and superb fitness tracking.

For gym-goers, this is the best Garmin in my view. It has over 40 workout modes, with different options for types of strength training and options for indoor, machine-based workouts like treadmill running and cycling on a stationary bike. What impresses me (and our tester for this watch, Ciara McGinley) the most about the Garmin Venu 3, however, is the on-screen workouts. Covering key fitness areas such as strength, HIIT, yoga and stretching, choose one from the Garmin app and send it to your device to follow along with at the gym. It replaces the need for popular workout apps at no extra cost and offers fitness newcomers a little more confidence and structure to their sessions.

You can also create your workout within the app, choosing from over 1,600 exercises. Send it to your device to follow along with, recording sets and reps as you go on your wrist.

Going hand-in-hand with these excellent fitness features are the Garmin Venu 3's smartwatch capabilities, which can be useful for distraction-free workouts at the gym. "The Garmin Venu 3 comes with all the bells and whistles. On your wrist, you can see notifications, reply to texts, and even take phone calls [with a connection to Android devices]. It also has Spotify connectivity so you can control your music without touching your phone. If you're considering another advanced smartwatch with fitness-tracking features, like the Apple Watch Series 9, then it's certainly worth weighing this one up too."

However, some smartwatch features are only available on Android phones - such as sending texts from the watch - so if you have an iPhone, this is worth bearing in mind in the toss-up between Garmin vs Apple Watch.

The best Garmin for hiking

Garmin Instinct 2

(Image credit: Garmin)

4. Garmin Instinct 2 Solar

Best Garmin for hiking

RRP: £349.99 | Dimensions: 45 x 45 x 14.50 mm | Battery life (in smartwatch mode): Up to 28 days | Waterproof: Yes, up to 100m | In-built GPS: Yes

Brilliant GPS tracking
Choice of sizes
Very long battery life
Higher waterproofing than other devices
Rugged design may not suit all

If you regularly go off the beaten track when walking as a workout, the Instinct 2 could be the Garmin for you with the two stand-out features being the superior GPS - needed if you find yourself in dense forests or built-up cities and accurate within just a few meters, which is more than what many devices can promise - and battery life - up to 28 days in smartwatch mode and up to 70 hours in constant Max Battery GPS mode. That's way more battery than any other fitness tracker I've seen.

Much like any other Garmin device, the Instinct 2 has multiple workout modes, allowing for specific statistics to be measured during your workout (like pace for running or speed for cycling). You can track your sleep with light, deep, and REM sleep stages available to view on your wrist, monitor your menstrual cycle and see predictions for your next period on your wrist, and even view your fitness age at a glance. It's safe to say, this watch covers the basics and more.

Where it differs from others on this list is the maps feature. The Instinct 2 Solar watch allows you to upload maps from the Garmin Connect app so you can track your location, find your way back to the start of the route, and get a turn-by-turn navigation. It's relatively simple and lacks detail compared to other Garmin devices but given the price difference between the Instinct 2 Solar and watches that offer full-colour maps, like the Garmin Fenix 7 (£519.99), I'd say that's not too bad.

While the rugged design may not be for everyone, you do have a choice of sizes with the Garmin Instinct 2 so you can size down or size up your device based on your preferences for appearance and readability. Equally, if you're looking to avoid constantly checking in on your device, this could be a good choice since the display is about as neutral as they come with grey and black pixels - and though the watch does receive smartphone notifications, that's about it where smartwatch features are concerned.

The best budget-friendly Garmin

Garmin Forerunner 55

(Image credit: Garmin)

5. Garmin Forerunner 55

Best budget-friendly Garmin

RRP: £179.99 | Dimensions: 42 x 42 x 11.6 mm | Battery life (in smartwatch mode): Up to 12 days | Waterproof: Yes, up to 50m | In-built GPS: Yes

Less than £180
Very easy to use
Many advanced features, incl. GPS
Lightweight
No sleep data on watch

For those new to fitness trackers, the Garmin Forerunner 55 is a great choice - and under £180 at full RRP. Designed to be easy to use (though lacking a touchscreen) with five buttons to navigate the watch on the move, all clearly labelled to avoid confusion in the early days of use.

It's an excellent Garmin for those looking to do more exercise and take their fitness more seriously. For example, one feature new to this watch on release is training suggestions - these appear before you start a workout and are based on your activity history. They advise interval training, an easy run, or a speed session for your workout, for example. You can choose to take the advice or dismiss the notification and exercise as you like, of course.

For a watch with a lower price tag than many other Forerunner devices, I was impressed to see many advanced features - including built-in GPS (so you can leave your phone at home to track your route), daily workout suggestions, cadence alerts, race predictor widget (that tells you your predicted time for a 5km run), and post-exercise recovery advice, alongside other regular workout modes.

In the sale, I saw the Garmin Forerunner 55 for the same price as the Fitbit Charge 6 (another excellent tracker with fewer features). However, it is missing several features that are worth bearing in mind. The one that I immediately noticed was the lack of sleep widget on the device - you'll have to look at all your sleep data in the app. Music playback also isn't possible without a phone connection. This means you'll be able to control the music through your watch but you'll need to take your phone with you on the move.

The best Garmin smartwatch

Garmin Lily 2

(Image credit: Garmin)

6. Garmin Lily 2

Best Garmin smartwatch

RRP: £249.99 | Dimensions: 35.4 x 35.4 x 10.1 mm | Battery life: Up to 5 days | Waterproof: Yes, up to 50m | In-built GPS: No

Stylish design
Bright display 
Choice of colourways
Offers some advanced health insights
No in-built GPS
Limited battery life compared to other devices

With its stylish design, choice of several colourways, and a discreet but brightly-lit face, the Garmin Lily 2 is the device for you if you want a fitness tracker with smartwatch features that looks and acts like a regular timepiece.

With the Lily 2, you can record up to 15 workouts and track your sleep at various light, deep, and REM stages with additional insights into your heart rate, stress levels, Pulse Ox2, and breathing throughout the night. Advance sleep insights I'd expect to see as much on the advanced Oura Ring as this fitness tracker, so if sleep insights are important to you, it's worth weighing up Oura Ring vs Garmin Before making a decision.

You can see your Body Battery on your wrist and get a Morning Report at the start of every day, highlighting your key need-to-knows - such as sleep score, upcoming appointments, and weather. Also, it's possible to receive text and call notifications on your wrist when the device is paired with your phone.

This Garmin watch wouldn't look out of place with a regular daily outfit - you'd have to look pretty hard to see that it was a smartwatch at all. However, as a compromise, it is missing a couple of key features which may call the device's almost-£300 price tag into question. For me, the main ones are a lack of in-built GPS (so you'll need to bring your phone with you on outdoor workouts and the data is unlikely to be as accurate) and limited workout modes, with half the amount of the Garmin Forerunner 55, instance, but with the essential running, cycling, and gym workouts all still there. Given the smaller screen size, reading notifications and navigating through the menus on the Lily 2 is a little harder than it would be on other devices too.

The lack of advanced data and features makes it a good option for those just starting out with fitness and tracking their workouts too as it cuts it back to the necessities. Also, if features like built-in GPS aren't important to you (because you don't run outdoors, for example), they shouldn't put you off. The answer to the question of 'which Garmin should I buy?' ultimately comes down to personal preference - you won't miss these features if you don't plan on using them anyway.

The best Garmin for tracking your step count

Garmin Vivofit 4

(Image credit: Garmin)

7. Garmin Vivofit 4

Best Garmin for tracking step count

RRP: £69.99 | Dimensions: 19 mm x 9.4 mm | Battery life: 1 year | Waterproof: Swim proof | In-built GPS: No

Exclusively records steps
Very long battery life
Call and text notifications
Weather report
Only holds 1 month of activity data

Still wondering 'which Garmin should I buy'? If getting steps in is your priority, the Garmin Vivofit 4 could be the best option. It's a stripped-back tracker that truly goes back to basics, prioritising step count and walking above all else, with some basic sleep tracking and smartwatch features.

For those new to exercise, this is no bad thing. Walking has been shown to improve cardiovascular fitness, help maintain muscle mass, and enhance emotional wellbeing by boosting your mood. It's an excellent way to get on the path to improving overall health and wellbeing. Even though I work out multiple times a week, I still consider my step count to be one of the most important indicators of how much movement I'm getting in and whether I need to do more exercise on any given day.

With the Garmin Vivofit 4, you'll see your step count, distance, and predicted calorie burn on your wrist for walking, running, cycling, and swimming activities. The goal is to hit 10,00 steps and then the watch offers a personalised daily step goal to help you make progress over time. There are no workout profiles to enable - the watch automatically recognises which one you're doing, sending the session to your Garmin app when you're done. Simple.

You can also track how many hours you spend asleep - but there aren't any insights into your sleep stages or a sleep score. So naturally, if you're looking to gain detailed insight into your fitness across a range of activities and want to prioritise more than just your step count, I'd recommend any of the other devices on this list instead - with the Vivoactive 5 coming up top.

What are the different types of Garmin watches?

Forerunner

  • Best for: Runners and cyclists, discreet design, bright displays

The Forerunner range from Garmin is designed for runners of all levels as well as cyclists and triathletes. While anyone can use one of these watches and find some benefit, the superior GPS, on-wrist workouts, and multiple sub-genre modes across running, cycling, and swimming workouts make them especially suitable for those looking to improve their fitness through these sports.

On some, the watch face will prioritise running insights so you can see how many kilometres or miles you've run that week at a glance. Widgets such as Body Battery (which takes into account your strain vs recovery to give you a score for the day, which aims to advise you on what your body needs), Training Status (the impact your workouts are having on your fitness from Detraining to Peaking), and Intensity Minutes (the amount of time spent in moderate or vigorous activity measured in 60-second periods) are also available to view at the touch of a button.

The Forerunner design tends to be sleek and lightweight with multiple colourways in each model to suit your style and preference. There's no getting away from the fact that these watches are fitness trackers but they aren't as bump-proof and rugged in design as the Instinct or Fenix.

Vivoactive

  • Best for: Daily workouts, sleep tracking

The Vivoactive range - of which the Garmin Vivoactive 5 is the latest - will keep you moving, prioritising daily exercise, step count, and sleep metrics over specific sports activity stats as the Forerunner range does. There are over 30 workout modes, including indoor track running, open water swimming, and stand-up paddleboarding, among more common activities like HIIT, running, cycling, yoga, and more.

Where recovery is concerned, users can log their rate of perceived exertion post-exercise to monitor their fitness efforts, work out their fitness age, and create personalised workouts on the app to follow along with on the watch. It's a great choice for all-rounders and those who like to exercise in various ways over the week.

Nap detection - alongside sleep score, sleep stages and duration puts it a step above the other ranges for sleep tracking and it's one of the only Garmin devices to offer Wheelchair Mode, which tracks pushes, offers weight shift alerts, and recommends individual workouts for wheelchair users.

Venu

  • Best for: Gym workouts, advanced features, strength training

The Venu and the Vivoactive range are very similar in many ways - but the Venu is more advanced, offering users a more premium experience and design with more smartwatch features in exchange for a higher price tag.

Fitness tracking is all about prioritising regular exercise and good recovery instead of focusing on sport-specific insights with the Venu range offering a great range of workout modes - everything from Padel to yoga. The full-colour animations accompanying the on-screen workout programmes set this range apart from others by the brand, offering users a complete demonstration of each exercise and giving a helping hand to those working out. However, not all have this feature - it's missing on the Venu Sq 2, for example.

Design-wise, you'll notice an elevated look with a stainless bezel on the most recent Venu 3 and a bright AMOLED screen, visible in any kind of light and at any time of day. These devices are also all touchscreen and manual navigation-enabled, so you have a choice when you're on the move, and there are multiple sizes to choose from.

Instinct

  • Best for: Hiking, distraction-free workouts, battery life

The Instinct range from Garmin has the double benefit of being the best watch to buy for accurate, super-detailed GPS and long battery life and the one to buy for distraction-free workouts as the display on these watches is not AMOLED and uses minimal colour.

Designed for hikers, trail runners, cyclists, and exercise enthusiasts with a penchant for getting out in the wilderness, the Instinct is an advanced watch with a rugged design built to withstand the bumps that come with these sports. Reflecting its purpose for outdoor use, you can buy the watch in multiple versions: Camouflage, Surf, Tactical, Dezl, and standard, each other built for a different outdoor pursuit.

This certainly isn't the best Garmin for those who prefer city running, walking, and gym workouts. That'll be the Forerunner or Vivoactive range. But if you've started surfing recently or love hiking, this will be the top choice.

Fenix

  • Best for: Surfers, skiers, mountain bikers, hikers, long-distance running.

If you don't regularly go surfing, mountain biking, skiing, or long-distance running, then the Fenix range isn't for you. But if you do - and you've got a budget to play with - then it could be the best option.

Along with all the standard fitness tracking stats (from step count to distance and calories burned) and plenty of workout modes, this range has specialist features to enhance your understanding and performance in sports like mountain biking, ultra-distance running, surfing, and skiing, with tools designed to improve your endurance and stamina specifically.

Many keen runners also prefer the Fenix range to the Forerunner range as the design is a little more premium with the watches built in a fibre-reinforced plastic casing with a stainless steel bezel casing rather than aluminium and more advanced insights for hill training and pace monitoring.

Get to know Garmin: FAQs

Are Garmin watches waterproof?

Yes, all Garmin watches have a waterproof rating of 5ATM or more. This means they can withstand water pressure equivalent to 50 meters and are suitable for basic water activities like showering, swimming, and recreational snorkelling.

Unless otherwise stated, these watches aren't suitable for continued submersion over multiple hours or swimming deeper underwater in activities like diving.

Does Garmin work with iPhone?

Yes, all Garmin devices are compatible with iPhone and Android models. This means they can connect to Bluetooth without an issue and it's free to download the Garmin Connect app, which you need to use the device most successfully.

However, some smartwatch features are only available with Android devices. For example, on the Vivoactive 5, you can only send text messages via your watch if connected to an Android phone. That's where the Apple Watch has the advantage over Garmin.

Does Garmin track sleep?

All Garmin devices can track sleep duration and most will record the sleep stages (light, deep, and REM sleep) and offer a Sleep Score at the end of the night from a rating of 100 - perfect if you want to learn how to sleep better.

As well as recording when you fell asleep and woke up in the morning, Garmin watches will record how long you were awake during the night and how long you spent in each of the three sleep stages.

Many advanced Garmin watches, such as the Lily 2, also record other data relating to sleep - such as respiration rate and blood oxygen saturation (Pulse Ox) levels through the night - which can tell you even more about your sleep quality.

However, no data on any Garmin device is designed to be a diagnostic tool. If you notice issues with your sleep data and have concerns, speak to your doctor.

Do Garmin watches go on sale?

Yes, Garmin watches are on sale throughout the year direct from the retailer and via third-party sites like Amazon, Argos, and John Lewis. I've noticed deals around Amazon Prime Day and Big Deal Day, happening on October 8 and 9 2024.

Before buying a Garmin in the sale, consider what you need to know before buying a fitness tracker, compare products from the brand (for example, a heart rate monitor like the Garmin HRM-Fit could be the better choice for you), and weigh up competitors. For example, compare Fitbit vs Garmin as these two brands have similarities across some devices.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/health-wellbeing/which-Garmin-should-I-buy/ wghbCQi5ATBe4vwFfbqiX5 Tue, 24 Sep 2024 05:00:01 +0000
<![CDATA[ Step on up: 9 of the best smart scales to help reach your health and wellness goals in 2024 ]]> Smart scales claim to analyse everything from muscle mass and bone density to body fat, delivering the results straight to your phone. With new advancements in technology have come new and impressive features but do they really work? And if so, what are the best ones to buy?

Bathroom scales have come a long way. There was a time when your only option was to step on a cumbersome platform and wait for the needle to point towards a number on a dial. More slimline digital scales were then ushered in that showcased your weight in bright lights. Now we have smart scales that sync with apps on your phone and provide a plethora of data to digest, from body fat to muscle mass - much like one of the best fitness trackers.

"The benefit of these scales is that they can provide users with up-to-date information about their weight and health, alerting them to when a heart rate becomes too high or when a BMI is out of a safe range, for example," says Dr Jane Glazebrook, a GP specialising in weight management. "Some people might find their weight plateaus, which can be down to several factors such as increased muscle mass or water retention. Smart scales provide a more detailed picture than just measuring body weight."

As a health and wellbeing writer, I regularly review products, from hiking sandals to walking pads. I'm always keen to try out the latest technology. On a personal note, my clothes have felt a little looser of late but my weight has plateaued. Curious, I've tested several smart scales consistently over the past nine weeks to get a breakdown of what's going on. 

Top 3 picks

The best smart scales, tried and tested by us

The best smart scale overall

Eufy smart scales

(Image credit: Eufy )

1. Eufy Smart Scale P3

The best smart scale overall

RRP: £79.99 | Maximum user weight: 200kg/440lbs/31st | Size: 32.5x32.5x2.6cm | Weight: 2kg | Connectivity : Bluetooth and Wifi

Budget-friendly compared to others on the list
 Data is detailed and user-friendly  
 3D models of yourself can be motivating
£59.99 on Amazon with Prime
 16 biometrics might feel overwhelming 

Of all the smart scales I tried, the Eufy Smart Scale P3 proved to be a favourite as it ticked so many boxes. For one, it looks smart, has a clear display and the diameter, at over 30 cm squared, makes it a comfortable platform to stand on with plenty of space for your feet.

The set-up was simple but what I really loved about this smart scale on the first try was the app layout. It had plenty of detail, presented in a clear and digestible format, so it didn't overwhelm me. The 16 biometrics include (*deep breath*) weight, BMI, body fat, heart rate, muscle mass, BMR, water, body fat mass, lean body mass, bone mass, visceral fat, protein (low protein mass can be associated with excess body fat), skeletal muscle mass, subcutaneous fat, body age and body type. It's highlighted below each measurement whether the figure is standard or too high, given your age, height, weight, and so on, so you get immediate feedback. In addition, there is a further explanation as to where you should be, why that is, and what you can do to improve your health. I found this motivating as it helped me consider the action I needed to take, rather than telling me my measurement and leaving me high and dry. 

Likewise, I found the 3D model of your body that greets you on the homepage to be an inspiring tool as you can compare it to a baseline 3D model of yourself. Some people might think this is gimmicky, but I found it to be a motivating aid to track progression. Overall, these scales provide an impressive level of detail that continues to be appealing - I'm still using it today - and the fact these scales land in the mid-range price point is a big bonus. 

Best smart scale for fitness lovers

Vitafit smart scale

(Image credit: Vitafit)

2. Vitafit Smart Body Fat Scale

The best smart scale for fitness lovers

RRP: £35.99 | Maximum user weight: 180kg/400lbs/28st | Size: 28x28x2.4cm | Weight: 1.19kg | Connectivity : Bluetooth

Compact and lightweight  
Good price point 
Lots of data, which is easy to view and track 
Results lack detail and explanation 

 Compared to other smart scales, the Vitafit Smart Body Fat Scale is the better choice for anyone who exercises a lot or is looking to improve their fitness. While the other scales offer plenty of metrics and have multiple profiles for different users, this was the first scale I tested that took specific body types and goals into account. 

On the Vitafit app, which you have to download to use the scales, you are prompted to choose a suitable user mode from three options: weight only, athlete, or general. This is particularly important for those who do one of the many types of strength training or just regularly work out as the 'athlete' profile will pay particular attention to muscle mass when working out weight and BMI, etc. That way, you don't end up with incorrect or misleading data because you have more muscle - and muscle weighs more than fat. 

You can also use the app to sync data to the Fitbit app and Apple Health, add other users, and set a goal weight, all very useful for those who have health and fitness goals in mind, in my view. 

When I picked up the scale, the first thing I noticed was how lightweight it felt. While it's not the lightest scale on the list, it's just shy of being so, making it a great option for anyone who wants to store the scale between uses (although this could affect calibration). 

I was impressed by how many stats were available for the accessible price point on this scale too with the data is divided into Measurements breaking the day’s stats into two sections: body composition (weight, body fat, body fat-free, bone mass, muscle mass, protein, body water and target weight) and body index (BMI, visceral fat, subcutaneous fat, skeletal muscle, BMR, metabolic age and height). These appear as different colours to highlight whether results are too high or sufficient compared to standard baselines for your weight, height, age, and so on. There is also a Trends section with graphs, where you can see what progress you are making.

As someone who loves detail and insight into specific metrics on smart scales, this one was another top favourite of mine. When I clicked on each measurement, I could see why it was important to have that specific measurement and I was told where my data sat on a scale. The information is not particularly detailed admittedly, but it offered more than other scales at a higher price point on this list. Overall, I was very impressed. 

Best versatile smart scale

Etekcity smart scale

(Image credit: Etekcity)

3. Etekcity Smart Fitness Scale ESF-551

The best versatile smart scale

RRP: £25.99 | Maximum user weight: 180kg/400lbs/28st | Size: 27.9x27.9x2.79cm | Weight: 1.22kg | Connectivity : Bluetooth

Very versatile
Connects to several external health apps
Plenty of biometrics
Helpful information and advice included with the data 
Does not feel as sturdy as other scales 
Lacks complete body composition detail

Is there anything the Etekcity Smart Fitness Scale ESF-551 can't do? From syncing with a variety of health and weight loss apps to offering detailed information immediately post-reading on the app, this was one of my favourite smart scales to test. And what's more, it's available for less than £30. 

Etekcity has not scrimped on the amount of data that is available as once the scale is synced to the VeSync app. 13 biometrics are included: weight, body fat, BMI, subcutaneous fat, metabolic age, skeletal muscle, fat-free body weight, visceral fat, body water, bone mass, protein, BMR and muscle mass. These are presented on one page with any measurements of potential concern highlighted, which I found very useful and it's a feature not included on many of the other smart scales I tested. Click on the measurement, and it takes you to a page that reveals what the measurement refers to, how it can affect you, as well as dietary and exercise advice, which is super useful as context. As I love detailed graphs and data with explanations, this was a dream. we

You can also access the information as graphs to see any trending patterns, set goals, use the baby and pet modes (to weigh either while holding them), and sync with third-party apps, such as Apple Health (particularly useful if you've got the newest Apple Watch or the Apple Watch Series 9), Fitbit and MyFitnessPal. This makes the scale a good choice for anyone who's recently bought the newest Fitbit or is looking to lose weight sustainably and healthily via a calorie deficit.

If there are any niggles, they do not feel as sturdy as other scales, and you might prefer a more detailed breakdown of body composition - but as an all-rounder and an impressive offering given the price. If I had to choose between these and the Renpho scales, which are similarly priced, these would be my preference, taking into account the design of the scales and app alongside the available data.

Comparatively speaking, these scales are smaller than some of the competitors so it's worth checking your shoe size against the dimensions before buying, but it's slimline with four diagonal sensors and a bright, crisp LED display that's easy to view.

Best budget-friendly smart scale

Renpho smart scale

(Image credit: Renpho)

4. Renpho Elis 1 Smart Body Scale

The best budget-friendly smart scale

RRP: £25 | Maximum user weight: 180kg/400lbs/28st | Size: 26x26x2.5cm | Weight: 1.1kg | Connectivity : Bluetooth

Cheapest smart scale on the list
Lots of biometrics available
Data is easy to digest
Might be too small 
Results lacked context

Cheap, small, and easy to set up, if you want smart scales that don't stretch your pocket or take up too much space in your bathroom, I'd suggest the Renpho Elis 1 Smart Body Scale. 

These smart scales are the smallest of all the ones I tried, which is saying something as my size 7 feet filled the entire length. Any bigger and you would be hanging off the edge. The design is well thought out though with curved edges and a clear display screen that lights up in red. Weighing just over 1kg, it's very lightweight and easy to move around.

Although the scales come in at less than £30, they offer a plethora of measurements,  which I found to be very impressive. Weight, BMI, body fat, fat-free body weight, subcutaneous fat, visceral fat, body water, skeletal muscle, muscle mass, bone mass, protein, basal metabolic rate, and metabolic age are all on the list. Like the Vitafit Smart Body Fat Scale, the metrics are colour-coded, so you can see whether they are higher or lower than standard baselines. When you press on each, you’ll see where the measurement sits on a scale. There is also a measurement report that compares your measurements against a baseline so you can spot areas to improve. It's very standard, so if you work out at the gym a lot and have more muscle mass, you may find that incorrect markers are flagged around BMI, for instance, since muscle weighs more than fat.

In my view, these smart scales are ideal if you are not looking to spend serious pounds on fancy graphics. There are plenty of measurements that can provide an overall guide to your health, and when I compared the Renpho Elis 1 Smart Body Scale to the other scales, the data fluctuated as much as any of them did (none of them came out with the same results), so more money doesn't necessarily equal more accuracy. Just approach with caution if your feet are size 8 or over - and be sure to check out the Etekcity Smart Fitness Scale ESF-551 before making a final decision as the two are fairly similar. 

Most advanced smart scale

Withings smart scale

(Image credit: Withings)

5. Withings Body Scan

The most advanced smart scale

RRP: £349.95 | Maximum user weight: 200kg/440lbs/31st | Size: 32.5x32.5x2.56cm | Weight: 4.3kg | Connectivity : Bluetooth and Wifi

More sensors via handle
Advanced technology
Plenty of data
High price point
Much heavier than other scales

Billed by Withings as ‘a powerful clinical experience at home,’ this was the priciest smart scale I tried, so the expectations were high stepping on. First of all, it should be noted it's a good size, though heavy (at over 4kg) and not the easiest to manoeuvre. But it was straightforward to set up and it synced easily with the app. Although eight people can use these scales, it automatically recognises you when you step on the platform - rather than having to find your profile before you can get a reading like the Salter Smart Bluetooth Scale. 

One big difference between the Withings Body Scan and the other smart scales I tested was the extendable handle, which pulls up from the machine's base and has more sensors. The handle allows for segmental body composition as the current is flowing through the entire body, as opposed to just the lower body, which means information on muscle and fat mass is broken down into arms, legs and torso. Per the experts (noted below), this is likely to be more accurate than devices just reading from the feet. The handle also contains electrodes required for the electrocardiogram, which tracks your vascular health and can highlight any anomalies. 

The scan itself takes 90 seconds and vibrates after taking each reading, which includes weight, vascular age and nerve health. Each metric popped up on the scale's display, so I knew instantly what the result was and whether this was considered to be within a 'healthy' range. There is further explanation on the app, including graphs to demonstrate what headway you are making, or not, and a mock-up of your body to demonstrate fat and muscle composition. 

The app itself is free, but there are additional paid-for features - like the health improvement score, recipes and guided workouts - at £9.99 a month. There's no denying that the depth of detailed data is impressive, but the hefty price tag needs careful consideration. I think unless your budget comfortably extends to this amount, it's worth looking at other smart scales on the market that provide similar depths of data minus the dent in your pocket.

Best smart scale for simple readings

Beurer smart scale

(Image credit: Beurer)

6. Beurer BF 720 Diagnostic Bathroom Scale

The best smart scale for simple data readings

RRP: £59.99 | Maximum user weight: 180kg/400lbs/28st | Size: 30x30x25cm | Weight: 1.6kg | Connectivity : Bluetooth

A fuss-free offering that covers basic metrics well
Data is presented in a visually appealing format 
Tips, advice and info easily accessible   
Lacks detail regarding body composition
The results could be delivered with more context 

Starting with the look of these Beurer scales - it's a good-size machine and slimline, making it easy to store in the bathroom. It also feels solid to stand on and grips well even on a tile floor. The setup was uncomplicated, which is always a big bonus with smart scales as it's not always the case, with basic instructions included in the box. I found the app easy to navigate as well, so I was off to a flying start in testing.

Much like other devices on the list, the Beurer offers biometrics for up to eight users and includes weight, BMI, body fat, body water content, muscle percentage, bone mass, and basal and active metabolic rate. You’ll find your weight on the app home page, next to a breakdown of your results. The BMI, body fat, water and muscle measurements are presented as coloured circles (blue, green, yellow or red depending on how satisfactory the results are), which means you can quickly determine how well you are doing on your health journey. 

If you click on a circle, you are taken to another page that displays where your number sits within the different categories - but that is about it. I would have liked to have seen more detailed information and my results in context, as you can see with the Eufy Smart Scale P3. 

Also from the app home page, you can add personal goals, track your history and access recipes, a tip of the day, helpful activities and explanations of common terms for no extra cost within the Beurer MyHeart section, which is a welcome addition on par with the Fitbit Premium app that pairs with the Fitbit Aria Air Smart Bathroom Scales.

The Beurer BF 720 Diagnostic Bathroom Scale covers the basics well, and the fact the app is minimal in design will be a welcome feature for some users. It's a good pick for those who already have comprehensive health knowledge and an understanding of what the individual metrics mean, so just want to check in for anomalies over time. For the price, I'd argue that our top pick overall - the Eufy Smart Scale P3 is a better option - but should you be looking for an alternative, this would be my go-to.

Best Garmin smart scale

Garmin smart scales

(Image credit: Garmin)

7. Garmin Index 2 Smart Scale

The best Garmin smart scale

RRP: £129.99 | Maximum user weight: 180kg/400lbs/28st | Size: 32 x 31 x 2.8cm | Weight: 2kg | Connectivity : Wifi and Bluetooth

Stylish design
Great for Garmin device interconnectivity
Lots of people (16) can access it 
Limited context for data

Given that Garmin produce some excellent fitness trackers - like the Garmin Vivoactive 5 and the Garmin Venu 3 - it should be no surprise that a Garmin smart scale has made the list. The Garmin Index 2 Smart Scale is sleek and stylish, fitting discreetly into my bathroom, and very easy to move around at just 2kg. The display is clear and bright so you can view it even in dim bathroom lighting. 

Naturally, this will be the pick of the best for anyone who regularly uses a Garmin fitness tracker as it's the same app for both watches and this smart scale, meaning you can have all your data in one place. 

Aside from the dashboard, where you will find the basic health and weight measurements, you can track blood pressure (by taking a reading or adding manually), find out whether you are drinking enough liquid (by adding manually), and sync calories burned when wearing a Garmin device. Obviously, if you don't wear a Garmin fitness tracker (like me), you do not benefit from this and it could be reason enough not to invest in these smart scales. If you have a Fitbit instead, the Fitbit Aria Air Smart Scale may be a better choice.

The data includes weight, BMI, body fat, skeletal muscle mass, bone mass and body water. Multiple measurements are tracked on graphs, offering deep personal insight into these metrics - but there is no context as to whether the measurements are high, low, unhealthy or healthy. Perhaps this hasn't been included because what 'healthy' means is very much down to individual perception - and the baselines are readily accessible on the NHS website for most health markers (like BMI, for instance). However, given that Garmin is a real expert in improving health and fitness, this was a little disappointing. For those who have a good understanding of what these metrics mean or are prepared to learn by other means, it's not an issue. 

Also, whether you see this as a negative or positive depends on how simplistic you want your information to be. Personally, I prefer to receive readings within context and alongside an explanation, giving me a full picture of how I'm doing. It's why the Eufy Smart Scale P3 made my pick of the best.

Best smart scale for families

Salter smart scale

(Image credit: Salter)

8. Salter Smart Bluetooth Scale

The best smart scale for families

RRP: £37.99 | Maximum user weight: 200kg/440lbs/31st | Size: 30x30x2.5cm | Weight: 1.89kg | Connectivity : Bluetooth

Small size 
Can create up to eight profiles 
Take part in challenges for motivation
Cheapest smart scale on the list
Results are too simple and lack context
Fiddly to access each profile

The smart scales by Salter are a good size, large enough to fit my size 7 feet comfortably without being too heavy to move between rooms if needed. There is also a large LCD providing clear visibility. 

It is possible to have eight people accessing the smart scales, which provides an opportunity for group challenges, so you could introduce a competitive element with your partner or other family members - if you so wish. My main quibble is that these scales seemed a little fussier to set up and turn on than the others as you have to access your allotted number before you can sync your measurements, which felt a little fiddly.

As far as biometrics go, these scales measure weight, body fat, body water, muscle mass, bone mass, body mass index, and basal metabolic rate. They are all presented simplistically with lists on the home dashboard and via rudimentary trending graphs. Although it was presented clearly, the way the data was displayed was just a little too minimalistic for me and I found it lacked context. I preferred further explanation as to what the measurements meant and advice on how I can improve my metrics, as shown on the Eufy Smart Scale P3, but it would be ideal if you just want the basic numbers and don’t want to feel bombarded by statistics. 

Best smart scale for Fitbit users

Fitbit smart scale

(Image credit: Fitbit)

9. Fitbit Aria Air

The best smart scale for Fitbit users

RRP: £49.99 | Maximum user weight: 180kg/400lbs/28st | Size: 30x30x2.57cm | Weight: 1.79kg | Connectivity : Bluetooth

Seamless integration for Fitbit users
Data is presented simply
Budget-friendly option
Only records weight

First things first, this is the least advanced smart scale on the list. While it compares excellently with Fitbit devices, making it a simple go-to for anyone with one of the best Fitbits on their wrist, it only records basic weight and BMI. For more detailed insights, such as the Eufy Smart Scale P3, Vitafit Smart Body Fat Scale, or Beurer BF 720 Diagnostic Bathroom Scale, you'll have to look elsewhere. At a fractionally lower price point is the Vitafit Smart Body Fat Scale, which I'd recommend instead if you don't have a Fitbit or you're looking for more detailed information from your smart scale.

The Fitbit Aria Air is slimline, ideal if you want smart scales that are not too obtrusive in your bathroom. They feel sturdy without being cumbersome, are simplistically but stylishly designed and with an adequately sized digital display. Given the brand's reputation, this wasn't a surprise to me - I've always been a fan of Fitbit design. 

I have to admit I was surprised to discover that, unlike most smart scales, these focus solely on your weight. Bar your BMI, there is no breakdown of body composition or detailed analysis. It means essentially these are digital scales that sync to the Fitbit app as opposed to smart scales in the more conventional sense. The smart scales have no doubt been designed as an accompanying device to one of the many Fitbit types (one of which I wear regularly). If you don't have a Fitbit, you can use the scales and download the app for insights but there are better options in this case, as noted.

I found set-up easy and once I stepped on the scales, my weight was clocked immediately on the app. The benefit of using these scales is that it saves you from weighing yourself on a different device and then manually inputting the measurement into your Fitbit app and it's quick and efficient at what it does. It is up to you to decide whether the weight-only metric warrants the price tag, though - and if you are looking for a scale that links with a fitness track, weigh up Garmin vs Fitbit before making a decision. 

How accurate are smart scales?

It's important to acknowledge two notable points about using smart scales at home. "While they can be a useful way to monitor key weight and health data, the data provided by smart scales will typically not be as accurate as more specialised methods and equipment used by experienced medical professionals in a controlled clinic setting who are also factoring in your other personal health history and metrics," says Dr Glazebrook, who works at The Slimming Clinic

Take how hydration levels might be measured, for example. "If your scales just have a foot plate the body composition and hydration levels are only measured through the lower half of your body. An estimated value for the whole body is produced but smart scales with additional handles can provide better accuracy as the lower and upper body are measured directly. However, these scales tend to be more expensive and less user-friendly. I suggest patients take the values as ‘estimates’ rather than exact," she adds. 

"Also, constant access to health data like this can, for some people, cause obsessive-like behaviours, and can also result in anxieties about their health which can do more harm than good." 

I found there were very small discrepancies between some of the measurements. However, the same fluctuations were reflected on each of the smart scales and though there might have been a pound difference in weight, for example, the same overarching messages were concluded by all of them as to whether my measurements were too high, low or within the correct category to be considered healthy.

How I tested

A selection of smart scales tested by Susan Griffin

Susan Griffin tested smart scales for several weeks from brands including Garmin, Eufy, Fitbit, Salter, and more. (Image credit: Future)

For this list, I tried and tested each of the smart scales a minimum of seven times over a 5-week period, which included a two-week holiday - helpful for two reasons. I could note and assess any differences in data and whether my body composition had changed significantly during this time, through different routines and activities, and I could see how easy it was to use the smart scales after an extended break.

I tried nine smart scales from brands including Fitbit, Garmin, Salter, Withings and Eufy, reviewing them on portability, convenience, data configuration, accessibility and price. All the accompanying apps were free to download.

I was barefoot, and for consistency, only wore my underwear each time. A hard surface is preferable to carpet, so I weighed myself on the same section of bathroom tile. Given there were nine different smart scales to trial, I kept them in an adjoining room and moved them onto the bathroom floor one by one, which helped me to assess portability. 

In testing, I looked at the following details: 

  • Size and style: Within each review, I have included my first impressions of each smart scale, not only how it looks, but how it feels and the size. Given that not everyone has the same size bathroom, this is an important factor as the scale needs to be accessible without getting in the way.
  • Portability: In case you cannot or do not want to have your smart scales on display all the time, I noted the portability of each smart scale. For example, were they lightweight or heavy to move? Would you need much storage space? However, it's important to read the instructions on your device as movement can affect the calibration of some scales.
  • Ease of use: Any technology can feel overwhelming, especially at first, so I considered various factors, such as how easy it was to set up the smart scales, whether the instructions were easy to follow, and the simplicity of using them moving forward.
  • Accessibility to data: The apps are key to smart scales, so I have included information on how easy I found it to access the data, how detailed it was, and how it is presented on the scale and in the app. The data is the most important part of using a smart scale, after all.
  • RRP: As with any product, especially within the tech sphere, prices can vary a lot, so I included a variety of price points.

How to choose the right smart scales for you

  • Buy from a reputable source: “I would advise people to buy them from a reputable and reliable source. This will help to ensure that they are accurate and reliable. Looking at genuine online reviews can also help to provide greater insight into their functionality and accuracy,” says Dr Glazebrook.
  • Check suitability: “It’s not advisable to use smart scales when pregnant because of the electrical current that runs through them. For this reason, they also should also not be used by people with pacemakers or other medical devices,” says Dr Glazebrook. Check whether there is a weight-only option as this does not use the electrical current if you are looking to buy one.
  • Consider your requirements: “When upgrading to smart scales, look for features that align with your health goals and preferences,” says personal trainer Jade Imani. Also, check the size and weight of the smart scales to ensure they meet your physical requirements.
  • Do your research on data: “Pay attention to the ease of syncing with apps and data storage policies. While detailed metrics can be helpful, they can also be overwhelming if you’re not sure how to interpret them. Focus on scales that provide clear, actionable insights and choose features that will genuinely benefit your fitness journey,” says Imani, who works with Insure4Sport.

When is the best time to use smart scales?

The best time to use smart scales is consistently at the same time of day and under similar conditions to ensure the most accurate and comparable readings, says Imani. “In the morning, before eating or drinking, is typically the most reliable time to use any kind of weighing scale [as you're yet to eat or drink]. It’s also important to use them on a hard, flat surface for consistent results," she says.

It's also a good idea to wear minimal clothing - or none at all - when using the weighing scale as even the best technology can't tell the difference between body weight and clothing. However, if you do wear some clothing on the scale, be sure to keep this consistent with every measurement.

Are smart scales worth it?

eYes, after testing these devices for several weeks, I'm confident in saying that a smart scale is a worthy buy - provided you stay in your budget. It's not worth splashing cash you don't have on one of these devices. 

It was fascinating to receive a detailed breakdown of my body composition, rather than just my weight and I'm keen to continue using smart scales, consigning my digital scales to the back cupboard, but I only intend to only use them twice a week, at most, and as a general guide to my health moving forward rather than gospel. 

“Using smart scales at home offers convenience and allows for regular monitoring, which can be beneficial for staying on track with personal goals. However, scales used in a gym setting or under professional supervision can provide additional context and interpretation of the data," says Imani. "The best approach might combine home monitoring with periodic check-ins with a professional. Stay focused on your personal goals and use smart scales as a supportive tool rather than the sole measure of your progress." 

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/health-wellbeing/best-smart-scales/ fNgW8NWzW2Ln5LT2jG4D76 Sun, 22 Sep 2024 17:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ 6 of the best natural haircare products for Black hair – reviewed by a beauty expert ]]> If you’re on the hunt for the best natural haircare products for Afro-textured hair, first and foremost you should know it’s OK if your chosen products aren’t 100% 'natural'. Personally, I’m all about products containing natural nourishing oils, therefore I tend to focus less on the other ingredients in the formula as I know what my Afro prefers.

With that said, when it comes to the best hair treatments, “natural hair products are beneficial for Afro hair because they are gentle and don’t contain chemicals that can cause irritation and damage,” says Rachael Sey, trichologist at Cherub London. “Natural ingredients usually contain vitamins, minerals and essential fatty acids that strengthen the hair. In addition, many natural haircare products like shea butter and argan oil are essential for promoting health and preventing damage in Afro hair.”

Dr. Kari Williams, Director of Education for Cécred, also notes “a healthy scalp and hair routine should consist of a gentle shampoo for removing dirt, excess oil and product buildup without stripping natural oils. Conditioner and natural oils also help hydrate and seal moisture into the hair shaft.” Ahead, I’ve shared my recommendations for the best natural hair care products for Afro-textured hair with a variety of ingredients and price points.

6 of the best natural hair care products for black hair, reviewed by a beauty expert

How we tested the best natural haircare products for Black hair

Tester Vanese has a naturally Afro hair type, therefore a lot of the products included have been part of her everyday routine for over a year. The ones she wasn’t as familiar with before working on this guide were used as part of her wash routine over the course of two months.

She wanted to include formulas that were packed full of hydration and specifically designed for kinky, curly and coily hair types. She found that it was super important to thoroughly look through product ingredient lists. While not every product featured is 100% natural, she’s happy with the overall formula of each one.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/hair/best-natural-haircare-products-for-Black-hair/ fDyEEADCFkRayQMhXecuba Sun, 15 Sep 2024 06:01:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ The best suede boots to see you through the season in style - from chic over the knee boots to cosy UGGs ]]> A staple for the colder months, the best suede boots will elevate every outfit in your autumn/winter wardrobe. Not only do they keep your feet cosy and warm in the cold, but they add a luxury feel. Whether you opt for a cool platform pair, a cowboy-inspired look, or some classic knee high boots, the soft suede texture always adds interest to an outfit, and unlike a lot of trending styles, they're never going to fall out of fashion.

When curating a capsule wardrobe, you want versatile, wearable and easy-to-style pieces that can effortlessly create chic looks, and the best suede boots really do tick all the right boxes. So with all that in mind, we've rounded up the best styles on the market. And the good news is, from rich shades of burgundy and khaki to classic black or warm brown, there's a colour and style to suit every taste and budget. Our top tip? Take a few moments to think what you're likely to wear yours with. The very best suede boots will pair well with both the best jeans for your body type and stylish dresses to hide a tummy, but it's worth thinking about which leg and heel height will work with the items already in your wardrobe.

woman&home digital fashion editor Caroline Parr says: "Whether you choose ankle, mid calf or knee high boots, suede is a great way to show your soft side. The best suede boots tend to be that much more comfortable than tougher leather styles, and it certainly leans into the boho resurgence we’re seeing everywhere at the moment. My favourite has got to be the cowboy boots - they’re so much easier to wear than you might think, and I bet you didn’t know Nobody’s Child did shoes!"

The best suede boots, as chosen by our fashion team

Best suede boots: black boots

You'll never go too far wrong with classic black, and any one of these styles will work well with blue jeans. Simply add one of the best wool jumpers, and deciding what to wear each day will be a doddle!

Best suede boots: brown boots

From rich chocolate brown to tan shades, brown makes for a slightly softer alternative to black. It works really well with the burgundy and olive green colours that are everywhere this year.

Best suede boots: over the knee boots

Over the knee boots offer a bit of extra warmth and they can really elongate your legs too. Wear them over skinny jeans with a short jacket to show them off in all their glory, or pair them with an ankle-grazing dress.

Best suede boots: cowboy boots

Yee-haw! Thanks to brands like Ganni, Paris Texas, Chloe and Prada, Western boots are well and truly back. The glorious thing about this trend is that you can lean in as much - or as little - you'd like. Go full-on cowboy with fringing and embroidery, or just opt for a subtle nod.

Best suede boots: UGG boots

Forget the UGG boots of the Noughties, this time around they are much less slouchy, more sophisticated. Comfort is always a priority, and these sheepskin-lined designs are as cosy as you can get. Check out our UGG sale deals if you're in the market for a bargain, or our UGG vs EMU boots review if you're looking for alternatives.

FAQs

Is suede better than leather?

Magda Callery, the founder of Style by Magda tells us where she lands on the suede vs. leather debate: "saying suede is better than leather is like saying hot cocoa is better than coffee—it depends on your vibe! Suede has that soft, touchable texture that adds elegance and cosiness to an outfit.

"On the other hand, leather is like the tough older sibling—great for rougher wear and a bit more forgiving if the weather takes a turn. So, if you want a luxe look with a soft finish, suede is your friend (just maybe not in a rainstorm!)."

Do suede shoes age well?

Magda says "suede boots can age beautifully... as long as they’re treated kindly. They develop a slightly worn, lived-in look that’s super charming if you keep them clean. Think of them like that cosy vintage sweater that only gets better with age. They’re a bit more sensitive than leather, so they need some TLC. With a bit of regular care, suede boots can go from “brand new” to “seasoned fashion icon” without losing their charm.

How do you protect suede boots?

In addition to our step-by-step guide on how to clean UGGs, Magda has some sound advice for looking after suede boots: "protecting suede is key to keeping them looking fresh and fabulous. Start with a good waterproof spray for suede—just give them a little spritz each season to protect against spills and splashes (suede does not like coffee)."

In addition, she advises you should "invest in a suede brush to gently remove dirt and dust. And for scuffs, grab a suede eraser or a clean pencil eraser; it’s a game-changer for those little marks. Just remember: no water, no mud, no mystery puddles, and your suede boots will be ready to turn heads year after year."

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/fashion/suede-boots/ wJzywjsZtdTzq5HhAwtg3d Sat, 14 Sep 2024 19:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Some of the best beauty advent calendars now have huge last-minute savings ]]> Deciding which beauty advent calendar is actually worth parting ways with your pennies for can be a difficult task. From comparing the price of the calendar to the value of the products inside, we've done all the hard work for you and rounded up the best advent calendars that are still in stock right now...

There's something about advent calendars that offer a certain thrill. They can make perfect beauty gift idea for a loved one or even a well-deserved festive treat for yourself.

Haven't quite got around to buying a calendar yet? Not a problem, we've scoured the web to curate the ultimate guide to this year's beauty advent calendars that are still in stock...

Beauty advent calendars still in stock for 2024

Beauty Advent Calendar FAQ's

What is the most popular beauty advent calendar?

While all of the calendars featured in our round-up are popular choices amongst shoppers, there are some incredibly sought-after examples such as the cult classic makeup brands Charlotte Tilbury and MAC Cosmetics, plus department stores multi-brand offerings from Cult Beauty, Liberty London, Selfridgs, and John Lewis.

Which beauty advent calendars are set to sell out in 2024?

Every beauty advent calendar has the chance of selling out, but a few notable standouts that are almost guaranteed to sell out completely include Space NK, No7, Cult Beauty, and Liberty London. It's worth remembering that beauty advent calendars are limited edition, meaning once they're gone, they're gone!

Which beauty advent calendar is worth the most?

Considering all of the beauty advent calendars that have been released so far this year, the Harrods Advent Calendar sports the highest value of the contents inside. Setting you back £250, this calendar boasts a hefty worth of £1,599, thanks its luxury contents from Augustinus Bader, Tom Ford, La Mer and Charlotte Tilbury.

Which is the most expensive beauty advent calendar this year?

While many 2024 calendars have already been launched, there are still a few yet to hit the market, so it's not possible to know which is the most expensive just yet. However, it's worth noting that fragrance brands and designer labels' calendars do tend to come with heftier price tags due to the high valued contents, making them some of the most luxurious advent calendars on the market – for example, Jo Loves' costs £375 this year and Dior's is priced at £570.

Are beauty advent calendars worth the money?

Ultimately, the answer to this question is completely subjective, depending on which advent calendar you're looking to purchase. However, we'd say beauty advent calendars are certainly worth the investment. Whilst some can require quite the splurge, the contents inside always boast a higher value than the calendar's retail price, meaning you're getting more bang for your buck. It also offers you the opportunity to try a lineup of new products from some of the biggest (and most popular) beauty brands on the market - perfect if you're on the hunt for new products to adopt into your routine. Oh, and did we forget to mention, they simply add to the excitement of the Christmas festivities!

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/best-beauty-advent-calendar/ oedfwqSabQnZEhwF422BtD Wed, 11 Sep 2024 15:01:40 +0000
<![CDATA[ 9 of the best autumn candles to buy this season to fill homes with a comforting, warming scent ]]> There's quite like embracing the scents of a new season. The best autumn candles should be comforting, relaxing and reminiscent of the change in seasons, where fruitier, lighter scents make way for more rich and heady fragrances.

Once summer begins to dwindle it's important to ready ourselves for the cosy evenings ahead and what better way to do that than choosing the best scented candles for the new season?

And it's not all about pumpkin-spiced scents to capture the essence of everything the plentiful autumn season has to offer. We've tested a variety of different fragrances which feature notes such as patchouli, cedarwood, sandalwood and even crisp pear, sweet orange and lavender, so there's something for everyone in our curated list for 2024.

Here's our edit of scented candles for autumn to buy right now to scent-scape your home like never before.

The best candles for autumn 2024: tried & tested by us

How we tested the best autumn candles

picture of three autumnal candles

A selection of some of the candles we tested. (Image credit: Emily Smith)
  • Strength of the scent: While nobody wants a scent that makes them feel queasy or is too overwhelming, we thought about how much the candle we were burning actually reflected the notes and general fragrance that was on the box. We also noted how much the scent lingered after burning the candle.
  • Burn time: One of the most important factors in purchasing a candle is how long it will actually last you. With the burn times of these candles being up to 50 hours, there weren't enough hours in the day to put each of these claims to the test, but we did light the candles for several hours at a time to get a feel of how the scent matured and how much of the wax had burned.
  • RRP: Scented candles shouldn't be too much of an investment, but certain brands will certainly cost you a little extra. We tested a range of candles at different price points, so whether you're looking for a luxurious gift or just want something cheap and cheerful, there are different options on our list.

FAQs

What is the perfect autumn smell?

While scents are certainly subjective, there are particular notes you can usually expect to see in an autumn candle. These often represent darker nights, woodfires, warming fragrances and scents that have a relaxing feel.

Nicola Elliot, founder of fragrance brand Neom Organics, agrees, telling us that "autumn is fragrances like vanilla, patchouli, cedarwood and sandalwood." While autumn candles often contain a mix of these stronger notes alongside more fresh or fruity ones, Elliot says that "woody, golden, warming and comforting fragrances that make you feel cosy inside out" are what autumn scents are all about.

Amanda Morgan, UK Managing Director at Diptyque, echoes this sentiment, telling us that "for autumn and the cooler months, scents with woody, resinous notes are a perfect way to create a cosy atmosphere."

How to choose an autumn candle for your home

If you're struggling with what the best scent for your home is there are a few things you should keep in mind when shopping for autumnal candles.

Laura Honey, Woman&Home's eCommerce Editor and qualified Master Perfumer says, "Scent is deeply personal, so the most evocative scents will be the ones that you remember best."

She adds, "Personally, I love the greener, woodier autumn candles that take you outside for earthy, organic notes, with a touch of sweetness. This can be cultivated in several ways, but there’s one thing that sets the best autumn candles apart from summer candles: they’re heavier and richer than the light, breezy florals of summer - and I love them all."

This season's candles will most likely offer scents with sage, fig, ginger and bergamot but Laura points out that many perfumers will mix these with a variety of scents so it's all about knowing your nose and its preferences.


Once your home smells beautiful and autumnal why not indulge your home with the latest autumn decor ideas to enhance the cosy ambience?

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/best-autumn-candles/ iGsBTt7Ra8MJs8KjYyXWX6 Thu, 05 Sep 2024 13:39:24 +0000
<![CDATA[ I got 97 mosquito bites while travelling and these beauty creams actually helped ]]> We all look forward to going on holiday. But with the sand, sea and sun in full force, you may find that the elements can start to work against you. And when it comes to biting bugs, the unlucky among us may just find ourselves in itching hell.

That’s certainly the position I was in when I visited Sri Lanka and Singapore recently. At one point during my travels, I counted a hideous – yet somehow comical – 97 bites across my body. Not only had I been attacked by every mosquito within a 10-mile radius (apparently), but I also found myself grappling with sand flies after surfing sessions, as well as other biting pests during a sunrise safari. Why I didn’t wear long trousers, I will never know.

Luckily, I had packed a truckload of beauty goodies that could help. This is largely because I bought a one-way ticket to travel, so I was packing for several months rather than a short break. This means that I’ve had time to do the legwork and try all the best multi-purpose beauty creams to discover which one you truly need to pack for your next holiday.

Why soothing post-bite creams are my travel must-have

I’ve always been most susceptible to mosquito bites, no matter who I travel with. If you’re the same, there may be a reason for that. Charlotte Vøhtz, organic skincare expert and the founder of Green People, notes that “some people are more prone to mosquito bites” than others. Several factors can affect this, from the levels of lactic acid, uric acid and ammonia in your body odour to higher body temperatures, blood types (those with O are most prone to bites) and increased carbon dioxide exhalation (usually because of physical activity).

Charlotte says that for those who have been bitten, you should opt for either aloe vera, which “is soothing and helps reduce inflammation,” or hydrating lotions “containing ingredients like hyaluronic acid, glycerin and ceramides to help hydrate the skin and restore the barrier.”

As well as these – and along with any beauty product I’m about to mention – it’s advised you invest in an effective mosquito repellent product and medicinal treatments (such as hydrocortisone creams) for any bites you do experience.

The top 5 beauty creams for aiding mosquito bite symptoms, according to a beauty editor

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/skincare/mosquito-bite-creams/ mo3DcEJuwVeyL6J4vsiknb Fri, 23 Aug 2024 13:02:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ People always comment on my 'glow' – and it's down to these liquid blushers ]]> As a beauty editor, my favourite compliments to receive are about my skin – in particular, that I am looking "glowy". While my skincare routine and base are key to achieving that glow, I recently realised how important liquid blush is to the final overall look.

The best blushers of all kinds are seeing a resurgence of late, but particularly liquid formulas. From newer brands such as Rhode and Rare Beauty launching bestselling buys to seasonal trends like 'blush draping' doing the rounds, it’s all about the cheeks.

With the right blush placement, this makeup bag staple is also brilliant for adding a pop of colour and brightening the complexion. It’s especially handy if you experience tired, dull skin or if you are usually in a rush in the morning, as it makes a huge difference to your makeup look with minimal effort. As blusher’s number one fan, here I’ve reviewed my go-to products in non-powder formulas for the ultimate glowing pop of colour. Prepare to add at least one of these to your basket...

7 of the best liquid blush buys, according to a beauty editor

How we tested the best liquid blush formulas

Ahead of writing this guide, I returned to many of my favourite products and tried out some newer offerings, such as Rhode’s and Armani’s blushers. I was looking for colour payoff (pigmentation), longevity, ease of application and blending, and levels of luminosity. I used each blusher with both fingertips and a dense brush and wore them all day to see how well they lasted. My usual base is a glowy skin tint, so I wore each of these blushers on top of this for consistency.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/makeup/best-liquid-blush/ 5d9WeZc8WbKPTvP9eQVPrK Mon, 19 Aug 2024 16:31:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ The 2025 Shark hair dryer deals offer tempting savings on all the best-selling tools ]]> Looking to upgrade your old hair dryer to a shiny new model that promises a damage-free, salon-worthy finish without breaking the bank? These Shark hair dryer deals promise just that, with tempting discounts across the brand's best-sellers...

From the Shark Style iQ hair dryer to the hyped multi-attachment FlexStyle, our beauty team has tried and tested Shark’s incredible lineup of styling tools on an array of hair types and cuts - and, spoiler, they have had nothing but good things to say. With such innovative, praise-inspiring tech though, also inevitably comes quite a hefty price tag. They're definitely an investment buy but that's not to say you can't still find some stellar savings.

So, whether you're looking for the best Shark FlexStyle deals or to flag down savings on the brand’s hairdryer range, we've scoured the web to find you the biggest discounts - but be quick, they're few and far between, and certainly won’t be sticking around for long...

Shark hair dryer deals: The Quick Links

Today's best Shark hair dryer deals

Rivalling some of the most popular hair tools on the market, Shark boasts an impressive array of styling devices that work to reduce frizz, boost shine and reduce heat damage. Thus, if you're looking to upgrade your hair routine with one of these investment-worthy tools, we've scouted out some of the best money-saving deals available for you to snap up right now...

Shark FlexStyle Limited Edition Teal Gift Set 5-in-1 Air Styler & Hair Dryer: was £319.99 now £229.99 (save £90) | Amazon

Covering all your hairstyling needs, from curling to drying, you can snag £90 off this Shark FlexStyle gift set. The tool comes with five attachments, effectively affording you with multiple tools for the price of one, along with a storage bag and hair clips.View Deal

Shark STYLE iQ Ionic Hair Dryer & Styler HD120UK: was £179.99 now £99 (save £80.99) | eBay

Although not widely talked about, Shark has an eBay store where they sell refurbished models for a fraction of their retail price, such as this lightweight STYLE iQ hair dryer. Not only is it easy to use, this tool's attachments also offer frizz-free and quick-drying results - perfect for everyday styling. Plus, who can resist a huge 45% off?View Deal

Shark SpeedStyle 3-in-1 Hair Dryer for Straight and Wavy Hair: was £199.99 now £99 (save £100.99) | eBay

Enjoy a huge 50% discount on the SpeedStyle 3-in-1 Hair Dryer by opting for a refurbished tool. This dryer has been refurbished by Shark technicians using the brand's official parts and accessories, plus it also arrives with the security of one year warranty. View Deal

What are the positives of the Shark hair dryer?

Expanding from their renowned lineup of homeware tech, Shark has become one of the leading beauty brands in the hair tools world. With a stellar range of styling devices and accessories, including some of best hair dryers on the market.

What makes these tools especially great is their powerful designs that create salon-worthy hairstyles, without causing any unwanted heat damage. Most notably, their most popular SpeedStyle model regulates temperatures 1000x per second, ensuring it doesn’t exceed 110°C or reach damaging temperatures of 150°C. Shark’s tools are also equipped with ionisers, which actively release negative ions to keep your hair healthy and with an added shine.

With innovation comes investment-worthy price tags, more affordable tools certainly won’t offer the same level of intelligent technology that Shark does. That being said, if you’re on the hunt for a quality hair dryer that provides salon-worthy results, without damaging your strands, Shark is the shopping destination.

Which is better, the Shark or Dyson hair dryer?

Over the last few years, we’ve seen the prominent Shark vs Dyson hair dryer debate floating around, and while both are excellent hair styling tools, the true answer to the question lies with your personal hair type, needs and budget. Dyson’s tools undoubtedly boast a higher price tag than Shark’s, however after testing both tools, we found Dyson offered a slightly more gentle approach to the styling session.

Known for being the best Dyson Airwrap alternative on the market, the Shark FlexStyle tool offers both similar functions and results for a cheaper price - plus, there are some great Shark FlexStyle deals that are worth snapping up. But, if you’re looking for an in-depth comparison of the Shark FlexStyle vs Dyson Airwrap, our review gives you all the information you need to know - including which one is likely to work better for you.

What is the difference between Shark HD 110 and 120?

At first glance, the Shark HD110 and HD120 hair dryers look immensely similar, however, there are a few differences that are worth noting. The first differing feature is that the 110 arrives with two styling attachments, a concentrator and diffuser attachment, whereas the 120 comes equipped with three, a concentrator, diffuser and brush. There are also small differences between the two’s price tags, while the 110 retails for £179.99, the 120 will set you back £188. If you stumble across discounts on either model, they are certainly worth grabbing quickly as they’re not set to stick around for very long.

View the latest Shark discount codes from woman&home's voucher team to get some money off your hair tool purchases.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/hair/shark-hair-dryer-deals/ s9aaZbzgeMWBxdwRv7Lc9B Mon, 15 Jul 2024 18:01:34 +0000
<![CDATA[ Move over, Birkenstock - hiking sandals are the 'must-have' shoe for style and comfort in 2025 ]]> Tempting as it is to reach for the walking boots every time you hike, a pair of the best hiking sandals can do the job just as well. There is no need to keep your feet cocooned in socks and hefty footwear now that summer's on the way, with an impressive array of protective hiking sandals that support your feet and allow them to breathe. 

I'm a keen hiker who lives near the Pennine and Peak District. I'm no stranger to the great outdoors - climbing hills, clambering along ridges, and hiking over the moors are some of my favourite activities, whatever the time of year. I always return feeling renewed, even if the elements are sometimes challenging, and having the correct footwear is undoubtedly key to this.

It is why, when it is hot and muggy, and the terrain is not going to be too technical, I recommend swapping out your pick of the best walking shoes in favour of lightweight hiking sandals. With brands like Teva and Birkenstock more popular than ever as well, this could be the new 'practical' footwear trend here to stay.

I have done the groundwork to help you find the right hiking sandals by reviewing over a dozen of the most popular hiking sandals (and shandals - a sandal-shoe hybrid) from big brands like Hoka, Merrell, Teva and Keen. The round-up includes a cross-section of budgets and styles, from minimalist to closed-toe, but they all provide breathability, support and comfort so you can hike with confidence this summer. 

The best hiking sandals for women

The best hiking sandals overall

Teva hiking sandals

(Image credit: Teva)

1. Teva Terra Fi 5 Universal

The best hiking sandals overall

Size range: 3-9 | Weight per sandal: 312g | Materials: Recycled plastic | Sole: Rugged Spider Rubber outsole

Great traction
Wide range of sizing
Durability and comfort 
Toes exposed
Higher price point

The Terra Fi 5 Universal is one of Teva’s bestselling hiking sandals, so it would seem imprudent not to consider them when thinking about what to wear hiking. And having tested them, these hiking sandals do live up to the hype. 

The first thing that struck me is that the Terra Fi 5 is a good-looking sandal, successfully combining practicality and style, which is hard to come by across the wider range of hiking sandals. Plenty of sizing options exist and four colourways, including neutral, blue, red and black. In the sea of pink and purple-tinted women's hiking sandals, these are a welcome addition. 

Two adjustable straps, one on a slant just below the toes and the other over the front of the ankle, provide support, while the midsole arch makes for super comfortable striding even over rockier terrains with plenty of traction provided by the outer sole. Although your toes are exposed, the front of the sandal does lift a little, which helps to protect them. They are a natural fit for smoother paths and walkways. 

These sandals are more expensive than some others on the list at £90, but as you would hope, these are durable and feel like they are made to last. And unlike some hiking sandals, these can comfortably be worn sightseeing and in social situations, not just out on the trail, so you do get your money's worth. 

The best sandals for long hikes

Keen Hyperport H2 hiking sandals

(Image credit: Keen)

2. Keen Hyperport H2

Best sandals for long hikes

Size range: 2.5 - 8.5 | Weight per sandal: 270g | Materials: Polyester webbing | Sole: Injected foam midsole, Aquagrip rubber

Vibrant colourways
Impressive size range 
Good coverage and support for longer hikes
A premium option with higher price tag

If your hike involves long walks or particularly rocky terrains, a closed-toe, supportive sandal like the Keen Hyperport H2 is the best option to avoid lacking ankle support when you need it most - one of the biggest hiking mistakes you can make, in my opinion. It combines the protective elements of a hiking shoe with the open, airy elements of a sandal. I'm a big fan and it rivals the Teva Terra Fi 5 Universal for the top spot. 

On first glance, you might think these sandals are "a bit much" since the style and colour options - which include pink, yellow, and tangerine - are eye-catching. However, if you're anything like me, you'll be pleasantly surprised by how much you like the look of them when they're on. 

Based on Keen’s Newport sandal, the Hyperport H2 includes additional features that have made this a premium, must-have sandal for those who enjoy hiking longer distances in warmer weather. There is air-injected foam midsole, which I found added comfort to the overall shoe and additional support underfoot on rockier terrains - but are more lightweight than their predecessor. Do not be deterred by the fact they don't have straps either - the mesh upper and mesh heel pull loop means there's plenty of stretch when you put them on, and the one pull bungee races mean you can adjust them for the right fit. Overall, I found them to be incredibly supportive around the midfoot and upper, more so than some other hiking sandals I've tried with velcro and the design looks more seamless and mature thanks to these fixings. 

The best hiking sandals on a budget

Decathlon Quechua hiking sandals

(Image credit: Decathlon)

3. Decathlon Quechua Hiking Sandals NH500

Best budget-friendly hiking sandals

Size range: 2.5-8 | Materials: Polyurethane and polyester | Sole: Synthetic rubber

Plenty of sizing options
More budget-friendly than other options
Versatile 
Minimal toe protection
Only two colour options

Decathlon is one of my go-to stores for active and outdoor clothing and equipment - they sell everything from the best sports bras to fitness trackers - so it's rare I don’t emerge from the store clasping a new addition for my hiking or camping stash. I rate this brand so highly because of the quality you can expect at an affordable price point - and the Quechua NH500 sandals are a case in point.

Even at full price, the hiking sandals are under £30. For that, you get cushioning through double EVA (ethylene-vinyl acetate) soles, a non-slip grip and two adjustable rip tabs, beneath the toes and across the front of the ankle. 

As Decathlon suggests, these hiking sandals are not designed for mountain trails and elevation gains, but they are ideal for days out, sightseeing and weekend walks. As the weather warmed up over the last few weeks, I was grateful to have them on my feet as the two singular straps ensure the sandals are breathable and they don't chafe as you walk. They aren't going to win awards for support or appearance - though they do look similar to some fashionable Teva sandals I've worn - but that's not what they are for. 

They also don't look out of place running errands. While I personally prefer wider straps as they feel more secure, they did not rub or slip on a walk through uneven woodland, so I reckon they could fair well on shorter hikes and through woodland or woody park terrains. In short, these make a great everyday option if you're on a budget. 

The best hiking sandal for the beach

Mountain Warehouse hiking sandals

(Image credit: Mountain Warehouse)

4. Mountain Warehouse Seaside Drainage Outsole Shandal

Best hiking sandal for the beach

Size range: 4-8 | Weight per sandal: 210g | Materials: Polyurethane with neoprene lining | Sole: Rubber outsole, phylon midsole

Lightweight 
Budget-friendly 
Water escapes quickly from sole
Removable strap
Teal colour not for everyone
Closed toe 
Most suitable for wet walks

These sandals - or shandals to give them their correct title as they are a sandal/shoe hybrid - looked a little out of place when I tried them out on my walks in Greater Manchester. As the name suggests, the Seaside Drainage Shandals in their bright teal colour are made with beach holidays, coastal paths and shoreline strolls in mind.

I might not live near the seaside, but I did wear them to cross a stream during one of my walks and living in the North of England, I'm used to wet weather. They did indeed allow the water to pass through the drainage holes and remained comfortable to wear even when damp. My feet also dried quickly thanks to the synthetic neoprene lining and lightweight outer materials. If I had any niggles about these shandals, it would my middle toe on both sides seemed to be trying to escape through one of the gaps - but it was not uncomfortable and this comes down to more personal fit than anything else. 

I personally love the pop of colour. While it is bold, I'm so used to seeing tonal colours and pops of pink and purple that a bright teal is a welcome sight. Many of the best swimwear brands for 2024 have also included the tone in their palette, so you may find a matching swimsuit too. If tonal is more your style though, the Regatta Haris sandals come exclusively in muted shades, as do the Teva sandals. 

The best lightweight hiking sandal

Helly Hansen Capilano F2F Sandals

(Image credit: Helly Hansen)

5. Helly Hansen Capilano F2F Sandals

Best lightweight hiking sandal

Size range: 4-8 | Weight per sandal: 80g | Materials: Recycled polyester, rubber, polyurethane | Sole: Rubber

Good midsole arch support
Very supportive 
Very lightweight
Unique colourway
Limited size range
Only one colour available

My first takeaway on trying Helly Hanse’s Capilano F2F sandals is just how light they are, given that the straps and sole look and feel comparatively substantial. They are sold as a day hiker, which is how I tested them, and I found they did a superb job. 

There are two adjustable straps, one around the front of the ankle, and the other on a slight diagonal beneath the toes, so they are easy to put on. I particularly like the arch and cushioning, which felt plush but incredibly supportive. Combined, it's a design that makes for comfortable walking, especially when you are out for a few hours. My feet did not slip on the inner sole and although my toes were exposed, the sandals provide some toe protection as they lift at the front to help combat stubbing.

They are made from recycled synthetic material and sold as quick drying, which I found true after mistakenly stepping into puddles after a summer shower. I was also impressed that the straps stayed in place and didn't rub my feet when they got wet, which was a huge benefit as this happened earlier in the day. Although support and comfort are always key, I feel points should always be awarded if that can be combined with style - and I think the lighter cactus green shade is a spot-on colourway that's both low-key and unique. Overall, this is a versatile sandal you can wear with confidence.  

The best Merrell hiking sandal

Merrell Kahuna III

(Image credit: Merrell )

6. Merrell Kahuna III

Best Merrell hiking sandal

Size range: 3-9 | Weight per sandal: 170g | Materials: Pig suede upper and Lycra® neoprene lining | Sole: Vibram® Chameleon Sport Sandal Sole/TC5+ Rubber | RRP: £100

Very supportive
Versatile 
Good range of sizes
Most expensive hiking sandal on the list

 As you would expect from a trusted brand such as Merrell, the Kahuna III hiking sandals do not disappoint. At woman&home, we're big fans of the brand - with the Merrell Moab Speed 2 and other hiking shoes frequently making the top of our best-of lists. 

I would describe the Kahuna III as grown-up sandals for serious walking, which means they are functional - if not the most decorative - sandals. Despite their bulky appearance, they feel lightweight and agile on foot, even over rockier terrains. 

Available in three tones, there are two adjustable hooks, loop straps, and clasps across the toes and over the front of the foot, so I felt very secure during my walks. Although they provide minimal toe protection, there is plenty of grip on the inner sole and traction grip on the outer sole. They have also been made with waterside activities in mind, which I found incredibly useful when walking on changeable terrain. 

I felt I could walk and walk in these sandals, so they are a great choice for longer hikes or lengthy city walks. On one of my trips, I was out for three hours, which included a pretty steep hilly incline (and descent) but there was no sign of rubbing. At £100, these are one of the more expensive hiking sandal options, but loyal customers will rave about how durable they are, how long they last, and ultimately how wonderfully comfortable they are, so you can think of them as investment footwear.

The best hiking sandal for city walks

Regatta Haris Women's Hiking Sandals

(Image credit: Regatta)

7. Regatta Haris Lightweight Sandals

Best hiking sandal for city walks

Size range: 3-8 | Weight per sandal: 219g | Materials: Synthetic leather and spandex fabric | Sole: Thermoplastic rubber (TPR) moulded outsole

Lightweight, adjustable and cushioned
Versatile style, so great for everyday 
Plenty of grip 
Only tonal options available
More suitable for city hikes

If you are looking for versatile hiking sandals that can provide support on an everyday basis, then the Regatta Haris Lightweight Sandal ticks a lot of boxes in my book. These hiking sandals are not as cumbersome as some hiking sandals that I've tried, and the three Velcro straps (behind the ankle, across the toes and the widest width of the foot) make it easy to slip on and adjust the shoe as needed.

True to size, they fit like a dream thanks to the cushioning and shock-absorbing layer under foot, and that remains my experience from wandering in the local park and supermarket to doing a 90-minute walk around a reservoir. The top of the sandal is raised a little, which provides more protection and means you are less likely to stub your toes - much like the Teva sandals, our top pick. There is also plenty of grip on the sole, so you feel secure on the move. 

Functionality should always trump fashion where hiking sandals are concerned - especially as you can pair them with a pair of the best running shorts or workout leggings to complete the look - but the tonal hues and floral design mean these sandals will comfortably take you from a day of walking to a terrace bar for summer drinks, and they won’t look out of place. Although they great all-rounders, I personally think these are more suitable for weekend walks and sightseeing than long hikes. 

The best Hoka hiking sandal

Hoka Hopara hiking sandals

(Image credit: Hoka)

8. Hoka Hopara

Best Hoka hiking sandal

Size range: 4.5 - 13.5 | Weight per sandal: 340g | Materials: Synthetic upper and neoprene collar | Sole: Vibram Megagrip rubber outsole

Makes a statement
Very supportive 
Plenty of grip for rockier terrains
Much heavier than other sandals
Most expensive sandal on the list

Another shandal to add to the mix is Hoka’s super stylish Hopara - a closed toe option that provides the protection of a shoe with the breathability of a sandal. It should be noted, these are the most expensive option in this round-up at £105, but as you would hope at that price, you can expect to wear and wear this footwear and feel assured doing so.  

Sold as a ‘true outdoor explorer,’ these have been created for tackling all terrains and to provide comfort whatever the weather throws at you - thankfully, as I got caught in the rain several times while testing these out. They felt snug around the heel and midfoot when I was walking, offering great support but not feeling too tight. The material also provides flexibility for your foot so you can move with even the most unstable terrain, without losing confidence in your ankles. I've tested many hiking boots and shoes over the last few years and even the most highly-rated of these sometimes fail to deliver on this, so I was very impressed.

Instead of adjustable straps, there is a quick lace system, which you pull to adjust and can then niftily tuck the lace away. Much like the Keen hiking sandals, this makes the design look much more streamlined and mature than some of the other sandals out there with velcro support. There is also plenty of cushioning due to the rubberised EVA midsole, as well as a substantial toe cap to keep your toes well protected.

Admittedly, these are not the most understated footwear and they might be a little too bulky for some people, but they are available in a range of colours and an impressively inclusive array of sizes. Expect compliments when you are on the move too, as these can prove quite the talking point when you are out and about.

Hoka is a top-rated hiking brand around the world and, much like Merrell, we love it's selection of hiking attire here at woman&home. Health Editor Grace Walsh has several pairs of the best running shoes and hiking boots from Hoka, each pair offering comfort and incredible support with every step. 

The best sustainable hiking sandals

Wildsole Ultra hiking sandals

(Image credit: Wildsole)

9. Wildsole Mamtor Sandal

Best sustainable hiking sandals

Size range: 3-14 | Weight per sandal: 100g | Materials: Nylon tubular webbing straps and polypropylene tubular webbing | Sole: Vibram rubber soles

Sustainably made
Very lightweight
Suitable for various terrains
Largest size range on the list
Not as comfortable as other options
Lack some protective features

 The Wildsole Mamtor Sandals might be minimalist - but don’t underestimate them. They are multi-functional sandals designed to be worn in all elements and on all terrains. Made in Yorkshire, the owners wanted to create the UK’s first barefoot sandals, rather than ship them in from the States to reduce air missiles and associated emissions. There are now seven unisex models, including the Mamtor, which I tried.

To be honest, it is the first time I have tried barefoot shoes of any kind so I was intrigued to know what they would feel like. So far, after just a couple of walks, I'm impressed. The simple strap sits between your toes (like a flip-flop) and stretches behind your ankle. It can be adjusted if needed. As your toes are not constrained, they can move freely and spread naturally as you walk, which is the benefit of such minimal support.

Though you can technically run and jump in these flexible sandals, it's not something I've tried yet, so can't comment on their durability across more vigorous types of exercise. I have spent an entire day walking in them, however, and it's been something of a revelation. On a summer’s walk, it feels incredible to be barefoot but safe in the knowledge your soles are protected from whatever might be on the ground. And as they are so light, you can easily stow them in your rucksack when heading out on adventures or as an alternative shoe on holiday. 

I wouldn't recommend them for any seriously long hikes or walks across any hazardous terrains. As you can probably guess by their appearance, they are better suited to beach and city walks - provided there's little debris on the pavements - and best paired with a pair of black gym leggings, perhaps. For anything more than a walk, I'd suggest an alternative option like the Merrell Kahuna III or the Teva Terra Fi 5 Universal.

How we tested the best hiking sandals for women

Susan Griffin hiking across three picture panels, including in summer and in autumn

Susan Griffin is a keen hiker and outdoor enthusiast and tested the hiking sandals in our round up. (Image credit: Future / Susan Griffin)

As a keen hiker, an outdoor enthusiast, and a journalist, I combine my personal and professional interests by trialling products and speaking to industry experts for their insights. For this review, I consulted outdoor professionals on what factors to consider when looking for a first-rate pair of hiking sandals.

Then, I wore each pair of hiking sandals for two walks minimum. The first was a shorter distance, sometimes-early-morning walk to get my initial impressions of the hiking sandals, and the second for a minimum of an hour, often longer, across varied terrain, whether woodland, grass, gravel, tarmac and on occasion through water, too. 

I reviewed each pair with the expert’s advice in mind including my recommendations: 

  • Comfort: When you are out walking and hiking, it is essential your feet feel as comfortable as possible. I noted how comfortable they were at all stages, from the initial try-on to how my feet felt at the end of a walk, including breathability, slippage and any rubbing.
  • Support: Support is essential when buying hiking sandals, so when reviewing the hiking sandals, I considered the sturdiness of the straps, the inner sole and outer sole, including the type of grip offered, and whether there was arch support, too.
  • Materials: Hiking sandals need to be breathable, fast-drying and durable, so I considered the types of fabric (whether synthetic, mesh or leather etc) and how they felt during each walk.
  • Versatility: I wore these hiking sandals on various types of terrain, including pavement, grass, hills and moorland, evaluating how they adapted to the setting, whether they were strictly hiking sandals or could be worn every day, and how easy they were to put on and take off.
  • RRP: As with any outdoor wear, prices for hiking sandals can vary as much as the styles on offer. I took this into consideration when reviewing the hiking sandals, ensuring a wide range of price points were included.
  • Additional details: I have highlighted whether the hiking sandals have any additional details worth noting, for example unique styles and colourways or particularly inclusive sizing.

How to choose the best hiking sandals for you

  • Think about the terrain and distance: "Ensure you choose an appropriate sandal. Do you need sandals for simple terrains, like grass and beach hikes or multi-day long-distance hikes? I don’t wear sandals when hiking over more complex terrain like rocky mountains,” says Carla Khouri, a qualified outdoor instructor and community lead at Merrell Hiking Club.
  • Consider cushioning: “If you are walking longer distances you may want to consider a more cushioned sole, although these can be a little heavier than a non-cushioned sole,” says Khouri.
  • Think about your toes: “If you choose an open-toe sandal, look for a slightly raised area at the front, which will help to protect your toes against rocks and roots. Closed-toed sandals offer more protection and will help prevent small pebbles, twigs, etc, from getting under your foot,” adds Khouri.
  • Focus on functionality over fashion: "Look out for practical materials – either fast-drying synthetics or waterproof leather,” says Steve Davies, the purchasing and commercial manager for Trekitt. "If you are likely getting wet (rivers, beaches, rain), look at materials like neoprene. Some fabric straps are lined with neoprene so that your foot is still held in place even when wet," adds Khouri.
  • Check the sole for grip: "We always advise looking for sandals with a proper hiking sole. When choosing a pair, easy things to look for are the contouring of the sole and whether it offers any arch support around the midfoot. Also underneath, whether it has plenty of tread to ensure the sandals provide good grip on slippery surfaces," says Davies.
  • Socks or no socks: "Wearing socks can reduce the risk of any straps rubbing and causing blisters. They also protect a little more against insects or debris on the path. It might be worth wearing the sandals with socks around the house until you’re confident you’ve broken them in fully,” says Davies. “However, socks limit the breathability of hiking sandals, and if you’re walking near water, they can get wet and dry slowly, which can often cause blisters or rubbing.”

How should hiking sandals fit?

When trying on hiking sandals, the best plan is to have your feet expertly measured. If this is not an option for you or you're looking to buy online, make sure you measure your feet and check these measurements against the size guide given online as sizes and fits vary between brands, says Davies.

"When trying them on, you want the sandals to fit snugly but not with any pressure points or tight areas. Most models will have adjustable straps, so we advise tweaking these to achieve the right fit and then try walking around on a carpeted area to make sure they feel comfortable," he says. 

"Make sure your heel isn’t lifting at the back of the sandal and that you have plenty of room for your toes at the front. Your toes shouldn’t be right to the edge of the sandal as this reduces how protected they are," he says. 

There also should not be any side-to-side movement of your foot, says Khouri. "Your foot should not slide forward or backward when walking on a slope. Also, look for reviews to find out about a sandal's real-life performance and whether a model is true to size. Also, look at the retailer's return policy so you can replace them if they are not right for you." 

Hiking sandals vs hiking boots

"Unlike a standard sandal or flip-flop, a hiking sandal will be optimised to offer excellent underfoot comfort and greater stability, so they are a really good choice if you’re walking off-road. For more technical terrain or routes that take you into the hills and mountains, we would always recommend wearing a walking shoe or hiking boot which provides greater cushioning underfoot and offers increased protection from scree and loose rock,” says Davies. 

"If you are carrying a heavy backpack (going rucking, for example, or using a weighted vest for walking), hiking sandals will not be suitable and you should ideally choose a higher cut boot that provides maximum stability and ankle protection. You can always take your hiking sandals with you on overnight treks though, they are great for giving feet a rest from your boots while relaxing at camp."

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/health-wellbeing/best-hiking-sandals/ qfKUwA7MmRHEzdR6XPop5W Sat, 13 Jul 2024 13:00:37 +0000
<![CDATA[ Most comfortable trainers for women: tried and tested ]]> If trainers are your go-to footwear, having a pair of the most comfortable trainers is key. And I'm not just talking about a bit of extra padding or cushioning here - wearing trainers all day long and all year round means I require footwear that has comfort at the forefront of its design. But that doesn't mean I want to compromise on style.

Thankfully, there's a plethora of stylish and comfortable trainers available now. And between us here at woman&home, we've tested a fair few of them. From running errands to travelling, we put the top trainers to the test over the last few months, with various team members trying our picks to ensure we had different sizes, tastes and problem areas accounted for. There are brands we constantly come back to as our favourites for comfort and style – many of which you'll find in our list of the best white trainers too.

The good news is our six favourites will keep your feet comfortable all day, and they'll look good while doing so. From the five-star rated FitFlop sneakers to the fashion trainers you're seeing everywhere at the moment, scroll down for the most comfortable trainers for women, as voted for by a range of testers on the w&h team.

Our top 3 deals

Skechers Women's Summits Artistry Chic Sneaker: was £59.99, now £41.99 (save £18)

These trainers are some of the most supportive high street trainers on the market. Their cushioned insole makes wearing them a dream. View Deal

Superga Cotu Classic Trainers at Amazon: was £50, from £32.96 (save £20.75)

These are such a good all-rounder. The canvas material means you can chuck them in the washing machine, and they'll go with everything. View Deal

Fitflop Rally Trainers at Amazon: was £90, from £37.61 (save £50.40)

These also came out on top for wide feet in our testing, so you'll get two for the price of one with these beauties. View Deal

The quick list

Most comfortable trainers for women: tried and tested

Most comfortable trainers: best for everyday

Header image two photos side by side of superga trainers

(Image credit: Molly Smith)

1. Superga 2750 Cotu Classic White

Best everyday trainers

Price: RRP £65 | Size range: UK 2.5 - 13.5 | Fastening: Lace up | Upper/sole material: Pure cotton upper with rubber sole

Classic design
Easy to style
Quality canvas material
No rubbing
Affordable
No padded insole

Our tester for these was woman&home Fashion Writer Molly, and her feedback was that these are some of the best trainers she's tried. They combine comfort with a classic minimalist feel that has plenty of versatile styling options, making them a must-have staple. From the best wide leg jeans to a midi dress and cardigan, they go with almost anything and are perfect for keeping your feet and ankles supported and comfortable.

What drew us to these trainers was their cool, classic design, which mimics an iconic canvas tennis shoe. Not only do they go with a multitude of outfits, they can easily transition between the seasons. In the warmer months, their canvas material makes them ideal for styling with dresses and skirts; however, in the winter, they will look just as good with barrel leg jeans and a knitted jumper or your favourite cosy coat.

As someone who is prone to blisters, Molly expected some rubbing, but they felt light and super comfortable all day long with no rubbing at all. She barely noticed the trainers on my feet - they were simply there and didn't give her any hassle. She wore them for running errands around the city and for busy morning commutes, and even whilst travelling abroad. They truly exceeded all expectations. And although they don't have a padded insole like other more sporty trainer brands, they offer more than enough support for everyday wear.

For cleaning and care you can also machine wash the Cotu Classic trainer, adding to the list of reasons you should buy this style. Another standout feature is they are a lot more affordable than leather trainers, yet you don't have to sacrifice style or comfort.

You can read more in the full Superga 2750 Cotu Classic Canvas Review

Most comfortable trainers: best for wide feet

Fitflop trainers side by side on a wooden table

(Image credit: Future)

2. FitFlop Rally Leather Trainers

Best for wide feet

Price: RRP £100 | Size range : UK 3-9 (including half sizes) | Fastening: Lace up | Upper/sole material: Suede/leather upper and rubber sole

Stylish
Lightweight
Very comfortable
Scotchguard protected

Our tester, Content Director at Future, Lucy Searle, is a seasoned trainer fan who wears them all day long, and needed an all-rounder style that would see her through a day at work, dog walks and evenings out.

She said the Rally was her first foray into the world of FitFlop's trainers, after years of being a fan of the brand's sandals. After initial concerns that they might look a little heavy, she was pleasantly surprised by the streamlined look and sleek suede panels.

She did twenty thousand steps in them at the Chelsea Flower Show, and found them to be incredibly lightweight. She has mild plantar fasciitis in both feet and potentially arthritis, but she said: "wearing them felt a little like walking on a springy memory foam, which meant that at the end of the very long day, my feet felt nowhere near as achy as usual. For me that’s the biggest sell."

They're great for wide feet, scuffs came out with a damp cloth, so they're easy to keep looking clean and fresh.

You can read more in the full FitFlop Rally trainers review

Most comfortable trainers: best fashion trainers

Black and white Adidas Samba trainers being worn, photos taken from the front and side

(Image credit: Future)

3. Adidas Sambas

Best fashion trainers

Price : RRP £95 | Size range: UK 2.5 - 10.5 | Fastening: Lace-up | Upper/sole material: Leather, suede, gum rubber

Stylish
Versatile
High quality/durable
Comfortable
Half sizes available
No padded insole
Mixed textures trickier to clean

woman&home Editor Kerrie Hughes was sceptical about the Samba at first. They're everywhere at the moment, so surely it's a case over style over substance, right? Wrong.

She says "I bought my Sambas back in January this year, and have worn them almost daily ever since - without a single blister. They are the most versatile trainer I own, working with everything from casual joggers and jeans, to more formal workwear in the office."

She found them to be comfortable immediately after buying them, which is perhaps testament to their seventy-something-year history, and their start as a style to play football in. They're lightweight with a flexible gum sole that offers plenty of cushioning and grip.

The instantly-recognisable three stripes and retro charm of the Samba is undeniable, but Kerrie was really impressed with how they manage to be both casual and chic, noting that the mix of materials elevates them.

This does, however, make cleaning them a bit tricky. But with a shoe protector spray and a suede brush, they'll go the distance. They might not be the cheapest pair on our list of finalists, but they will go with every single outfit and are available in a rainbow of colours, so the cost per wear is worth it.

You can find out more in the full adidas Samba review

Most comfortable trainers: best overall

Image of wearing Skecher trainers

(Image credit: Molly Smith)

4. Women's Summits Artistry Chic Sneaker

Best overall

Price: RRP £59.99 | Size range: UK 2-10 | Fastening: Slip on | Upper/sole material: Mesh material with rubber sole

Memory foam cushioned insole
Slip-on design
Shock absorbing
Comfortable & practical
Handwash only

If you’re looking for plush trainers with an insole, these are the perfect pair for you. After trying this style, woman&home's Fashion Writer Molly now understand why Skechers has such a good reputation for designing comfortable trainers.

The first thing that struck her was the cushioned memory foam insoles, offering a true respite from the traditional flat, and often quite uncomfortable, high street trainers. The memory foam immediately moulded to the bottom of Molly's feet, offering excellent support and comfort.

They didn’t feel too bulky or heavy, with a light and comfortable design that is extremely wearable and practical. She wore them on morning park walks, running errands and for weekend coffee dates, and can confidently say these are some of the most comfortable trainers she's ever worn. Another bonus was the slip-on design, meaning there are no laces, making them extremely easy to put on and take off, this is especially handy if you have a busy schedule or mobility issues.

Style-wise, they have a sporty-ish feel, however, they do pair well with laidback everyday outfits, such as denim jeans or wide leg tailored trousers. Their minimalist, sleek design makes them appropriate enough to wear to work and for weekend outings too. We opted for the navy colour, although if you prefer brighter shades they offer plenty of more vibrant other options too.

For cleaning and care, they are hand wash only, so require cleaning with a damp cloth and soap.

Skechers Summits are an excellent pick for anyone who wants a pair of trainers that are supportive and comfortable if you’re always on the move and don’t want to sacrifice looking good.

Read our review in full here: Skechers Summits review

Most comfortable trainers: best for dresses

Two side by side images wearing Veja Volley trainers

(Image credit: Molly Smith)

5. VEJA Women's Volley Trainers

Best for dresses

Price: From £110 | Size range: UK 3-8 | Fastening: Lace up | Upper/sole material: : Organic traced leather

Iconic design
Sustainable
Easy to style
Comfortable for all-day wear
No padded insole

The Veja Volley trainers perfectly combine comfort and practicality with style and design. Few brands have been able to do this, but Veja seems to consistently succeed, and they're made with sustainability in mind too. No wonder Kate Middleton's a fan!

In terms of comfort, the Veja Volley is lightweight and comfy for wearing all day, and although the insoles aren't plush or bouncy, they still offer a supportive feel. From wearing them to park walks to busy commutes, these were an excellent choice for Molly, ensuring her feet were supported and blister-free. The leather panels are soft and supple, which makes these easy to wear and perfect for those who are blister-prone. Another winning factor was that there was no breaking-in period; as soon as she put these trainers on they were ready to wear. The leather exterior makes them easy to wipe clean too, although, I would recommend a protective spray for the suede panels.

In terms of style, these trainers nod to the volleyball shoes from 1970s Brazil, making them a vintage-inspired design with a modern twist that is effortlessly chic. These are a brilliant option if you’ve been on the hunt for a practical trainer that will add a luxe, elevated touch to your daytime looks. What makes these standout is that they look effortlessly cool with dresses and skirts as well as trousers or jeans. Finish off a smart office outfit or a special occasion look with these Volley trainers and they won’t disappoint.

Overall, they might not have a cushioned insole, but they offer a supportive, fuss-free fit that's sleek enough to wear with any dress.

You can find out more in the full Veja Volley review

Most comfortable trainers: best platform

Caroline Parr wearing Air & Grace trainers, the trainers next to their box

(Image credit: Future)

6. Air & Grace Sadie Platform Trainers

Best platform

Price: £189 | Size: UK 3-9.5 | Fastening: Lace up | Upper/sole material: Leather upper and lining, 4cm platform rubber sole

Premium feel
Padding at the ankle and heel makes them very comfortable
Smarter than other trainers
Platform soles can feel heavy
Quite pricey

I tested these trainers myself, and as a platform trainer novice, my hopes weren't as high as the sole. How wrong I was!

For me the benefit of these trainers is how elevated they feel. No pun intended. First of the packaging feels really premium, and unboxing them felt like such a treat. I immediately did what you're definitely not supposed to do in brand new trainers: walk a mile. The platform sole took a few minutes to get used to, but when my feet because accustomed to it I completely forgot about the chunky sole.

They felt a lot smarter than some of my other trainers. I'm very used to trying to find somewhere to subtly swap my trainers for shoes ahead of an evening out, but I wore these to a dinner and they felt as fancy as I wanted them to. I wore them with a pair of wide leg trousers and they had a very flattering, elongating effect.

You can really feel the cushioning beneath your ankle and at the heel, which makes them incredibly comfortable and they were much lighter than I expected. Certainly the sole isn't as flexible as a thinner sole, but if it's a platform style you're after these are a great option.

I would say they are a little on the smaller side so personally I'd say go up a size. They feel very premium, and I love the perforated A detailing on the side. Minor marks have come off easily with a damp cloth and weeks later they still look really fresh.

Read more in the full Air & Grace Sadie platform trainers review

How we tested

Finding a pair of trainers that fits you perfectly and offers all-day comfort is a tricky task. It can depend on so many different factors and personal choice, so we made sure to ask several members of the team to test a variety of styles, so we could have a broad range of voices to help narrow things down.

Alongside price and brand, these are the main factors we considered when testing:

  • Comfort and support: this was of course the biggest factor. We road tested each style to see how well they performed during everyday tasks like a day at work or a walk in the park. Blisters were of course a no, but we also asked how lightweight they felt, how cushioned they felt and whether they seemed true to size.
  • Style: If you're going to be wearing these trainers every day, you want them to look good. And work with a wide variety of outfits, too. We thought about colour, quality of fabrics and how you might want them to look and feel. Retro trainers are a huge trend right now, which led us to styles like the adidas Samba and the Veja Volley, but for others, a classic style like the Supergas will age well.
  • Cleaning and care: for me this is a big consideration. Everyday trainers will inevitably lead to wear and tear, so it's important to think about how much maintenance each style will need. The Supergas are machine washable, whilst a pair with a mix of suede and leather will need protector spray and a suede brush.

For a more detailed look at the process of whittling down the most comfortable trainers on the market, read our detailed guide on how we test trainers.

How to choose

There's a lot to think about when buying trainers. Unlike picking a lot of your wardrobe, shoes is a lot like trying to find the best bras - finding the right size is crucial, and there's so many elements and features to choose between. Our best advice? When picking the right pair of trainers for you, it's worth factoring in the following:

  • Price: how much do you want to spend? How much wear will you get out of them? I used to spend less on trainers, but buy more. However, now I see the value in spending more money and looking after one pair and having them on rotation in my capsule wardrobe.
  • Size: this is something you have to get right. Shoes that are too or small can lead to bisters and ingrown toenails, but you can of course add an insole if they are a little on the roomy side. When trying on trainers, there should be a bit of wiggle room around the toes, and you should be able to fit a finger down the back between your heel and the shoe. Think about what socks you're likely to wear too. A thin trainer sock will feel very different to a thick sports sock. Check the returns policy when buying online so it gives you breathing room to try on trainers, and walk around at home to see how well they fit before you make up your mind.
  • Extra support: it's worth asking yourself what you need from your trainers. If you're on your feet or walking around all day then a plush insole would be helpful. Or if you're only walking to your car and around an office, you can get away with a less sturdy sole.
  • Colour: what will you be wearing your trainers with? It's so easy to fall into a white trainers trap, but black looks incredibly sleek, and darker colours like navy are more practical. Or a pop of your favourite colour can be really fun! Think about how they will fit into your everyday style, and how much of the shoe you'll be able to actually see if you're wearing them with wide leg trousers, for example.

FAQs

What brand has the most comfortable trainers?

We asked celebrity stylist Martine Alexander where she stands on the most comfortable trainers debate. She told us: "for me, the brand that is the most comfortable trainer - and I’m talking as a personal stylist and celebrity stylist for 19 years - I would say Air & Grace. A couple of my clients have arthritis and bunions and the Tender Loving Air footbed works a treat for them. It cushions the foot and it’s also a stylish trainer.

"They have the technology within the shoe to make it so comfortable and they’ve patented it. If you want a classic white trainer that will go with midi dresses and an ankle-grazer jean or a pair of wide-leg trousers, you’ve got the platform Sadie, which is super stylish, it goes with everything."

What trainers are good for your feet?

Martine explains: "some people when they buy a trainer will take the insole that comes with the shoe out and put their own insole in. It’s all about maintaining the natural arch of the foot, it’s making sure that isn’t flattened, so if the insole doesn’t have an arch in it, it will flatten the foot as you walk which can cause foot pain, heel pain and leg pain.

"Air & Grace have the memory foam. Adidas do have an insole built in which has a raised arch which will keep the natural shape of the foot, so they’re great. FitFlop do exactly the same.

"Skechers have a trainer that’s great for wide feet, and they also have slip-on styles so you don’t have to bend over to do the laces. They still look stylish but they’re easy to get on and still look contemporary."

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/fashion/comfortable-trainers/ zxaMbzbMpFxoYKXuwWTC9f Fri, 12 Jul 2024 20:34:50 +0000
<![CDATA[ Where to buy plants online: the best retailers for adding greenery to your growing collection ]]> When it comes to adding to your plant collection, you want to know you've sourced your chosen species from the very best places. This is why we found the most highly recommended plant shops online to purchase directly from your sofa.

If you're looking to add more of the best indoor plants for your health and well-being to your home you may think you need to take a trip to the garden centre. And whilst we recommend shopping small, sometimes getting there isn't possible which is where trusted high-quality online plant shops come in. 

Whether they're trusted names or plant-specific shops you haven't heard of before, we scouted out only the best online retailers offering some of the most stunning plant life. 

No matter your budget, style or plant preference these brands have something for everyone and we might just have to purchase something ourselves. 

The best places to buy plants online 

Surrounding yourself with houseplants and outdoor greenery is extremely beneficial for several reasons. Whether you're looking for fragrant plants to make your house smell good or need some houseplants that help with condensation, it's never been easier to buy them online. 

Creating your dream leafy paradise is quite literally now just at the click of a button. But with that ease, there's a risk, a risk that you could be buying a dying plant or that it could be delivered half destroyed. That's why we did the research and put together a list of brands that will only supply the healthiest species delivered safely to your door, no panic needed. 

1. B&Q

Kitchen counter with plants

(Image credit: Future)

Whilst you may know B&Q more commonly for their hardware and DIY items, they have a brilliant selection of houseplants and accessories. They even launched a recycling scheme for plant pots that started in May, so that gives them extra points for sustainability practices too. 

Not every single plant on their website is available for home delivery which can be frustrating if you're looking for a particular species, however, they have so much choice that you're sure to find a replacement you'll be happy with. On the other hand, they have some species on the site that are exclusively online and can't be found in stores, so that's an advantage. 

And it's not just houseplants, they also offer garden plants too which is perfect if you're too busy with your zen garden ideas to nip to the shop. 

Each plant has an in-depth product information section on the site so you can learn everything you need to about your possible new addition. They also provide care instructions within that, so even after buying you can refer back for help to keep your plant happy. 

Prices definitely vary as they have anything from succulents to rare houseplants like their Monstera Thai Constellation. Overall, the prices are surprisingly affordable for a large retailer like this and their delivery is consistently reliable across varying-sized plants. 

2. Marks & Spencer

Living room with window seat surrounded by plants

(Image credit: Future | Tim Young)

That's right, it's not just a place to get sensational bras and linen trousers! Marks and Spencer offer some stunning plants and their branded flare isn't missing from their selection either. We love M&S for plant gifts as they have some well-presented, high-quality orchids and baskets available. 

If you're looking for something more than a singular plant or even feel like you're up to the challenge of caring for an orchid, M&S is the one for you. Each plant comes in a super chic, suits-any-home pot or basket too which saves you spending any more money on added accessories. 

With prices starting at £20, their selection is a little more expensive but it's because of the impressive presentation. Their well-groomed plants are picture-perfect and there are even some species where you have the choice to decide what pot you'd like it to come in. So if you're into your dopamine decor and don't love the minimaluxe vibe of a white pot, you can change things up.

We've picked out a few favourites from their selection, which isn't huge but still an all-rounder. The foliage planter is one of our favourites, the mix of so many different plants is so unique and although it would make a fabulous gift, your home deserves it too. 

3. Bloom and Wild

houseplants

(Image credit: Bloom & Wild )

Known for having one of the best flower delivery services in the UK thanks to their fantastic selection of flowers that come in letterbox-sized packaging, Bloom & Wild also sells houseplants and offers the same level of service and wide variety in their plant delivery service.

Bloom & Wild specialise in smaller houseplants that will give your living room a vibrant uplift when placed on a side table, desk or windowsill, rather than large and tall plants that can fill an empty corner. 

We found the plants from Bloom & Wild to be slightly more expensive than similar products at other online retailers, but their attractive, colourful pots are included in the price - we just wish you had the option to mix and match the plant you wanted with the pot that would most suit your interior paint colour scheme. 

For gifting, this online plant seller comes out on top. You can select a specific date to have your plant delivered, making it ideal for birthday or Mother's and Father's Day surprises.

4. John Lewis & Partners

table with houseplants

(Image credit: Future | Tim Young)

John Lewis has some gorgeous houseplants to shop on their website and what they offer that lots of other online plant retailers don't is the option to buy plants or succulents in bundles.

Buying a small set of plants or succulents is a great way to refresh your existing collection at home, or start building a new one. 

Each plant bundle comes complete with stylish planters and is named according to what the set is best suited for - whether that be a certain room of the house such as the 'bathroom plants' bundle, or a function in the home like air purifying. These are great plants for the kitchen to help with smells and residual smoke. 

The added benefit of shopping from a large online retailer such as John Lewis is that delivery is free and you can also get any other pots or plant care accessories at the same time - from houseplant feed to beautifying leaf spray. 

5. Patch Plants

houseplants

(Image credit: Patch Plants )

Fairly new on the scene, Patch Plants was founded in 2016 and continued to grow and grow over the years. It not only offers some of the most unique species available but it also does so in an extremely accessible and fun way. For instance, they name every plant with a very charming human name and we couldn't love it more. 

Their mission is to make plant care easier and this can be seen immediately with their individual care guides on each product. They even have plant doctors available to chat with on their site if you're ever left wondering why your peace lily has started drooping

Another thing that sets them apart from other retailers is their guaranteed quality. They source their plants from top-rated growers and make sure to quality-check them at every stage until they arrive at your door. We also appreciated their 30-day policy which says you can get a replacement or refund if you're not 100% happy with your plant within the month. 

The prices of the plants vary on what size you want and what pot you'd like it to come in. And whilst the choice makes the shopping experience so much easier, it's clear to see why they're a little more on the expensive side than say B&Q are. Outdoor plants are also available on the site, so nothing is stopping you from trying out some cottage garden ideas

6. The Stem

metal trolley with terrarium and  potted houseplants

(Image credit: Future | Photography Catherine Gratwicke)

The Stem is one of the best places to buy plants online for both your home and garden, with a wide variety of houseplants, shrubs, seeds and bulbs that you can buy on their own or in a beautiful pot to complete the look.

You can search for plants using a variety of different, helpful criteria: ease of care, light needs, pet-friendly plants and more. Then, when you click on a plant you're interested in, you are given additional information as to where in your home the houseplant would have the best chance of thriving. This means the chances of you making any common houseplant mistakes are very slim. 

Each delivered plant comes with a handy 'plant care tips' card with a QR code. When scanned, it gives you access to a range of guides on Stem’s website covering everything from how much sunlight your house plant needs, to how to repot it once it outgrows its first tub.

7. RHS plants

various houseplants

(Image credit: RHS )

What better place to buy plants from than the Royal Horticultural Society? They're the UK's leading gardening charity and their online shop truly has it all. From planting trees or shrubs in your garden to creating a home filled with houseplants, the RHS are here to help. 

They have a huge selection of both indoor and outdoor plants to choose from with various options of sizes, pots and colours. Some of their species, especially their orchid selections are UK-grown so they have complete control over the quality and the reduced transportation is an added bonus too. 

When it comes to price, we'd say they're affordable considering the high-quality products and their accreditations as plant sellers. Their snake plant has an RHS award of garden merit and is available in two sizes with prices from £16.99 to £118.99, so they certainly aren't the most budget option. 

Their delivery costs also vary depending on the size of the plant and how many you're purchasing within one order, but again it's rather reasonable as they take extra care when delivering and packaging your plants. They even have guarantees on plants which means should the item die from causes, not of your doing they'll troubleshoot and refund or replace it for you. 

FAQs

What things should you look out for when buying plants online?

Although on the whole positive, there are some things you'll want to keep in mind when shopping for plants online. There are a few pitfalls that could mean you end up with a sub-par product or not the one you intended to get. 

"When buying plants online, you need to consider the reliability of the seller and the quality of their plants, while also taking into account their shipping methods and return policies," says Georgina O'Grady, managing director at Evergreen Direct. "Keep an eye out for detailed product descriptions, photos and customer reviews to ensure you're making a well-informed decision."

She also recommends checking for guarantees or warranties on plant health so you don't end up stuck with a plant that gets a disease or wilts way before it should have. 

What are the benefits of buying plants online?

As mentioned previously, various reasons why buying plants online is better than shopping in person. Even when you don't know the first thing about how to care for indoor and outdoor plants, shopping online can make the whole journey that much easier.

"Speaking from experience, I've found online plant shopping to be incredibly convenient, with much more choice than in-store plant shopping," explains Georgina. "It also gives you the breathing room to conduct your own independent research and compare prices. Many of these sites even provide professional care tips, making it easier for beginners to nurture their plants." 


So now nothing is stopping you from curating a plant collection to be proud of. And with help from you're online research, who knows, you could be a professional in caring for a bonsai tree in no time.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/where-to-buy-plants-online-an-expert-guide/ AdqDNaEs4JJQCdB7rX5h7a Mon, 08 Jul 2024 12:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ The Net-A-Porter sale: 12 summer wardrobe must-haves not to be missed ]]> When it comes to designer brands, Net-A-Porter is the best in the business. It's a treasure trove for everything from shoes to jewellery, and stocks a plethora of luxury labels like Hunza G, SKIMS, Lululemon, Ganni and Erdem.

If you're shopping for your summer capsule wardrobe, we've got good news for you. The Net-A-Porter sale has just started, and whilst very often with sales you have to be prepared to shop out of season, this one is full of summer essentials like Hunza G swimsuits, Birkenstock sandals and beach-ready bags.

We've scoured the virtual sale rails so you don't have to, and have rounded up the 12 discounted items that you won't want to miss out on. Prices start from just £21, but our list does includes some of the best designer bags too, so get your credit card at the ready...

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/fashion/net-a-porter-sale/ Rd3X2T8faYS2DwhTcuTzAJ Mon, 03 Jun 2024 12:05:33 +0000
<![CDATA[ 5 award-winning hair products, given special recognition by our panel of expert judges ]]> Consider this the hair hall of fame. A round-up of five award-winning hair products given special recognition by our expert team of judges. 

When a brand does something special, we think it's well worth shouting about and all of these companies are doing seriously impressive things in the hair industry. Our judges have tried hundreds of products for our 2024 hair awards and these five products were all awarded with our special recognition award. 

Featuring everything from a smoothing silk hair wrap, one of the best shampoo bars, on the market, some treatments for damaged hair and one of the best shampoo buys with a vegan formula, we have something for everyone in our special recognition section. So, take a look through these hero hair products, all totally worthy of our special recognition stamp. 

5 AWARD-WINNING HAIR PRODUCTS AS TESTED BY OUR EXPERT JUDGES

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/hair/special-recognition-hair-products/ GuoErLnUYfRRayXki2ZQVB Mon, 06 May 2024 11:00:49 +0000
<![CDATA[ 6 Jo Loves perfumes our team swears by for an expensive impression - for under £80 ]]> With all the tells of a luxury scent but minus the more premium price point, these Jo Loves perfumes were made for those who want to smell expensive, without actually costing the earth to do so...

When it comes to selecting one of the best long-lasting perfumes, it's a common misconception that price equates to quality. While there are, of course, iconic and high-end brands whose signature fragrances are worth every penny, there are also a plethora of best cheap perfumes and mid-range scents that smell deceptively expensive, without treading into three-digit territory. One such brand is Jo Loves, whose chic and infinitely sophisticated blends have become one of the worst-kept scent secrets amongst woman&home's beauty team.

So, if you're in the market for a new, everyday scent or perhaps a transitional season fragrance, these are the six, underrated Jo Loves perfumes we cannot stop recommending...

The 6 niche and underrated Jo Loves scents that we also *love*

Founded by Jo Malone CBE, the creator of Jo Malone London - whose in-house scents are not only counted among the best perfumes for women - Jo Loves offers a lineup of elegant and minimalistic scents that are infinitely wearable. And these are the six, specifically, that our beauty experts adore...

It's also worth noting that many of the Jo Loves scents are available in body lotion, shower gel and bath cologne variations - which are ideal for perfume layering - as well as candles and of course, the famous fragrance paintbrush.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/best-jo-loves-perfumes/ 5VtrNouYaxosUW9CYFYWFE Sun, 05 May 2024 06:01:53 +0000
<![CDATA[ 7 award-winning hair treatments, picked by our panel of expert judges ]]> Our hair goes through it all. Excessive heat styling, bleach burnout, wind-whipping weather, and general neglect. 

The best hair masks and treatments for damaged hair come to the rescue of stressed strands. Fast-tracking you to healthy, happy hair after just a few uses, they work hard to strengthen, nourish, add shine and smooth. We all have different hair types and needs, so these award-winning hair treatments are suitable for all textures, and for every tress distress. 

No matter what your hair issue is, this round-up of impressive hair treatments has been rigorously tested by our expert judging panel for being suitable for all hair types and to have benefits like smoothing, hydrating, strengthening, repairing and more. 

7 AWARD-WINNING HAIR TREATMENTS FOR EVERY HAIR TYPE

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/hair/best-hair-treatment/ hgXYvDpD8XjF9Qa49ENubf Wed, 01 May 2024 10:43:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ The 15 best shampoos for Afro hair for a delicate and nourishing wash ]]> Shopping for the best shampoo for Afro hair can be a bit of a minefield, right? These formulas must strike a precarious balance of being able to sufficiently clean the hair and scalp without drying or stripping hydration from your texture – but they do exist.

Because of coily strands' shape, oils from the scalp don’t tend to reach the tips of the hair; it can therefore feel drier than other hair types. It can also be weaker than other types, too, so you have to be mindful of how a shampoo can leave your hair feeling in case of tangling. On the plus side, Afro-textured hair doesn’t tend to get greasy quickly, meaning it doesn’t need shampooing as frequently as other hair types. Result. But if you’re using the best shampoo less often, your product will last you longer, hence the need to choose your formula more wisely.

As a coily-haired girl myself, I've tried hundreds of different shampoos at various points in my hair journey – from needing a protein-rich routine due to my hair being super weak to protecting my freshly-dyed red hair or clarifying it after using way too much wax for a slicked back look. So, if you want to update your choice of shampoo for Afro-textured hair, these are the one's choose for various hair concerns, from weakness to frizz and chemical damage.

The best shampoo for Afro hair, reviewed by a beauty editor

How to choose the best shampoo for Afro hair

There are a few things to consider when choosing a shampoo for Afro-textured hair. “Choosing the correct shampoo for curls for me depends on two things: the job I want it to do or the type of hair I'm working with,” says Louis Driver, Avlon educator and freelance hair stylist. “For example, if the hair and scalp have a heavy build-up of product on them, then I'm going to use a detox or clarifying shampoo.”

“If the hair is really dry, then we want moisturising [properties]," he continues. "If the curls or coils have been coloured, then we’re looking at something colour-safe; I'm also looking for a shampoo that's nutrient-rich and devoid of harsh sulphates or chemicals.”

As well as our actual hair, we mustn’t forget our scalps. “Scalp health is super important, so a shampoo that supports that, along with the hair’s requirements, gets extra points from me," Driver confirms. "A good shampoo should leave your hair and scalp feeling clean without being brittle or crunchy.”

How often should you wash Afro textured hair?

This answer really varies depending on the person, but a weekly wash is advisable across the board. "I think the frequency of washing curly or coily hair depends on the individual or lifestyle, but at a minimum, the hair should be washed once a week," says Driver. "The curlier the hair, the greater its need for moisture."

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/hair/best-shampoos-for-afro-hair/ TT3RoXmpRJCCxT8DfAcVTF Sun, 14 Apr 2024 14:01:53 +0000
<![CDATA[ The 6 best niacinamide serums to nourish your skin's barrier and smooth fine lines ]]> Boasting a multitude of benefits, niacinamide is the hardworking but somewhat unsung hero of the skincare world, and according to our beauty team, these are the best niacinamide serums and creams deserving of a spot in your routine.

If asked to name a popular and powerful skincare ingredient, most people would likely reel off retinol, vitamin C and of course, hyaluronic acid. After all, the best hyaluronic acid serums are famous for their hydration-boosting powers and vitamin C treatments, for instance, for their brightening effects. However, there's another, lesser talked about luminary that does just about anything and everything we’d look for in a skincare product: niacinamide.

This humble ingredient is no one-trick pony; it hydrates, soothes and smoothes your complexion and in case you're keen to add it to your arsenal, our beauty team has tested an array of the best formulas and quizzed skincare experts on all things niacinamide...

The 6 best niacinamide serums to add to your stash, per a beauty expert

From La Roche-Posay to Vichy, our beauty expert has tested an array of niacinamide-enriched serums and creams to bring you the top six formulas that are worth investing in - with options to suit every skin type and budget.

How we tested the best niacinamide serums

Like with the best retinol serums and creams, as well as the best face moisturisers, our tester tried every single formula featured in this guide.

To edit down our recommendations for niacinamide serums (and one cream!), we looked for products with a range of concentrations from 2% up to 12% - this allowed us to see the results of varying percentages. Added humectants, like hyaluronic acid and vitamin E, are positive additions to niacinamide serums, too. Those with low synthetic fragrance and low in silicone were favoured as well.

Our expert panel

What is niacinamide?

To avoid any classic niacinamide mistakes, it's important to know exactly what the ingredient is and equally, what it does.

"Niacinamide is a form of Vitamin B3," explains Dr. Cunningham, Consultant Dermatologist at Skin + Me. "It’s a vitamin that’s beneficial for our bodies inside as part of a healthy diet (niacin is found in foods such as grains, fish, meat and beans and converts to niacinamide when eaten) and keeps our skin healthy on the outside when applied topically."

It does this, according to Dr Ahmed El Muntasar, a GP and award-winning aesthetician, "by helping build up some proteins, useful proteins in the skin, plus, it helps maintain hydration and it protects your skin from the environment that we're in, including the damaging effects of pollution and the sun."

Why is niacinamide so popular?

Niacinamide has a throng of skincare benefits, such as soothing fine lines and wrinkles, boosting skin’s elasticity and reducing signs of environmental damage.

"It's an all-round crowd-pleaser," says Dr. Sam Bunting. "Versatile, well-tolerated and it’s actually a dream to formulate as it doesn't need any special treatment."

The popularity of niacinamide could also be due to the fact that now, we are much more aware of the importance of supporting our skin barrier. Not only does niacinamide help to strengthen this barrier, but because it gets along with other actives, such as retinol and alpha hydroxy acids, it allows our skin to tolerate these ingredients better.

What are the benefits of niacinamide?

How long have you got?! If ever there was an ingredient all-rounder, this is it. "From improving skin texture and tone to enhancing the skin barrier function to diminishing the appearance of fine lines and wrinkles," enthuses Dr. Cunningham.

It can also help with increasing the skin’s tolerance to topical retinoids, according to Dr. Bunting, and she suggests using niacinamide before starting a retinoid if you have sensitive skin. Plus, she adds. "This is a great way to help improve compliance with retinoids in acne sufferers who also have a tendency to dry, sensitive skin."

Who can use niacinamide?

Niacinamide has extensive advantages and is just about universally effective for every skin type. "It’s suitable for all ages – from teens through to those with mature skin," agrees Dr. Bunting. "It’s a fantastic all-rounder that’s brilliantly well-tolerated so most people can benefit from it."

Plus, adds Dr. Cunningham, "it is more gentle than retinol and retinoids in terms of its skin-ageing benefits and is safe to use during pregnancy."

How much niacinamide do we need?

According to Clarins, while niacinamide is highly tolerated and best for all skin types, it can be found in varying concentrations, with 10% being the highest. As a result, it may lead some to skin irritations, while a concentration that is too low will have minimal effect.

Dermatologists recommend starting at around 2-3% and working up to a maximum of 10% depending on how your skin reacts to it. In regards to when to apply, Dr. Bunting says that, "niacinamide can be used at any time of day. It can be built into sunscreen in the morning and it can be used in a serum format at night."

Any precautions before using niacinamide?

Niacinamide is generally quite a good ingredient for your skin. However, Dr Ahmed El Muntasar advises to be careful not to over-hydrate your skin.

"Sometimes people can use niacinamide, hyaluronic acid, ceramides and all these different hydration products, thinking that ‘hydration, hydration’ is always a good thing. However, if you're acne-prone, that could be quite bad because that can actually break you out. So too much of a good thing, could be a bad thing."

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/skincare/best-niacinamide-serums/ Uwqabzxw5Ayo93z2iuU3Lm Sat, 13 Apr 2024 12:01:04 +0000
<![CDATA[ The 5 best salicylic acid products for clearer-looking skin ]]> Want to reap the benefits of salicylic acid in your skincare routine? We've quizzed the skincare pros on what the potent exfoliator can do - and rounded up the best salicylic acid products to add to your beauty arsenal...

If you have ever suffered from serious blemishes you may already be aware of this superpowered spot buster. To put it simply, salicylic acid (say it with us: sal-i-cy-lic) is acne’s arch-nemesis. Targeting everything from papules and pustules to nodules and cysts - no breakout is safe. It works by penetrating your skin at a deeper level, clearing congestion, unblocking pores and exfoliating the skin - salicylic acid is a chemical exfoliant - which all help to prevent spots.

But how do you incorporate it into your skincare routine? And how do you choose the right one for you - to avoid any classic salicylic acid mistakes? The skincare experts weigh in.

The best salicylic acid products, as reviewed by a beauty expert

How we tested the best salicylic acid products

Like with the best retinol cream and serums, we chose salicylic acid products in different formulations; from cleansers and toners to spot treatments and serums, and looked for concentration of at least 2%. We navigated towards products that were specifically targeted to skin types as well as formulations.

What is salicylic acid? All your BHA questions, answered

“Salicylic acid is a beta hydroxy acid (BHA) and is one of the most common and well-known acids for battling blemish-prone skin,” explains Faye Purcell, Head of Research and Development at Q+A.

Where AHAs, like glycolic acid or lactic acid, are ideal for treating the surface of your skin, salicylic acid is oil-soluble and its small molecular size allows it to penetrate deeper into the pores. “It helps to decongest and unclog pores, target spots, and speed up cell turnover to reveal smoother, brighter, and clearer skin,” explains Faye.

How can salicylic acid benefit the skin?

It is a brilliant way to help target unwanted breakouts. “It ‘un-glues’ the bonds that hold dead skin together, chemically exfoliating the skin for a smoother, softer surface,” describes Simone Shoffman, Head of Education at Healthxchange. It also has fantastic anti-inflammatory effects on the skin.

However, its greatest strength, according to Simone, is in helping to treat and prevent both black and whiteheads, otherwise referred to as congestion. “Think of it as a deep cleaner for your face, reaching into the pores (where spots form) and breaking down the debris which will cause these - stopping them in their tracks before they form.”

Who should use salicylic acid?

It is particularly good for those with acne or congestion prone skin, which many of us will suffer from at some point in their life. “Our modern environment means that our skin is constantly exposed to free radicals, in the form of pollutants, which cause inflammation and antioxidant depletion in skin,” explains Simone.

Salicylic acid can also be used to help treat a range of chronic skin concerns, such as psoriasis, due to its ability to encourage cellular turnover and a decrease in inflammation.

Can you use salicylic acid everyday?

A frequently asked question where the active is concerned is 'should you use salicylic acid everyday?' Well, according to the pros, this really depends on the strength and formula.

“Some salicylic acid products are designed for daily use, whereas others (often higher strength treatment products) are meant to be used a few times a week,” says Dr Eleanor Bradley, No7 Science Manager. If you have dry or sensitive skin, then it is best to start with a low percentage and use it gradually before committing to it daily, for example every other day. If any redness or irritation appears, stop immediately.

Can salicylic acid damage your skin?

“People often over-use salicylic for acne or oily skin, especially in cleansers and endup exacerbating the problem with more persistent breakouts from dry skin,” says Mariam Abbas, Advanced Facialist. “It is best used in formulations with hydrating and barrier repair ingredients that can work on nourishing the skin to prevent the skin from becoming dry and irritated.”

Those with skin congestion should choose a non-comedogenic moisturiser to prevent further blockage. “And protecting the skin daily with SPF is important, as your skin can be more sensitive to UV exposure when using active ingredients,” adds Simone.

Where will you find salicylic acid?

You can find salicylic acid in many skincare products, but it is most often seen in face cleansers, acne treatments and serums. Over-the-counter topical treatments come in concentrations between 0.5% to 2%. Leave-on products usually sit between 1-2 % BHA with no alcohol or fragrance.

Can you use salicylic acid with other actives, such as vitamin C?

When using two potent ingredients, it's wise to take precautions before combining them. However, if the correct type of products are used, this can be a winning combination for clear skin. “Vitamin C absorbs most easily when the skin is at a lower pH level, and as salicylic acid is an acid itself - it lowers the pH level of the skin,” explains Simone. “Applying Vitamin C after salicylic acid will help to increase its absorption and efficacy.”

While using salicylic acid and retinol in your skincare regimen is perfectly safe and can make it more effective, it may lead to dry skin when used too frequently. Applying salicylic acid first will produce an exfoliating effect that can help retinol infiltrate the skin more effectively, meaning that you will get the utmost benefits like firming, smoothing and brightening.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/skincare/best-salicylic-acid-products/ TDvQbuevJbADZjqzGXTJB Tue, 09 Apr 2024 13:01:32 +0000
<![CDATA[ Black gym leggings are the 'squat-proof essential' in every winter wardrobe - here are our favourites ]]> You can't go wrong with a pair of the best black gym leggings, whatever the season. They go with everything, making them an easy choice for early morning exercise, and they're suitable for most workouts given their unique ability to hide sweat and help you look great.

Over the years as woman&home's digital health editor, I must have worn close to a hundred pairs of the best workout leggings. I exercise at least three days a week, whatever the weather, so I can confirm these are great choices for whatever you have planned. I've also asked other members of the team for their tried and tested favourites, covering all types of workouts from running and hiking to yoga and Pilates.

Each pair of leggings tried and tested by the woman&home team and included in this round-up meets three essential criteria: durable (the colour doesn't fade after just a few washes), squat-proof (the material isn't see-through when you move in it), and comfortable (the fit and material of the leggings make them enjoyable to wear). Only the best workout leggings that met this criteria over several weeks of wear have been included in the list, so you can be assured that your pick of the bunch is truly the very best.

The quick list

Best black gym leggings, tried and tested by us

Best black gym leggings overall

Uniqlo Ultra Stretch AIRism Leggings (With Pockets) product shot and model wearing purple pair to show appearance

(Image credit: Uniqlo)

1. UNIQLO Ultra Stretch AIRism Leggings

Best black gym leggings overall

RRP: £24.90 | Length: Full length | Materials: 77% Polyester - Recycled Fiber, 23% Elastane | High-waisted: Mid | Pockets: Yes

Seam-free construction
Three pockets
Lightweight feel
Full-length
Shows sweat on heavier workouts

A pair of black gym leggings that ticks all the boxes? It's got to be the Uniqlo Ultra Stretch AIRism Leggings (With Pockets). These full-length leggings have a mid-high waist for good support, three pockets, and a seam-free construction at the front for comfort.

I've worn these leggings on a hike paired with my favourite walking shoes, on a 5km run, and through several gym workouts and can confidently say they work for every one of these exercises. The waistband isn't so high that I felt too compressed but supportive enough to stay up while running, despite not having a drawstring waistband like the Sweaty Betty Power leggings. With three pockets, I didn't have to worry about where to put my phone and I could easily access it to take pictures on my hike and change the music in the gym.

I'm slightly taller than average, so I was pleasantly surprised to see these leggings came down to just above my ankle, making them full length. For winter workouts outdoors, these are a must.

My only gripe was that the material isn't particuarly sweat-wicking, unlike the Gymshark Vital Seamless 2.0 leggings, for instance. So, during my sweatier gym workouts, I saw the damp patches around my waistband. However, the black colour hid these well - I had to really look to see them - and the sweatier they got, the more like a second skin they felt so they stayed comfortable during my sessions.

Nike Go Black Gym leggings

(Image credit: Nike)

2. Nike Go Women's Leggings with Pockets

Best black gym leggings with pockets

RRP: £99.99 | Length: Full length | Materials: Recycled nylon | High-waisted: Yes | Pockets: Yes, six!

Six pockets, incl. a zip pocket for secure storage
Plus-size range also available
High-waisted and compressive fit
Drawstring waistband for additional support
Comfortable to wear
One of the more expensive options

When it comes to the best gym leggings with pockets, there's no pair quite like the Nike Go Women's Leggings. What I love most about these are the six useful pockets, each made in a different style (zip closures, folding fabric, tight elastane openings) and all strategically stored within the legs and waistband of the leggings. When I'm at the gym, these are among my favourites as I can store my phone and locker key safely - I've even managed to get a pair of lifting straps in the side pockets.

However, in their own right, these are excellent black gym leggings. Often, at the end of a sweaty workout, my other gym leggings with pockets will leave a residue on my phone. Only natural, considering the screen is either pressed against the legging material close to my thigh or the outside of the legging. That's not the case here though. I've always found the material to be thick enough to keep sweat residue away from whatever I've stored in there. However, the material still feels soft yet supportive, with moisture-wicking properties that prevent overheating.

A high waistband and drawstring cord fit into the design for additional support around the middle, making these a great option for outdoor runs, hikes, and walks as well.

While I have no doubt these will stand the test of time in the years to come, with their squat-proof design, the price of the Nike Go Women's Leggings with Pockets must be considered at £99.99. They are also only available in one black colourway, although other dark shades are an option on the Nike website.

The best black gym leggings for cardio

Sweaty Betty Power leggings in three views, including back pockets and drawstring waistband, highlighting key details

(Image credit: Sweaty Betty)

3. Sweaty Betty Power Full-Length Gym Leggings

Best black gym leggings for cardio

RRP: £88 | Length: 7/8 or full length | Materials: Polyamide elastane | High-waisted: Mid | Pockets: Yes, three

Very comfortable
Second-skin-like feel
Suitable for high-impact exercise
Three pockets
Drawstring cord for extra support
Seam construction on the front

Though the Sweaty Betty Power Gym Leggings have just the one pocket on the leg and one in the waistband, they are my pick of the best black gym leggings for cardio enthusiasts. The back pocket is zipped, so it's more secure than others, and just the right size to hold keys and a credit card securely, there's a secure cord for tightening the waistband, and they wick away sweat very easily.

These also come in multiple black colourways so there's plenty of choice. My favourite is the black camoflage (pictured).

I've had my Sweaty Betty Power Gym Leggings in black for over two years and work out in them at least once a week - and I'm yet to see any sign of colour fading. The polyamide elastane fabric is durable while still feeling soft and lightweight. When Sweaty, much like our top pick of best black gym leggings, they develop a second skin-like feel that means they hold to the body comfortably.

They are not as high-waisted as others on this list, but they do come up to the belly button, offering enough support for running, walking, gym workouts, and any kind of exercise whee you're jumping up and down, and need your leggings to go with you - but there's also a drawstring in the waistband, should you need a little extra reassurance.

One thing to be aware of with the Sweaty Betty Power Gym leggings is the seam construction on the front of the leggings, which can give you a bit of a camel toe if you pull them up too high. You've been warned.

Read our full Sweaty Betty Power Gym Leggings review here.

The best black gym leggings for yoga

Lululemon Align leggings

(Image credit: Lululemon)

4. Lululemon Align High-Rise 28" Leggings

Best black gym leggings for yoga

RRP: £88 | Length: Full length at 28", other lengths available too | Materials: 77% Nylon, 23% Lycra Elastane | High-waisted: Yes | Pockets: Yes, also available without

Very comfortable
Premium materials
Pockets for essentials
Full-length
High waisted
Front seam construction
Not suitable for running

Lululemon is one of the biggest names in the fitness industry for a reason. There are three main collections, but Align is the best for yoga, Pilates, barre, and other low-impact workouts.

The materials and four-way stretch are the highlights, offering a weightless and buttery-soft feel against the skin, so soft and comfortable, I sometimes forget I'm wearing anything at all. They also have a higher waist compared to the Sweaty Betty Power leggings and come without a drawstring, so there's less compression against the stomach, making them a good option for lower-impact workouts.

The Align High-Rise 28" Leggings are also a favourite of Kerrie Hughes, woman&home's digital editor. "These are my go-to everyday leggings. I wear these everywhere, from rowing and CrossFit workouts to casual Sunday mornings. They're so comfortable, and the quality means I never have to worry about them being see-through," she says. And while these leggings sit towards the upper end of the price spectrum, you can often find alternative Align darker colourways in the Lululemon sale.

However, these suffer from the same problem as the Power leggings: they have a front seam. They also highlight the difference between yoga leggings and running leggings. As they don't have a drawstring waistband and the super soft, lightweight feel means they are more prone to slipping down than other black gym leggings, it's best to opt for the Gymshark Vital Seamless 2.0 or Uniqlo Ultra Stretch AIRism leggings instead.

The best high waisted black gym leggings

Gymshark Vital Seamless 2.0 leggings in black

(Image credit: Gymshark)

5. Gymshark Vital Seamless 2.0 Full-Length Leggings

Best black gym leggings from Gymshark

RRP: £45 | Length: Full length | Materials: 93% Nylon, 7% Elastane | High-waisted: Yes | Pockets: No

Very comfortable
High-waisted
Lightweight
Breathable
Durable
Only available in black marl

With a waistband that sits slightly higher than many, the Gymshark Vital Seamless 2.0 leggings are a top pick if you're looking for more support above the waist. I have two pairs of the black Gymshark Vital Seamless 2.0 Leggings and they're in my regular rotation for workouts, simply because they're so easy and practical to slip on, they don't bunch up, and they feel so lightweight I barely notice they're there.

For Tamara Kelly, woman&home's digital lifestyle editor, they're a winner for similar reasons. "They are a tight fit but with that, they offer a shaping element that makes you feel sculpted, which is a valuable asset when you feel somewhat exposed during exercise. The fabric is thick enough to hold you in and feel supported but lightweight enough to feel comfortable and not cause you to overheat."

When it comes to the best black gym leggings, these Gymshark leggings lack the variety of black colourways offered by brands like Sweaty Betty. Given the five different shades of green in this legging style, I'd love to see more variations on the black colourway in the future. However, as Tamara says, if you know how to wash gym clothes, these leggings will last a long time. "After a year of washing my leggings every week, the colour has stayed and they are still as good as new."

The most comfortable black gym leggings

H&M black SoftMove studio tights

(Image credit: H&M)

6. H&M SoftMove Seamless Sports Tights

Best comfortable black gym leggings

RRP: £27.99 | Length: Full length | Materials: Polyester 83%, Elastane 17% | High-waisted: Yes | Pockets: No

Super soft material
Very comfortable
Lightweight
Thick waistband for support
Suitable for everyday wear
No pockets

Comfort is key when it comes to working out, whatever your activity. Rich in colour and super soft in material, these H&M SoftMove Seamless Sports Tights are one of the best Lululemon alternatives around - and possibly the most comfortable leggings I've ever owned.

While I wouldn't wear these for high-intensity activities like running, spinning, or HIIT workouts as they tend to collect sweat marks, they are perfect for gym workouts like strength training, yoga for beginners, and a full-body Pilates workout. The high, wide waistband offers good support and the length stretches to the ankle, even if you're a little taller than average (like me). They are also lightweight and breathable, and they sit on the lower end of the price spectrum compared to other popular leggings from Sweaty Betty and Lululemon, making them a great buy for those on a budget.

I'm normally a size large in leggings and didn't find the need to size up in the H&M SoftMove Seamless Sports Tights. However, reviews from other verified buyers have noted this as a common problem, so it's worth checking out the size guide before buying.

Best budget friendly gym leggings

M&S Go Move high-waisted gym leggings

(Image credit: M&S)

7. M&S Go Move High Waisted 7/8 Gym Leggings

Best budget-friendly black gym leggings

RRP: £27.50 | Length: 7/8 | Materials: 73% polyester, 27% elastane | High-waisted: Yes | Pockets: Yes, two

Under £30
Very comfortable
Lightweight
Moisture-wicking
Supportive drawstring in waist
Large back pocket
Sizing may come up small 

The M&S Go Move High Waisted 7/8 Gym Leggings are a great pair of black workout leggings if you're looking for a pair under £30 - and our top pick isn't for you. At 7/8 length, these are particularly suitable for anyone 5 foot 6 inches and under, and anyone looking for a shorter style for whatever reason. Otherwise, they are more or less the same as full-length gym leggings.

I've had my M&S Go Move 7/8 leggings for several months, although I wore them more during the warmer spring and summer months. They work for the gym best, I believe, whether that's Pilates every day or spinning a couple of times a week. The have a high-waisted fit reaches just above the belly button and a drawstring waistband adds support during cardio workouts, which I love. Although, the back pocket has a zip that I found digs slightly into the lower back when lying down on a mat if not positioned correctly, so it's perhaps not the best pair for yoga mat workouts.

I've found them to be quick-drying and they wick away moisture just as well as some of the more premium options. They're also very breathable, so I don't feel myself overheating during sweaty workouts, which is a bonus.

It's worth noting, however, that the M&S Go Move High Waisted 7/8 Gym Leggings do come up a little small. When buying leggings with a shorter leg, this is definitely something to be aware of - otherwise you could end up with capris. I noticed it with my pair, needing to size up from my regular 12 to a 14, and other verified buyers have said the same thing.

The best black gym leggings for sculpting

Adidas black gym leggings

(Image credit: Adidas )

8. Adidas by Stella McCartney TruePurpose Optime Training 7/8 Leggings

Best black gym leggings for sculpting

RRP: £85 | Length: 7/8 | Materials: 79% polyester (recycled), 21% elastane (recycled) | High-waisted: Yes | Pockets: No

Very comfortable
Supportive waistband
Made from recycled materials
Sculpting panels around legs and waist 
Most expensive option on the list

While all the best black gym leggings are going to have an effect that makes you look slimmer and taller, as darker colours draw attention away from the body and to the head, hands, and feet, the block panelling on these TruePurpose Optime Training 7/8 Leggings work to sculpt the thighs, hips, and glutes. So, if you're looking to create a sculpted silhouette with your pick of the best black gym leggings, these are the best choice.

Above all else though, the TruePurpose Optime Training 7/8 Leggings made it onto my list as they are some of the most comfortable gym leggings I've ever worn. They have a four-way stretch and seamless design that has a second-skin-like feel when the leggings get sweaty, meaning they get more comfortable as you get uncomfortable. The high waistband is secure and supportive, with full coverage up to the base of the ribs, and small vents in the legs mean I never overheat.

Like other leggings on the list, the Adidas by Stella McCartney range is produced with 100% recycled materials, making them a great option for those looking to be more sustainable in their activewear choices.

Best black gym leggings on Amazon

CRZ YOGA Women's leggings

(Image credit: CRZ )

9. CRZ YOGA Women's Workout Leggings

Best black gym leggings on Amazon

RRP: £23 to £25 | Length: Full length (25") | Materials: 71% Polyamide, 29% Elastane | High-waisted: Yes | Pockets: No

Very comfortable
Supportive
Various black colourways available
Hidden pocket in the waistband 
Not available on Prime 

While not available with Prime Delivery, the CRZ YOGA Women's Workout Leggings are for sale on Amazon almost exclusively. As well as a standard black colourway, much like lululemon and Sweaty Betty, CRZ YOGA offers unique black designs like tie-dye, marble, camouflage, and various shades of black in these leggings. So whether you want something to stand out in class or blend in, there's an option for you.

"I never thought I would say this about a brand from Amazon, but I love my CRZ Yoga leggings almost as much as my Lulus," says w&h Acting Digital Editor Kerrie Hughes. "They are unbelievably soft, comfortable and supportive. The black pair I own pass the squat test, but I would always opt for the quality of my Lulus on squat day, just to be on the safe side."

With sizes available between 6 and 16, there isn't a huge range of options available. There are also no longer or shorter length options. However, these leggings are just over £23 and one of the best lululemon alternatives you can buy, so they're a good option. CRZ Yoga Butterluxe leggings also come in a variety of colours, if you want to add a pop of colour to your workout wardrobe.

In testing

How I tested the best black gym leggings

  • Durability: Each of the leggings listed in this guide was worn over several weeks, with several washes between wears, which is how we know the rich black colour of these leggings doesn't fade quickly. Some pairs, like the Sweaty Betty Power leggings and Gymshark Vital Seamles 2.0 leggings have a colour wash that's stood up to many years of wear and washes.
  • Squat-proof: You want to feel secure and covered in any pair of gym leggings you own, given that they are tighter to the body than regular trousers. I wore each pair of these leggings to the gym, squatting and deadlifting without an issue. I've also worn them on several longer-distance runs and stand by the squat-proof, sweat-proof status I've given them.
  • Comfort: Whether you're wearing your black gym leggings during a workout or on a recovery day, you want them to be supportive, while also being comfortable over at least two hours. I wore each pair of leggings for several hours at a time in different scenarios, from HIIT workouts to Sunday recovery brunches, to make sure the waistbands were comfortable, the seams scratchless, and the stretch was as good as the brand suggested.
  • Availability: Every body is different, so it makes sense for brands to produce leggings in various sizes - including tall and petite ranges, with various leg lengths. When choosing my pick of the best black gym leggings, I ensured each had alternative options for different sizes where possible. Naturally, some leggings on the cheaper end of the price spectrum only offer one size.
  • Materials: I also assessed the materials of each pair of leggings. Were they sustainably produced with at least 30% recycled materials? Were they a little more polyester than elastane or not? In each case, I highlighted the makeup of the materials and what this means for comfort, stretch, and coverage.
  • Moisture-wicking: Needless to say, you'll be sweating in these leggings if you wear them to the gym. So, each pair needs to be lightweight where possible and made from breathable materials. I've also highlighted additional features that add to the moisture-wicking designs when I've spotted them.
  • Supporting features: These are 'nice to have' features, like drawstring waistbands (for additional support during high-energy cardio workouts) and pockets. Where I spotted them in my collection of the best black gym leggings, I noted them down.

How to find the best black gym leggings for you 

  • Size: If your fit is outside of standard, regular sizing, you may find you need alternative options. For example, I find the Nike Go leggings to be the perfect full-length option but for those who shop petite sizes, Sweaty Betty or M&S Go Move may be better since the black leggings come in 7/8 lengths too, which are suitable for those 5'4" or under.
  • Brand: When considering which black gym leggings to buy, it's a good idea to think not just about the style but also the brand you're buying from. Consider Sweaty Betty vs Lululemon before making a purchase, for example, and don't just presume that because one brand is more popular than another, it will have the right pair of leggings for you.
  • Seams: Do seams on leggings tend to make you itch and scratch? The material and construction of the leggings you choose should be considered. Where possible, try on the pair you're planning to buy before purchasing to make sure they are comfortable for you - otherwise, make sure the brand has a good returns policy.
  • Activity: It's important to consider the activity you'll be doing in your leggings. If you're a treadmill enthusiast, you'll likely prefer the Nike Go leggings over the lululemon Align, as they are made with more cardio-safe materials and have a drawstring waistband to prevent slipping. The Align collection is better suited to those doing strength training, yoga, and Pilates.

What's the benefit of black gym leggings?

Black gym leggings won't show sweat marks as easily as lighter-coloured options, making them a fail-safe option for sweaty workouts and grab-and-go gym bag packing. This means they also tend to last longer per buy than others, since you can't see the wear and stain marks that tend to cling to gym leggings all of kinds, given their elastane and polyester-heavy materials.

You'll find that you'll be more likely to wear black gym leggings outside of exercise too, more so than lighter-coloured options or pastel colourways, as they blend into the background and offer a flattering fit.

What can I wear black gym leggings with?

The great thing about black gym leggings is that they go with almost anything, from your brightest pick of the best high-impact sports bras and t-shirts to low-key jackets and sweatshirts.

They make for a great base for any outfit, allowing you to accessorise with brighter shades when you want to.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/health-wellbeing/best-black-gym-leggings/ mm3uLnfsaJbJKwkdPXRdw5 Sun, 07 Apr 2024 17:00:07 +0000
<![CDATA[ From trendy cherry to zingy citrus, these 12 fruity perfumes are good enough to eat ]]> The best fruity perfumes promise to lighten the mood, slicing through grey days and transporting you to sunnier scenes, no matter the season. It's no wonder they're a universal favourite but these 12 delicious blends, in particular, have our team's approval.

If you’re anything like us, your first foray into fragrance probably began with a juicy little number - a sickly-sweet body spray or perhaps a berry-centric eau de toilette. In time though, these were succeeded with long lasting perfumes, with headier aromatics and elegant floral fragrances. Thus, it's no surprise that many of us class fruity blends as youthful but still, despite this perception, notes of citrus can be found amongst some of the most iconic and best perfumes for women.

"Fruity notes explode at the start of a fragrance, so for a young person who wants a powerful hit of fragrance, they are very attractive," agrees Master perfumer Ruth Mastenbroek, but not all iterations are cloying or overly sweet. "I personally love using fruity notes as they’re so versatile. I’m seeing them used more in high-end fragrances." So, if you're looking to embrace a luxe, fruity signature, these are the ones our beauty team recommend...

The 12 best fruity perfumes, per our beauty team

As mentioned, it's something of a common misconception that fruity fragrances are youthful and always sickly sweet. There are plenty of chic and mature blends out there - notably from brands like Jo Malone, Marc Jacobs and BDK.

"It’s about how these notes are combined that creates the actual fragrance and tells the story," Mastenbroek explains, to which point, we have 12 expertly crafted and versatile fruit perfumes to put forward.

How we tested these fruity perfumes

As we say in all of our fragrance guides, perfume shopping is incredibly subjective. There aren't definitive measurements by which you can smell a scent and put it into the 'good' or 'bad' camps, so instead we have chosen these fruity perfumes based on a wide range of tastes and preferences across the beauty team, as well as assessing a few factors that might influence whether you, our reader, might enjoy them. The longevity, for instance, and whether the blends lean more towards sweet or green.

selection of the best fruity perfumes tested by our Beauty Editor

A selection of the fruity fragrance our Beauty Editor tested (Image credit: Stephanie Maylor)

Of the countless scents we tried, every fragrance featured in this guide came out on top for a particular type of buyer, mood or scent preference. We update this edit regularly with any of the latest fruity perfume launches that make the grade, as well as keeping our long-term tried-and-true favorites in the permanent collection.

FAQs

How to choose your perfect fruity perfume

This all comes down to personal preference. But if you’re in the market for a new fruity fragrance, whether you're hitting the department store or want to learn how to buy fragrance online, our experts have some great advice:

  • Fruity doesn't always mean sweet: "Just because a fragrance says it has strawberry in it, doesn’t necessarily mean the fragrance will smell of strawberries," explains Mastenbroek. "It may be using the qualities and characteristics of strawberries to add a dose of green freshness and mouth-watering sweetness."
  • Give it time: "Fruity notes don’t often last long, so if you’re choosing a new fragrance, I would always suggest wearing it for an hour or so to make sure you still like it once the top notes have faded," says Mastenbroek.
  • Choose the right notes: "Fruity notes can be off-putting as we get older because when combined with sweet notes like vanilla, they can feel childish or unsophisticated," admits Mastenbroek. "Some elegant fruity notes are citrus, especially grapefruit, combined with floral notes like orange blossom, or as part of a cologne. These combinations can provide a good balance to the comfort and freshness that fruity notes offer."
  • Have fun: "Be creative and remember to have fun," says Malone. "Fragrance can be taken seriously but picking your scent for the day should be joyful - and fruity fragrances are the perfect way to embrace spring and summer too."
]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/best-fruity-perfume/ 5XG9vG2TvQMXvGLXYx7hyV Thu, 28 Mar 2024 08:54:13 +0000
<![CDATA[ The best conditioner for curly hair for deep moisture, damage repair, definition and more ]]> Shampoo and conditioner are two of the basics of a good haircare routine, but there are so many different kinds of both. Generally, the best conditioner for curly hair, specifically, will focus on delivering moisture and definition to parched curls, coils and waves – and, after much testing, our beauty testers have pinpointed the very best on the market.

Curly hair needs more moisture than straighter hair types, which is why you're likely to find yourself getting through conditioner faster than the best shampoo for curly hair. One main reason is its shape, because natural oils from your scalp can’t travel down wiggly strands as easily as they can straighter ones. What's more, while porosity levels vary between individuals, the cuticles on the shaft of curly hair also don’t slot together evenly, leaving gaps that moisture can escape through.

While the best conditioners for fine and thin hair often focus on lightweight ingredients, curly conditioners tend to be packed with more hydration and nourishing ingredients, such as oils and butters, to counteract natural dryness. (This is of course a general rule, as curly hair can be fine in texture, too.) And when curly hair types are well nourished, you’ll find that they’re more defined and less likely to tangle or develop frizz. To that end, we’ve tested plenty of products to bring you a detailed round-up of the very best conditioners for curly hair in this need-to-know guide.

The best conditioners for curly hair, chosen by our experts

How to pick the best conditioner for curly hair

While the priority is adequate moisture, there's are several other considerations to make when choosing the best conditioner for curly hair, which we've expanded on below.

  • Price: As senior beauty editor Rhiannon mentioned, you're likely to go through quite a bit of conditioner, so it needs to come with a price tag that you can afford to repurchase regularly. That said, if your hair is in damaged or needs something more intensive in the short term, it may be worth spending that bit more on something really restorative with innovative ingredients. Speaking of...
  • Moisture level: Curly hair can come in so many thickness and porosity levels that you may find your hair soaks up lots of rich nourishment with ease, or needs something deeply moisturising but not heavy. Consider this when looking at the name-checked ingredients and the thickness of a formula. "Choosing the wrong conditioner can lead to lacklustre limp curls with no shine or bounce," says Keisha Jo Lawler, founder of Trepadora. You want to look for conditioners that contain ingredients like esters, light butters – cocoa seed and mango seed butters are favourites – and behentrimonium methosulfate, which works incredibly well on frizzy hair to seal the cuticles down."
  • Protein or no protein? Protein treatments are very useful in strengthening weak and damaged hair, but they're just one aspect of a healthy haircare routine and shouldn't be overused. "I recommend avoiding conditioners with too many proteins, and be very careful in how often you use them as they can have the opposite effect intended and over-strengthen your strands which can lead to breakage," says Keisha.

How we tested the best conditioner for curly hair

A selection of the conditioners for curly hair tested by woman&home

(Image credit: Future)

To bring you a reliable round-up of the best conditioners for curly hair, the woman&home team tried and tested a range of products across different price points from both higher end and affordable brands. As the beauty of curls is that no two are the same, we made sure to use testers with different curl types, from waves to tight ringlets. These are the factors we took into consideration when testing.

  • Price: A higher price does not necessarily mean a better product, so we assessed the value for money in the context of performance vs price here. The more expensive options here have advanced benefits or unique ingredients that justify the higher price somewhat.
  • Packaging: This isn't just about aesthetics, lovely though pretty packaging is. A conditioner's bottle, tube or tub needs to make for easy dispensation, too.
  • Scent: Fragrance is very subjective, but a lovely scent can add to the overall user experience, so we took this sensorial aspect into account in our reviews.
  • Ingredients: The best conditioners for curly hair will contain hardworking ingredients that improve the short-term appearance and long-term health of your curls, so we paid close attention to the ingredient lists.
  • How defined curls were post-wash: Ingredients like oils and butters in your conditioner will help to seal the hair cuticle and help give each individual curl definition for a fuller, healthier-looking finish.
  • How well frizz was kept at bay: The bends in curly hair stop it from lying completely flat, which can lead to frizz when moisture tries to escape through the gaps or, conversely, when it draws in moisture from the atmosphere when it's too dry. A good conditioner for curly hair will nourish sufficiently and keep things smoother.

Our expert panel

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/hair/best-conditioner-for-curly-hair/ emGNaF5uGzradcMQwbubTd Thu, 14 Mar 2024 19:02:06 +0000
<![CDATA[ The 8 best mattress toppers - tested for comfier, more supportive sleep ]]> I've been sleeping on the best mattress toppers on the market — from Simba, Woolroom, Eight Sleep, Dreams, and more to find models that can help with night sweats, back pain, and any other issues that keep you from your beauty sleep. These are my expert-selected, tried-and-tested favourites.

In an ideal world, your sleep setup will include the best mattress for your sleep style, complimented by a specialised mattress topper, a plush mattress protector, a comfy duvet, and a supportive pillow (including the best pillows for neck pain). However, every time there is a change in your life, be it menopause or a slipped disc, your sleep needs will change. That's where mattress toppers come in.

Rather than spending thousands reviving your whole rest routine, a good mattress topper can be an inexpensive way meet your sleep needs and restore your rest to a regular routine. To find out which ones are worth buying, I've slept on memory foam, feather, gel-infused, bamboo, wool, and cotton toppers. Each topper is assessed on firmness, motion isolation, breathability, and edge support.

From the classic Simba Hybrid topper, which is great for reviving an old mattress, right through to the super high-tech Eight Sleep Pod that runs cold water underneath you as you sleep, I've selected the best six mattress toppers for every sleep style and budget. Here they are.

Simba Hybrid Mattress Topper:

M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress TopperView Deal

Woolroom Organic Deluxe: was £169.99, now £110.49 at Woolroom

Hot sleepers might steer away from wool, but don't. This topper helps to regulate heat (how else would sheet survive in summer), whilst offering s comfortable, cushioning layer over your bed. It's rare to see a discount on Woolroom, so I recommend snapping this up.

OTTY Bamboo Topper with Charcoal: was £129.99, now £99.99 at OTTY

If you don't have a memory foam mattress, but you want the sink-in sensation and pressure relief that they offer, this topper is the one to go for. I wouldn't bank on the cooling technology, but for joint pain, it's excellent.View Deal

Panda Memory Foam Bamboo Mattress Topper: was £139.95, now £118.96 at Amazon (save £20)

Sustainable, supportive, soft, and cooling, this mattress topper is perfect for every kind of sleeper. It's one of the best toppers on the market and, even though this isn't a huge saving, it's the best one on offer right now.View Deal

The quick list

Load the next 2 products ↴

The best mattress toppers, for every kind of sleeper

After speaking with sleep medicine experts, sleep doctors and sleep practitioners, I came up with a list of six mattress toppers for a range of the twelve best mattress toppers on the market. Then, I spent months testing them all. During the day, I would do things like sit water on the bed, bounce around whilst dumbells were on them, and shuffle and shake the bed around. Then, in the night I would track my sleep, looking for quality, deep, undisturbed sleep. Only six made it through these tests and here they are: the best mattress toppers on the market, tested for every kind of sleeper.

Best mattress topper overall

Image 1 of 10

SIMBA Hybrid Duvet

This is the Simba Hybrid Mattress Topper folded up. You get a good idea of the thickness, but click on the arrows to see Louise using the topper in her home (Image credit: Amazon)
Image 2 of 10

Simba hybrid mattress topper review

This is the wide strap that will hold the Simba Hybrid Mattress Topper in place (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 3 of 10

Simba hybrid mattress topper review

Here's the Simba Hybrid Mattress Topper on top of Louise's mattress (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 4 of 10

Simba hybrid mattress topper review

This is the, rather tall, box that the Simba Hybrid Mattress Topper comes in (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 5 of 10

Simba hybrid mattress topper review

This is a closer shot of the Simba Hybrid Mattress Topper on the bed, so you get a good idea of depth (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 6 of 10

Simba hybrid mattress topper review

Here's a dumbbell on the Simba Hybrid Mattress Topper to help test motion tranfer (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 7 of 10

Simba hybrid mattress topper review

This is what the texture of the Simba Hybrid Mattress Topper is like (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 8 of 10

Simba hybrid mattress topper review

Here's the corner of the Simba Hybrid Mattress Topper (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 9 of 10

Simba hybrid mattress topper review

This is the Simba Hybrid Mattress Topper on Louise's bed - you can see that it stretches nicely to reach all four corners (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 10 of 10

Simba hybrid mattress topper review

Once Louise had the Simba Hybrid Mattress Topper out of its box, there was another layer of plastic packaging that needed removing, Here it is. (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )

1. Simba Hybrid Mattress Topper

Best mattress topper for reviving an old mattress

Type : Hybrid | Firmness : Medium-firm | Thickness : 6cm | Size : Single, small double, double, king, super-king | Hypoallergenic: The cover is | Guarentee: 10 years

Good comfort and support for a range of sleep positions
Cooling structures feel refreshing
Reasonably priced given the expected lifespan
Minimal motion transfer if you share a bed
More expensive 
Generic appeal won't support specific issues and niggles
Not actively cooling (like Eight Sleep)

It's highly likely that you've already come across the name Simba. It sits in amongst Emma and Nectar as one of the new, disruptive sleep brands that have emerged over the last ten years. Of all these newbies, Simba makes some of the best mattresses and pillows, so I expected their topper to be cut from the same cloth.

After speaking with their experts, I decided to test the hybrid mattress topper. Not only is it the most popular, but it's specifically designed to suit all sleep styles. The layers offer support and comfort for back and side sleepers, ensuring night-long spinal alignment. Then, if you tend to run a little hot, the cooling structures spaced across the layers promise to stop you from overheating.

Over the months of testing I found Simba to be true to their word on the comfort and support promises. I sleep on all angles of my body, from front to side and back, all of which felt natural with the Simba Hybrid. The cooling technology, whilst refreshing was very very subtle in comparison to the Eight Sleep Pod, which actively cools using water. However, given that this is 5% of the price of that one, it's a good compromise for most sleepers.

You can find out more in Louise's full Simba Hybrid Mattress Topper review.

Most affordable mattress topper

Image 1 of 10

M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper

This is the texture of the M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper. It's really plush and beautiful to touch (Image credit: M&S)
Image 2 of 10

M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper with a glass of water

Here's a glass of water stood on the M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper to test motion transfer (Image credit: Future)
Image 3 of 10

M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper on the bed

This is the M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper on my bed, so you can see that it is as plush in real life (and not just the press shot) (Image credit: Future)
Image 4 of 10

M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper rolled up on the bed

Here is the M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper rolled up on my bed (Image credit: Future)
Image 5 of 10

M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper bag

This is the M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper in its bag (Image credit: Future)
Image 6 of 10

M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper

This is the M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper on my bed, you can see the straps that hold it secure (Image credit: Future)
Image 7 of 10

M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper

This is the M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper next to its dust bag (Image credit: Future)
Image 8 of 10

M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper elastic straps

Here's the elastic strap that attaches the M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper to the bed (Image credit: Future)
Image 9 of 10

M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper height

I measured the depth of the M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper to make sure that it's soft, but not too deep (Image credit: Future)
Image 10 of 10

M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper on the bed

(Image credit: Future)

2. M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper

Best value

Type: Polyester | Firmness : Soft | Thickness : 5 cm | Sizes : Single, double, king, super-king

Sustainably made in the UK
Feels super soft and plush
Crafted with naturally cooling cotton
Incredible price tag
Polyester filling might not be as breathable as others
Not super thick

This isn't just any old mattress topper. This is an M&S mattress topper. Whilst there are plenty of big-name sleep specialists who could have taken the spot for the best budget mattress topper, for me, it had to be the M&S one. It's the perfect balance of price and performance.

Having slept on mattress toppers that cost £30 (as well as some that cost £3,000) I think that the £70 price tag of this is the sweet spot. If you start skimping any more, you won't get the breathable cotton case that the M&S topper comes with. Instead, you'll get a synthetic material like polyester, which can irritate your skin and it'll make you more sweaty.

Having slept on the M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper, I can confirm that it's true to its name. I was both comfortable and cool in the night. This is a lot like lying on top of a duvet, so it doesn't feel like it's really supportive, but it's enough to take the edge off a firm mattress.

Whilst the cotton felt soft to touch and certainly helped the breathability of my bedding, it didn't actively cool me. I would say that this was cool in comparison to the memory foam models, for example, and it was cooler than all the other cheap mattress toppers that I've tested, but this won't cure your night sweats.

So, if you want a light layer that comes with some nice eco-credentials (including the fact that it's made in the UK), this is an inexpensive mattress topper. It'll do more than a good job, but there are other models in the list that offer a bit more

You can find out more in my full M&S Comfortably Cool Mattress Topper review.

Best cooling mattress topper

Image 1 of 8

Woolroom Deluxe Wool Mattress Topper

This is the Woolroom Deluxe Wool Mattress Topper on a bed. It's a press shot, but if you click the arrow, you can see my own pictures too (Image credit: Woolroom)
Image 2 of 8

packaged woolroom mattress topper on top of bed

This is the bag that the Woolroom Deluxe Wool Mattress Topper comes in (Image credit: Emily Smith)
Image 3 of 8

Corner of woolroom mattress topper

Here's the corner of the Woolroom Deluxe Wool Mattress Topper on Emily's bed (Image credit: Emily Smith )
Image 4 of 8

picture of woolroom mattress topper on mattress

This is a wider shot of the Woolroom Deluxe Wool Mattress Topper on Emily's bed (Image credit: Emily Smith )
Image 5 of 8

woolroom mattress topper with 5KG weight on top

We test the motion transfer using a dumbbell, here it is in action (Image credit: Emily Smith)
Image 6 of 8

corner of woolroom topper showing elastic fastenings

This is the elastic strap that holds the Woolroom Deluxe Wool Mattress Topper on the bed (Image credit: Emily Smith )
Image 7 of 8

Woolroom mattress topper folded on top of mattress

Here's the Woolroom Deluxe Wool Mattress Topper folded on Emily's bed (Image credit: Emily Smith)
Image 8 of 8

woolroom pillow unzipped to show the wool filling inside

This is the filling in all Woolroom models (Image credit: Future | Tamara Kelly)

3. Woolroom Deluxe Wool Mattress Topper

Best cooling mattress topper

Type: Wool | Firmness : Soft | Thickness : 4cm | Sizes : Single, double, king, super-king

Hypoallergenic for sensitive skin
Naturally breathable and soft
Sustainably made from organic, luxury, British materials
Needs re-plumping
Expensive 
Won't transform an old mattress

This is easily one of the most luxurious, natural mattress toppers that I've ever tested. It felt wonderful to sleep on, both for the quality of my sleep, but also for all of the work that goes in to making one of these mattress toppers. They feel really, truly special.

If you've not researched it before, wool is one of the best options for hot sleepers. Surprisingly, it's really breathable and, therefore, naturally cooling. And this isn't just any wool. All of it is sourced from the Chatsworth estate in England. If you want to, you can trace the sustainable manufacturing process for yourself.Once collected, the wool is encased in an unbleached organic cotton case. This does mean it's not quite bright white, but I actually liked the off-stone colour.

As if that wasn't enough, this is certified by the Allergy UK Seal of Approval, meaning it has been tested for dust mites, allergen, bacteria and fungus. So, whether you have sensitive skin, or you just want to avoid adhesives and chemicals, this is a gentle option, especially if you pair it with the coordinating Woolroom Deluxe Mattress Protector.

The best way to describe sleeping on the Woolroom Mattress Topper is by comparing it to sleeping on a duvet — but a really, super thick one. It's a wonderfully cushioning layer, but is not the most supportive, so you'll want a firm mattress underneath you to keep good spinal alignment. Also, make sure to re-plump this, otherwise it'll become very flat.

You can find out more in Emily's full Woolroom Washable Mattress Topper review. I also have this on my bed at the moment, which speaks for itself, I think.

Best mattress topper for back pain

Image 1 of 8

Panda mattress topper review by Louise Oliphant in test

This is the Panda Bamboo Mattress Topper next to its box. Click on the arrow to see Louise's pictures of it in her room (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 2 of 8

Panda mattress topper review by Louise Oliphant in test

This is what the texture of the Panda Bamboo Mattress Topper looks like on the bed (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 3 of 8

Panda mattress topper review by Louise Oliphant in test

There are lots of nice details on the Panda Bamboo Mattress Topper, such as this little face (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 4 of 8

Panda mattress topper review by Louise Oliphant in test

Here's the Panda Bamboo Mattress Topper box in Louise's house (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 5 of 8

Panda mattress topper review by Louise Oliphant in test

You can see the Panda Bamboo Mattress Topper spread over Louise's bed, ready for testing (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 6 of 8

Panda mattress topper review by Louise Oliphant in test

We use dumbbells to test the motion transfer of our toppers. Here's the test in action with the Panda Bamboo Mattress Topper. (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 7 of 8

Panda mattress topper review by Louise Oliphant in test

Here's the packaging for the Panda Bamboo Mattress Topper on Louise's bed (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )
Image 8 of 8

Panda mattress topper review by Louise Oliphant in test

This is how the Panda Bamboo Mattress Topper attaches itself to the bed. The straps are really secure (Image credit: Future / Louise Oliphant )

4. Panda Bamboo Mattress Topper

Best orthopaedic mattress topper for back pain

Type : Memory foam | Firmness : Medium-soft | Thickness : 3cm | Size : Single, double, small-double, king, super-king

Incredible value for what it is
Crafted from responsibly sourced, sustainable materials
Cooler than other memory foam options
Great for joint pain and pressure relief 
Memory foam is naturally insulating, even if it's designed to be 'cooling'
Too soft for some people

No mattress topper can claim to alleviate back pain. You'll need an osteopath or spine specialist for that. However, if you suffer from generic joint pain and pressure issues when you lie on your normal mattress, a memory foam model is a great option for you. This one in particular.

I'm a very keen runner, which means that my knees, hips, and spine are falling apart. The weeks that I slept on this were some of the best that I've had in years. The sink-in softness of the memory foam felt instantly soothing and I had lots of deep spine clicks as I was lying down. Unlike other memory foam options that I tested, this was relatively refreshing too. Normally, the spongy texture can feel cloying and warming. Whilst I would say that 'cooling' is a bit of a stretch, I certainly didn't wake up feeling hot or sweaty. Then, when I put some bamboo sheets on the topper, it really was cooling. I even had to switch them out in September because I was getting too cold.

That's not the end of it either. One of my favourite things about the Panda mattress topper is its eco-credentials. This comes in a bamboo case that is removable and washable. Then, the memory foam is also crafted from bamboo, so you know that it's not packed with nasty chemicals. Even the adjustable elastic straps are crafted with responsible materials — and these are really effective at keeping this still and secure on the bed, without misshaping the topper.

There are thicker memory foam mattresses out there, so if you have a really hard mattress, you might want to assess some other options (including Dreams' Tempur's). However, for most people, this cushioned, eco-conscious option will be a dream come true.

You can find out more in my Panda London Bamboo Mattress Topper review.

Best cooling mattress topper

Image 1 of 16

Eight Sleep Pod 3 on a coloured background

This is the Eight Sleep Pod 3 next to its base station. Click on the arrow to see my pictures of it (Image credit: Eight Sleep)
Image 2 of 16

Eight Sleep Pod 3 on a bed, in its boxes

On the left, you can see the base unit for the Eight Sleep Pod 3 and then on the right is the Eight Sleep Pod 3 topper before it's unfolded (Image credit: Future)
Image 3 of 16

Eight Sleep Pod 3 in its boxes on the bed

These are the boxes that the Eight Sleep Pod 3 arrived in (Image credit: Future)
Image 4 of 16

Eight Sleep Pod 3 on a bed, unboxed

Here's all the parts of the Eight Sleep Pod 3 on the bed, including the packaging (Image credit: Future)
Image 5 of 16

Screenshots of general information and insights offered by the Eight Sleep Pod 3

Here's the data from the Eight Sleep Pod 3 app (Image credit: Future)
Image 6 of 16

Eight Sleep Pod 3 cooling settings set in the app

And some more data (Image credit: Future)
Image 7 of 16

Screenshots from the Eight Sleep Pod 3

and yet more data (Image credit: Future)
Image 8 of 16

Eight Sleep Pod 3 bag and unit

This is the bag that you can store the Eight Sleep Pod 3 in (Image credit: Future)
Image 9 of 16

Screenshots of the bio information from the Eight Sleep Pod 3

Here are some more screenshots of the app (Image credit: Future)
Image 10 of 16

Eight Sleep Pod 4 Ultra on a bed in a bedroom, it's angled, showing off the special, shape sensitive features of the topper

This is a press shot of the Eight Sleep Pod 4, a newer model that shapes your bed to keep you cocooned (Image credit: Eight Sleep)
Image 11 of 16

Screenshots of the Eight Sleep Pod 3 app

Here's some more screenshots (Image credit: Future)
Image 12 of 16

Screenshots of the Eight Sleep Pod 3 app setting up the water tank

And this is me setting up the app (Image credit: Future)
Image 13 of 16

Screenshots of the Eight Sleep Pod 3 app

This is the autopilot setting that interferes in your bed to keep you asleep (Image credit: Future)
Image 14 of 16

The Eight Sleep Pod 3 on a bed in a bedroom

Here's the Eight Sleep Pod 3 on a bed (Image credit: Eight Sleep)
Image 15 of 16

Eight Sleep Pod 3 topper on a green double bed

This is the corner of the Eight Sleep Pod 3 on my bed at home (Image credit: Future)
Image 16 of 16

Eight Sleep Pod 3 mattress topper on a green bed

This is the Eight Sleep Pod 3 on my bed. It has a lovely feel (Image credit: Future)

5. Eight Sleep Pod 3

Best cooling mattress topper

Type : Smart topper | Firmness : Medium-firm | Thickness : 25.4 | Sizes: UK double, UK king, UK super king | Guarentee: 5 years

Increcible, active cooling technology
Gives accurate bio stats (like a fitness tracker)
Can warm or cool depending on time of year
Will wake you up and coach your sleep health
30 day trial period
By far the most expenisve option
Bulky unit to fit by your bed
Sometimes it makes noise when the water is running through it
Subscription costs too

I looked at a lot of cooling mattress protectors for hot sleepers when I was researching, because, when you're going through the menopause, finding ways to sleep in the heat or methods for cool down your bed can seem like an impossible challenge. Whilst there are plenty of breathable options on the market, the Eight Sleep Pod 3 is in a league of its own.

I need a whole article to write about exactly what this does (luckily, I have a full review over here), but the Eight Sleep Pod works on a few levels. First, it tracks your bio-markers, including your heartrate, body temperature, and VO2 max. Then, based on this, as well as your own personal goals, the mattress topper will run cold or hot water underneath you to keep your body at a stable temperature that's optimal for sleep. You can manually adjust this, or let it interfere. I eventually let the topper do this itself, since it staged 'interventions', cooling itself to keep me in deep sleep over the night.

Aside from this, it will either vibrate or heat you awake instead of using an aggressive alarm and generally coach you towards better sleep health. It's comfortable and has optimised my sleep more than anything else in this guide. However, that comes with a cost. The first is that no bed is as comfy as mine. It's even ruined luxury hotel beds for me. The second cost is exactly that: the price tag. This is ten, even twenty, times the price of the other models in this guide, so it's a very serious investment. If you want full access to the controls, you'll have to pay a subscription fee too, which feels a bit cheeky. In spite of this, I wouldn't change a thing about my investment. This is the best mattress topper that I've slept on. It's just a shame that it's so expensive.

You can find out more in my full Eight Sleep Pod 3 review.

Best mattress topper for side sleepers

Image 1 of 9

TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper on a bed, rolled up

This is the TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper on top of the bed (Image credit: Dreams)
Image 2 of 9

TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper unboxed on the bed

Here's the bag that the TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper arrived in (Image credit: Future)
Image 3 of 9

The TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper rolled and vacuum packed on the bed

Here's the bag that's inside of the dust bag. It keeps the TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper compact (Image credit: Future)
Image 4 of 9

TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper on the bed

This is the TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper flattened over my bed (Image credit: Future)
Image 5 of 9

A glass of water on the TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper

This is a glass of water on the TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper to test motion transfer (Image credit: Future)
Image 6 of 9

Shot of the texture of the TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper

This is the texture of the TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper. It's really soft (Image credit: Future)
Image 7 of 9

The side profile of the TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper with the topper over it

Here's the TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper fitted on top of my bed, with a protector on top of it (Image credit: Future)
Image 8 of 9

The straps and underside of the TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper

This is the elastic strap that holds the TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper in place (Image credit: Future)
Image 9 of 9

A tape measure showing the depth of the TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper

Here's a measurement of how deep the bed becomes with the topper on (Image credit: Future)

6. TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper

Best mattress topper for side sleepers

Type : Memory foam | Firmness : Medium | Thickness : 4.4cm | Sizes : singe, double, king, super king

Really thick and soft layer that makes even firm mattresses soft
Light structure makes it cooling (for a memory foam mattress)
Stays in place on the bed without straps
Doesn't need to be left to rest
Chemically smell when first opened
More expensive than other options, even though it doesn't have sustainable credentials

The TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper has all the buzzwords that make me excited for a night of sleep: gel, cooling, thera(py). Just based on that, I was intrigued. Essentially, what the name translates into is a cooling, memory foam mattress topper, perfectly designed for side sleepers.

I can often choose what position I sleep in — I know, lucky me — so I made sure to sleep on my side the whole time that I used this. Now, because I do a lot of running, sleeping on my side would normally give me hip, back, and shoulder pain, especially because my mattress is firm. However, with this thick layer of super soft foam, I felt supported and cushioned all night long.

Memory foam can be quite hot and cloying and, whilst I wouldn't say that I woke up sweaty, I also wasn't cold. Instead, I would say that my body temperature didn't change and I woke up feeling fresh, which is cooling for a memory foam mattress topper, I suppose. The trouble is, I'm comparing it to the cooling technology of the EIght Sleep Pod 3.

This was easy to fit on the bed and I didn't need to give it any rest time like other toppers. It kept motion transfer low and held its position, firmly on my bed all night long. If this had better sustainable credentials, it would be higher up in this buying guide. However, for now, position six is still a good claim.

You can read more in my full TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper review.

Best natural mattress topper

Image 1 of 4

Floks Wool Mattress Topper texture

(Image credit: Future)

This is the texture of the Floks Topper. It's really soft and comfortable to lie on.

Image 2 of 4

Floks Wool Mattress Topper elastic strap

(Image credit: Future)

The elastic straps on the bottom of the topper hold it firmly in place

Image 3 of 4

Floks Wool Mattress Topper  on the bed

(Image credit: Future)

You can see the Floks reaches all four corners of the bed perfectly

Image 4 of 4

Floks Wool Mattress Topper corner

(Image credit: Future)

This looks slim on the bed, but it feels like a full, luxurious layer added on top of the mattress

7. Floks Wool Mattress Topper

Best natural

Type : Wool | Firmness : Medium | Thickness : 7cm | Sizes : Single, double, king, super king

Naturally effective at keeping hot sleepers cool
Hypoallergenic and asthma friendly
Very sustainable brand and composition
Dry clean only
Expensive

You spend one third of your life asleep and I've always lived (and slept) by the principle that you should keep chemicals as far away from you as possible. That's why the Floks Wool Mattress Topper is one of my favourites from a cooling, comfort, and eco-conscious perspective.

Crafted from traceable British wool and unbleached Egyptian cotton, the Floks Mattress Topper certainly ticks a lot of boxes for sustainability. The B Corp brand has managed to create an ultra-natural mattress that smells a little 'earthy' at first, but that enhances its credibility. I have been sleeping on this for months and it's brilliant.

To add to the Floks many, many impressive credentials, the combination of wool and cotton is really effective at naturally keeping you cool at night. I am a hot sleeper and I found myself getting longer, deeper nights of sleep when I put this on my bed. I even had someone going through menopausal night sweats test it out and she gave it a thumbs up saying "my skin felt fresher and clearer when I woke up. I didn't think a topper could make that much difference for me."

You can find out more in my full review of the Floks Luxury Wool Mattress Topper.

Best hypoallergenic mattress topper

Image 1 of 6

The White Company Hypoallergenic Topper unboxed on the bed

(Image credit: Future)

Here's what the Hypoallergenic Comfort Topper looks like rolled up on a bed. It's surprisingly compact.

Image 2 of 6

The White Company Hypoallergenic Topper end of bed

(Image credit: Future)

The elastic straps that hold The White Company's Hypoallergenic Topper are easy to slide around the mattress and they keep it in place too.

Image 3 of 6

End of bed with The White Company Hypoallergenic Topper

(Image credit: Future)

You can see that this is a good fit on the bed, even when it's fresh out of the packaging.

Image 4 of 6

The White Company Hypoallergenic Topper from the side

(Image credit: Future)

This is the delicate texture of The White Company's Topper.

Image 5 of 6

Texture of the The White Company Hypoallergenic Topper

(Image credit: Future)

You can see it offers 6cm of sink-in softness.

Image 6 of 6

The White Company Hypoallergenic Topper stitching

(Image credit: Future)

Here's another angle of the topper's texture. It looks good enough to sleep on.

8. The White Company Hypoallergenic Comfort Topper

Best hypoallergenic

Type : Hypoallergenic | Firmness : Soft | Thickness : 6cm | Sizes : Single, double, king, super king

Quality, quilted design
Easily fits on the bed and stays in place
Surprisingly affordable
Comfortable to sleep on
Polyester won't suit hot sleepers

If I told you that The White Company's Mattress Topper is one of the most comfortable models on the market, you won't be surprised. You also wouldn't be surprised to know that it's one of the best quality toppers too. What you might find surprising is that it's also affordable too.

With fistfuls of sleep credentials, this had to have a place in our buying guide. It's 6cm deep, adding a gorgeous layer of plushness to your bed. It's soft and comfortable to sink into, perfect if you've ended up sleeping on a mattress that's a little too firm for your liking. Where this really shines is that it's certified as hypoallergenic and really easy to keep clean, so if you have sensitive skin, you can run this through as many washes as you need to.

As one of The White Company's more affordable offering, the Hypoallergenic Comfort Topper comes with a few compromises. It's filled with polyester, which isn't as helpful for temperature regulation as wool. However, the luxurious cotton casing helps to balance this out, offering a breathable layer under your skin.

You can find out more in my full review of The White Company's Hypoallergenic Comfort Mattress Topper.

What we're currently testing

To stay on top of the game (and the bed), I'm still working on reviewing other mattress toppers. There are three exciting ones that will be strong contenders for this list. Here are my initial thoughts on them.


How we test mattress toppers

TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper on the bed

This is the TheraPur ActiGel Cool Mattress Topper on my bed. We have a series of tests that all of the toppers go through and we take pictures to show you each one (Image credit: Future)

At woman&home it's really important that all the reviews and recommendations that you read are based on our authentic, in-person experiences and reviews. Louise, Emily, and I have been working hard, testing mattress toppers from a range of brands for years upon years to create this list. Here's how.

As a sleep obsessed writer, I make it my business to know what the latest news is in the world of sleep. So, if there's chatter around an old-but-gold or new and disruptive mattress topper on the market, I make it my business to know everything that there is to know about it.

Once I've done my research, I, or one of the team, will test the topper, sleeping on it for weeks, if not months, so that we can give you a full review of what it's like. The reviews will cover unboxing and setting up. Some of these need to be left to rest and breathe, others come in vacuum-packed rolls, and others come with sustainable wraps or storage bags. However it arrives, a heads-up is always nice.

Once it's on the bed, I have a few things to make notes on. First, how it fits on: does it use straps, elastics, or a grippy underside. I'll keep an eye on how well these fixtures keep the mattress in place overnight, because you don't want your topper to slide.

Then, I'll test motion transfer with a glass of water or a dumbbell. Normally, how much your bed moves is down to the mattress, but the topper can make a difference too. After these formal tests, I'll get sleeping. I track my sleep, so I always like to look at my graph of sleep compared to how well I sleep on the bed without the topper over the course of a month. Each night, I sleep in a different position (thankfully, I'm someone who can do that), thinking about whether my body is supportive, comfortable, and kept at a nice temperature. If there are other features that make the topper special, I'll note these down to test and comment on. There's no stone left unturned.

After all that, I'll think about how the topper that I'm testing compares to the best mattress toppers out there. After all, you only want to know about the good ones. I'll write down a comparison between the topper and one claiming to offer similar features. I often look around a similar price bracket, so you can get a sense of value for money.

I'll conclude by answering who it suits and whether you should buy it. This will be a different answer depending on what position you sleep in, whether you're a hot sleeper, and your budget. I always give alternatives for people who the topper doesn't quite suit.

You can visit our dedicated page for how we test mattress toppers if you want to find out more.

How to choose the best mattress topper

Best mattress topper woolroom

(Image credit: Woolroom)
  • Sleep style and firmness: The position you sleep in is the biggest thing to consider when choosing a mattress topper. For example, if you sleep on your side, you'll need a mattress topper that has a cushioned pillow-top so that the hard points of your joints can sink into the surface. Front and back sleepers however will need a firmer surface so your spine does not sag out of shape.
  • Material: The material you choose depends on whether you'd prefer a soft or firm bed. If you want something cushioning for joints (side sleepers - we're talking to you), a memory foam mattress topper will be better. If you'd prefer a firmer bed, hybrid and latex mattress toppers are best.
    You should also consider any additional sleep needs like whether you have allergies or tend to sleep hot. Wool and synthetic mattress toppers are more breathable and better for those with allergies. Look for gel or charcoal infused foam toppers and those with cooling bamboo or cotton casing if you suffer from night sweats.
  • Size: Selecting the right size for your bed is essential to its performance. If you're unsure about what size your mattress is, it's worth measuring to see make sure your topper will fit correctly and cover all surface area.
  • Price: Dr Deborah Lee partner of Get Laid Beds explains that a good mattress topper should 'strike a balance between quality and affordability. While it's crucial to invest in a mattress topper that meets your comfort needs, it's sensible to explore options within your budget to find the best value.' You should also consider the state of your current mattress. Are you looking to buy a topper to prolong it's life, or simply add some extra cushioning as your wear your new one-in? Compare how much money you'll save with a topper vs how much it would be to purchase a brand new mattress.

FAQs

Why use a mattress topper? 

Mattress toppers up comfort-levels on any bed to help you sleep better. Whether the bed you sleep on each night simply isn't as comfortable as you like, you have a spare room, with an old mattress that needs sprucing up for when guests come to stay, or you're going on holiday and can't sleep without your 'creature comforts'. They can alter firmness, offer support to alleviate joint pain and give an old, uncomfortable bed a new lease on life.

Mattresses themselves are built to last a long time, which often explains their high price point. But your sleep-preferences may change sooner than you're due an upgrade. Mattress toppers are a cost-effective way to tailor your bed to what you need now, without having to pay for a brand new bed.

Maybe you're wanting to try out the feel of foam, or wool, or feather. Buying a new mattress is a big investment, and you'll pay the price if you get it wrong - literally. Getting a mattress topper is a great way to try out whether a change in mattress material would work for you.

Should your mattress topper go under or over a mattress protector? 

As Rhiannon Johns, interior designer and head of brand at Piglet in Bed explains, 'when using both a mattress topper and protector, you should put your mattress topper on top of your mattress, followed by the mattress protector. This ensures that not only your mattress is protected, but the topper too, keeping dust mites and bacteria at bay.'

How deep should my mattress protector be?

There isn't a one-number-fits-all recommendation for how thick your topper should be, because every sleep style requires different depths. Most experts will recommend starting with 3-inch mattress toppers and then adjusting depending on how you find it. If your mattress is older, less supportive, and more uncomfortable to sleep on, a thicker topper will be more helpful. A thinner topper will make smaller changes to your mattress, such as temperature regulation. Depending on what you need, your topper will deliver different results.

Can a mattress topper help to revive an old bed?

Experts recommend changing your mattress every ten years, so if yours is past its expiry date, you'll need to invest in a new mattress. However, Mark Temlett, Founder of Naturalmat, says, "if you are struggling to achieve a comfortable night's sleep, consider investing in a high-quality mattress topper. This addition to your mattress will provide extra comfort and support precisely where it's needed. At a fraction of the cost of a new mattress, a high-quality topper can make a remarkable difference, especially when made from natural and organic materials. Allowing you to experience ultimate comfort, breathability and temperature control with every night's sleep."

Can a mattress protector actually help with joint or back pain?

Whilst you should always see a medical professional for back and joint pain, our experts speak from experience when we all say that, yes, toppers can really help. Memory foam can help to provide comfort and cushioning around joints, whilst latex mattresses can help with spinal alignment for back ache. I personally get a lot of joint pain and find that my bamboo topper makes a huge difference.

Are mattress toppers any good for side sleepers?

Mattress toppers can be invaluable for side sleepers. When you don't lie flat, you can create poor spinal alignment, adding unnecessary pressure to your hip, back, and shoulders. Chosen correctly, a topper can help to restore your alignment, redistributing weight more evenly across your body.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/best-mattress-topper/ D7EXcJbJ7E6TEjofWSKiqT Mon, 04 Mar 2024 19:31:13 +0000
<![CDATA[ Best wellies for women: the top 6 practical yet stylish boots, tried and tested ]]> The best wellies for women aren't just about staying dry when it's raining. Your perfect pair will prove to be a practical year-round option whether you're dodging puddles in spring, going for a dog walk or dancing in a muddy field at a festival.

Like the best waterproof jackets, wellies play a key part in any capsule wardrobe, especially with our unpredictable weather. However, before now, wellies have been an item I haven't wanted to spend much money on, preferring to splurge on fancy heels and trainers instead. That is until I took the plunge and added the royal-approved Le Chameau wellies to my wardrobe.

The warm neoprene lining and supportive sole just go to show that the best wellies are really worth investing in. They're a lot more technical than a pair of ballet flats, so deserve careful consideration and a bit more research. Most people might only have one or two pair of wellies in their shoe collection, and a good quality pair can last you years - or even decades if you familiarise yourself with how to clean wellies.

To help you decide, we've tested the very best styles out there. These are the six we genuinely recommend...

The quick list: top 6

Best wellies for women: tried and tested by our fashion experts

Best wellies for walking

Caroline Parr wearing Le Chameau in two images

(Image credit: Caroline Parr )

1. Le Chameau Vierzonord Wellies

Best wellies for walking

Price: RRP £220 | Size Range: UK 2.5-9 | Colours : brown, black, dark green and light green | Material : rubber and neoprene | Fastening : slip on with adjustable tightening strap

Cosy colour pop 3mm neoprene lining
Impressive quality
Very comfortable
Slim fit might be too narrow for some
Neoprene lining could get overly warm in summer

I tested these myself, and to be honest, I didn't think I'd find a pair of wellies that I'd be willing to replace my 15-year-old Hunter favourites with. How wrong I was!

They are undeniably beautiful, which isn't a word I ever thought I'd use about a practical item like wellies. What's more they're super toasty. The bright blue neoprene lining will not only brighten up a grey rainy day, it keeps you impossibly warm.

I have a cocker spaniel who takes some convincing it's time to go home whenever we're out walking, and the first time I wore these was on one of the coldest days of the year. Even with just a thin pair of socks on, they didn't rub in the slightest, and I was toasty warm.

The khaki colour is a winner for me (they're the wellies Kate Middleton wears), and although this royal-approved style doesn't come cheap, I can tell these sturdy wellies will last years.

The only thing I'd flag to anyone considering splashing the cash (pardon the pun!) is that if you have wide calves, shop for the wide calf section of the Le Chameau website, as these are very slim fitting. There's also a jersey-lined version of the Vierzonord if you wear your wellies a lot in the summer months. The neoprene lining could get a little too warm! If the price is a bit prohibitive, the Joules and Hunter options in our list have a similar look.

You can read more in the full Le Chameau Vierzonord Neoprene Lined Boots review

Best fashion wellies

Testing the Hunter Original Tall Wellington Boots

(Image credit: Charlie Bell )

2. Hunter Women's Original Tall Wellington Boots

Best fashion wellies

Price : RRP £120 | Sizing : UK 3-9 | Material : 100% rubber, 100% polyester lining | Fastening: Pull-on with a 100% metal buckle

Comfortable
Stylish
Versatile
Long-lasting
Premium price
Cold without thick socks underneath

Hunter, the standout favourite wellington brand, has been worn by many Royals from the late Queen to Princess Diana. More recently, Kate Moss has worn hers to Glastonbury, and they're a key part of Claudia Winkleman's Traitors outfits.

Deputy Fashion Editor Charlie Bell has been a fan of Hunter for years, and she says the Original Tall boots are truly worth the hype.

She says they offer great flexibility and support, and are very comfortable indeed. She tested hers on a long beach walk in Norfolk and reported that the Hunter Original tread pattern and grippy sole kept her sturdy on slippy surfaces. She would, however, recommend sizing up a little and wearing a thick sock in the winter, as they can be cold otherwise.

There are eleven different colours to choose from, as well as a glossy option, which Charlie opted for. She says they're just as sleek as a pair of knee-high boots but with the added bonus of being completely practical too. They wouldn’t look out of place in the city or the countryside and will work from wintry walk to summer festival.

Charlie's verdict? They're the perfect blend of fashion and function.

You can read more in the full Hunter Original Tall wellington boots review

Best wellies for wide calves

fitflop wellies

(Image credit: fitflop)

3. FitFlop Wonderwelly Short Wellington Boots

Best wellies for wide calves

Price: RRP £90 | Size range: UK 3-9 | Colours: Black or midnight navy | Fabric: Natural Rubber Mix upper and fabric lining | Fastening : Pull on

All-day comfort and support
Easy to clean
Versatile
Shorter style easier to store
Short height not ideal for deep puddles

With three kids and a dog, woman&home's Digital Editor Kerrie Hughes needed her wellies to be extremely convenient, practical and comfortable. She says she used to favour taller wellies, but more recently has found them to be restrictive in their movement, which isn't ideal when trying to keep up with a young family.

She found the FitFlop Wonderwelly to really love up to its name, thanks to the clever features and technology to keep your feet comfortable, dry and supported all day. The wide style enables you to easily slip them on from standing, and the wide leg allows for thick jogging bottoms or waterproof trousers to be tucked in.

Kerrie said: "As someone with wide calves, I often feel restricted by longer wellies, and these allow so much freedom and comfort." She also noted that the shorter style makes them so much easier to store at home.

Of course the downside of that is you can't go splashing in any really deep puddles, but if you're after more of an everyday style these will work well.

How about this for a feat of engineering: the insole is contoured to work with your foot's natural alignment, plus the heel is filled with impact-absorbing honeycomb cushioning. Finally, 'springboard' ridges at the forefront help put a spring in your step. What more could you ask for?

You can read more in the full FitFlop Wonderwelly review

Best everyday wellies

Julie Player weaing Merry People Bobbi boots

(Image credit: @julieplayerfashion)

4. Merry People Bobbi Wellington Ankle Boot

Best everyday wellies

Price: RRP £89.95 | Sizes : UK 3-12 (EU 36-45) | Colours: 16 options | Material : Quality natural rubber, neoprene lining

Stylish
Comfortable arch support
Traction sole
Warm neoprene lining
Wide range of colours to suit personality
True to size
Not as practical as full-length wellies if you're walking in very deep water

Freelance Fashion Editor Julie Player is always on the go, so she was the ideal candidate to try these all-rounders.

She says: "over the years I have had tried a variety of brands, from expensive Hunters to cheaper styles with cheerful prints from Joules and Boden, but regardless of price I have always found them uncomfortable to wear."

Until she met the Bobbi boot! Julie thoroughly put these through their paces on holiday in the Peak District, where she walked more than four hours a day on uneven terrain, as well as on a seaside trip in November.

Melbourne-based brand Merry People aim to bridge the gap between city and country life, and you've probably seen these Bobbi boots on social media recently.

The Bobbi boots are easy to pull on and have a roomy toe cap for wide feet. They feature impressive arch support, and they're easy to clean. The Chelsea boots style is very stylish, so few people would notice these are wellies if you wore them with jeans on a rainy day!

You can read more in the full Merry People Bobbi Wellington Boot review

Best adjustable wellies

two side by side images of wellies

(Image credit: Molly Smith)

5. Joules Houghton Adjustable Tall Wellies

Best adjustable wellies

Price : RRP £60 | Sizing : UK 3-8 | Material : Natural rubber & textile lining | Fastening : Pull-on with an adjustable buckle

Very comfortable
Affordable price
Suitable for long walks
Waterproof
Stylish
Limited colours

woman&home's Fashion Writer Molly Smith put these Joules wellies to the test, and as an avid dog walker who has just moved to the countryside, she was looking for some versatile wellies that would stand the test of time.

She tried a pair of chocolate brown wellies, which are very on trend for 2025, but they are also available in black, khaki or navy blue. She commented on how the adjustable detail meant you can get the perfect fit, whatever you're wearing with the wellies. It's a standout feature that makes them ideal for a range of calf sizes.

Molly went for a two hour hike through muddy fields and damp woodland, and she barely noticed them on her feet, they're that lightweight and comfortable.

She also fell in love with the matte finish and heritage checked lining, which adds a subtle, classic touch even if it's something you only see. She points out how impressive the price is compared to competitors too.

You can read more in the full Joules Houghton Adjustable Tall wellies review

Most affordable wellies

A blonde haired woman walks through grass wearing Barbour Mallow welly boots

(Image credit: Future)

6. Barbour Mallow Chelsea wellington boots

Most affordable wellies

Price : RRP £55 | Size range : UK 3-8, true to size | Fastening: Slip on | Material: Upper: 55% rubber/45% other, lining: 100% polyester, sole: rubber

Versatile style
Lightweight, but sturdy
Good price point for a designer brand
The shorter length means ankles can get chilly
The lighter colours get grubby easily

Jayne Cherrington-Cook is a daily dog walker, and considers herself to be a bit of a welly pro. She says she's learned from experience that wellies need to fit properly and shouldn't pinch or rub and, just like with the best walking boots, she always makes sure to leave enough space for thick socks in colder weather.

She's a convert to the Barbour Mallow Chelsea wellington boots. Barbour knows a thing or two about the great outdoors, and this modern take on Chelsea boots combines sleek style with serious weather protection. The chunky sole provides excellent grip, while the lightweight rubber construction means you won't feel weighed down, even on steep hills.

Although they won't handle ankle-deep puddles, they've protected Jayne through the glorious Great British weather, from muddy dog walks to snowy school runs and wet weekend errands. She notes that with knee high pairs, wearing jeans can be uncomfortable, but the Barbour Mallow will work with all your denim.

Surprisingly for a big name brand, they're the most affordable option on our list, plus they're incredibly low maintenance when it comes to cleaning. Hurrah!

You can read more in the full Barbour Mallow Chelsea wellington boots review

How we tested the best wellies

4 images of wellie testing

(Image credit: Jayne-Cherrington-Cook, Kerrie Hughes and Mollie Ward )

Between six members of the woman&home team, we tested a variety of the very best wellies available on the virtual high street.

And when I say tested, I mean tested. Long dog walks in the countryside, trips to the seaside in the winter, muddy festivals, long hikes, freezing cold conditions: we've done them all so you don't have to. We certainly haven't shied away from the muddiest terrain!

As with bras and trainers, we've put a lot of thought into how we test wellies so you can get the best overview when weighing up a wellie purchase.

We considered the following factors:

  • Comfort & fit - how comfortable are they on long walks? Do they rub anywhere or make your feet ache? Do they offer arch support?
  • Style - how they look is just as important as how they feel. Wellies should excite you, not just feel like a practical piece you have to wear!
  • Care & cleaning - to some, muddy wellies is something of a medal, but if you like to keep yours looking pristine you want them to be as easy as possible to clean. Can you give them a quick hose down at the end of a walk, or do you have to dismantle them to get them looking as good as new?
  • Longevity - some styles have been in our testers' wardrobe for months, some years. They've all lasted well to date, but will of course update our finding should they begin to wear out.

We've also spent time thinking about features that matter to a wide variety of people. From tricky wide calves to having young kids who love splashing in puddles, everyone will want something different from their wellies.

How to choose the best wellies

Unlike trainers or bras, the majority of people only own one or two pairs of wellies. Which makes investing in a new pair an even bigger decision. Here are a few things to weigh up when reading all of our reviews:

  • Price: how much do you want to spend? How often will you wear them? If you can afford to invest in the high priced options on our list, you won't be disappointed with the quality. But you want to make sure you wear them enough to justify the splurge!
  • Size: most websites have a size guide and it's well worth taking the time to study it. Think about the time of year you'll be wearing your wellies most, the outfits you want to wear them with, and what socks you'd choose to wear underneath. Blisters are so often the product of poor fit. If you’ve got wide feet, squeezing them into standard wellies can feel like medieval torture. Unfortunately, many wellies only come in a standard width, so unless you shop at a specialist welly brand, the other option is to try out men’s boots as these are often slightly wider than those designed for the female foot.
  • Colour: are you after a statement colour pop boot that will cheer up rainy days? Or perhaps classic black and khaki fit your style personality and wardrobe better.

FAQs

What boots to wear if you have big calves?

Finding wellington boots for larger calves can be a frustrating experience. Traditional styles often pinch and squeeze, leaving calves uncomfortable and restricted. This isn't just an aesthetic issue; it can impact mobility.

“Everyone has a different shaped leg, foot and ankle,” says Nina from Jileon, a family-run brand that creates wellingtons for people with wider calves. “It would be boring if we were all the same but the one thing we all want is a boot that is comfortable and allows the freedom to get on with activities unhindered.”

“We always advise people to measure themselves with clothing they plan to wear - jeans, welly socks etc - and also without so they can see which boots would work best for both options."

The key for finding the best wellies for larger calves is to look for those wellies that have an adjustable gusset on the calf. Alternatively, choose a specialist brand who offer extra wide boots. Jileon, for example, have extra wide boots that expand up to 57cm. Some brands like Hunter and Le Chameau also offer wider versions of their popular styles.

What are the most comfortable wellies?

Comfort is subjective, and the "most comfortable" wellies for you will depend on your individual needs and preferences. Just like when you’re shopping for your most comfortable trainers, comfort really depends on what feels good for you – and each welly boot has different things to offer.

“Short wellington boots, or ankle wellies, have become increasingly popular, not least because they are just so easy to throw on, making them more convenient, less cumbersome and more versatile on the fashion front,” says Celebrity stylist Miranda Holder.

“They pair well with everything from dresses and skirts to trousers, shorts and jeans, and are far easier to carry with you than their bulkier full-length counterparts.”

Most shorter wellies also come with the same technical benefits of the taller versions, making them a great choice for dog walks, commuting or a stroll in the country. For a leg-lengthening effect with shorter wellies, Miranda suggests choosing styles that end below your calf's widest point.

“If they do, you will end up highlighting this part and your legs will look heavier than they actually are,” she says. “There is a very simple way to get around this, and that is to layer the boots over a chunky sock or even a leg warmer, adjusted to the most flattering height.”

Ultimately, the best way to find the most comfortable wellies for you is to try them on and see how they feel.

Are expensive wellies worth it?

Celebrities sporting flashy Hunters and Barbours might leave you wondering if a pricier pair is worth it. The answer, according to Miranda, hinges on your "wear it out" factor.

“I would simply consider how frequently you’ll be wearing them and calculate the cost per wear,” she says.

“If you are likely to wear them regularly and go for long walks in them, then the improved construction, support, durability - and not to mention style - of a more expensive pair will be worth it. If on the other hand they are something you intend to throw on once in a blue moon, then save your money for a piece that will provide more value in your collection.”

Our experts agree that Le Chameau will fare well on long walks. personal stylist and welly lover Lindsay Edwards cites the brand as a good choice and says “their quality and craftsmanship is second to none.”

Celebrity stylist Miranda Holder says if you do a lot of walking then it is probably a good idea to invest in those boots at the higher end of the price scale. “If you are likely to wear them regularly and go for long walks in them, then the improved construction, support, durability - and not to mention style - of a more expensive pair will be worth it.”

What wellies do the royals wear?

Wellington boots have a rich royal heritage - they were named initially after Arthur Wellesley, the first Duke of Wellington in the early 1800s.

Kate Middleton, Meghan Markle, Zara Tindall and Princess Beatrice all love Le Chameau, while the late Queen and Princess Diana were both known to wear upmarket British brand Hunter.

What wellies do celebrities wear?

Wellies are not just practical footwear anymore; they're a genuine fashion statement. Ever since Kate Moss rocked her Hunters with denim cut-offs at Glastonbury, wellies have become an unexpected style icon. And it's no wonder – as Miranda points out: “In today's fashion landscape, there's a pair to suit everyone's style.

"Designers have really gone to town, elevating the boots to dizzying sartorial heights by producing them in every colour of the rainbow, all sorts of shapes, heights and every finish you can think of" says Miranda.

Claudia Winkleman is also a big fan of Hunters, and Victoria Beckham loves Le Chameau.

Our experts:

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/fashion/best-wellies/ xyB5kHQhPZHtdfLqikWGkY Wed, 28 Feb 2024 11:23:06 +0000
<![CDATA[ 7 of the best kettlebells for strength training at home, tried and tested by us ]]> A pick of the best kettlebells is handy to have in your collection if you want to get stronger at home. Ranging from 6kg to 30kg and above, they are a practical and versatile alternative to dumbbells.

Kettlebells are an excellent addition to strength training workouts for women, helping to strengthen the muscles and bones, challenge balance, and improve mobility. "Due to how they are constructed and how the weight is carried [under the ball] when performing kettlebell workouts, kettlebells have a unique impact on the body even compared to the best dumbbells and best resistance bands," explains Lewis Paris, award-winning trainer and strength training specialist.

As woman&home's digital health editor and a certified fitness instructor, I've been using kettlebells for years to work out from home. Over the last three years alone, I must have tested close to 50 sets in various settings, from gym workouts to home classes. For this guide, I collated a range from top retailers like Mirafit, Amazon, and Decathlon, testing them against an important list of criteria - including handling, variety of resistance, appearance, and price. I also delved deep into all you need to know to find the best kettlebells for your workouts, with help from certified experts.

The best kettlebells, tried and tested by us

How we tested the best kettlebells

Amazon Basics Cast Iron Kettlebell sitting on a table during testing, along with  Bodymax kettlebell. Mirafit kettlebell sitting on carpet with hand on handle

Digital Health Editor Grace Walsh, alonside Editor Kerrie Hughes, tested kettlebells during her workouts for over two weeks (Image credit: Grace Walsh / Kerrie Hughes)

Kettlebells are versatile by design, so I tested every weight in this guide - and a few more that didn't make the final cut - in various workouts. This included a kettlebell workout for beginners, which involved squats, overhead presses, deadlifts, and swings, and I did some core exercises at home with the lighter weights.

Along with strength training, I incorporated my kettlebells into a couple of stretching and mobility exercises, showing how adaptable these weights can be.

The kettlebells that made the final guide met the following criteria:

  • Handling: For me, it was important that all the kettlebells could be used with both a single hand (for one-arm rows, for instance) and double hands (for kettlebell swings), so I looked at the handle width. I also assessed how bulky the bell was and whether it was easy to handle the bell for goblet squats and similar exercises.
  • Variety of resistance: The weight you'll need for an upper-body exercise is unlikely to be the same as the one you'll need to do lower-body exercises, so it's important to have a range. That's why I included an adjustable option and ensured each kettlebell had various resistance options. You could find the right weight for your strength level and workout type without mixing and matching collections.
  • Appearance: While function is always more important than style with home workout equipment, that doesn't mean it shouldn't be a consideration. I included kettlebells suiting a range of styles, from sleek and simple black cast iron options to bright and bold colourways in various materials.
  • Wear and tear: I used my kettlebells through various exercises, bumping them around when it was safe to do so, to ensure they could stand up to the wear and tear of strength training workouts.
  • Price: Kettlebells are balls of cast iron (more often than not) on a handle, yet their prices can be eye-watering. I included kettlebells at various prices, with options for those on a budget and those looking to splash out on their home gym.

What is the best kettlebell for a beginner?

If you’re new to strength training, our experts recommend opting for lower-weighted kettlebells to get started. As you progress and become stronger, you can increase the reps of each exercise to challenge yourself further or invest in heavier bells.

“For a beginner, I'd recommend a cast iron kettlebell due to its versatility (as it has a wider handle and can be used for a range of workouts)," explains Paris. "I'd typically start at around 4kg up to 12kg, and suggest doubling up the weight so you have a pair of the same weight and size to work with. Depending on the exercise, you can focus on using one kettlebell and then add in another or increase the weight of your bell incrementally to challenge yourself further."

Can you get fit using kettlebells?

Kettlebells will take you a long way in your fitness journey. You can confidently build muscle and get stronger just by using kettlebells, with research published in the Cureus Journal showing that the weights can be used to boost strength, power, endurance, explosive power, and postural coordination.

However, a variety of equipment and workouts is best. "Variety opens up your exercise selection, which keeps things more interesting, especially when you have been training for a while," says Danni Tabor, a strength training specialist and the co-founder of Lift Studio LDN. You might like to try a weighted vest workout, for instance, or a gym dumbbell workout to complement your training.

Ultimately, there is no right or wrong way to train. If you enjoy exclusively working out with kettlebells, you should embrace it. You are more likely to develop a sustainable workout routine if you enjoy the exercise you are doing. "It all comes down to your goals, time, accessibility, likes and dislikes regarding training and exercise," Paris adds. "With a good variety of weights in your kettlebell arsenal, you can get fit and strong just using your kettlebell."

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/health-wellbeing/best-kettlebells/ DYoYuSjRiAbiwQPgWDN6Tm Tue, 27 Feb 2024 16:00:18 +0000
<![CDATA[ Best tinted lip balms for a soft pout and easy pop of colour ]]> The best tinted lip balms are a true handbag essential, providing the easiest, most flattering pop of colour, plus hydration and other skin benefits to boot. We've tested the best lip-loving formulas from brands like Dior, Summer Fridays, Rhode, ILIA and Fresh to bring you our essential top 12.

Every member of the woman&home beauty team has an arsenal of lip balms in every bag, and while some of the top picks in our guide to the best lip balms also feature in this roundup, here we took a closer look at pigment, shades and wearability for every product we tested.

Some of our top picks could easily pass for a lipstick but feature nourishing formulas that make them a lot more comfortable to wear. Others have a more conventionally balmy texture, and are the sort of low-maintenance product you can apply without having to look in the mirror. You could even keep these tinted lip balms on hand when wearing the best long-lasting lipsticks, so you can layer up for a striking finish without compromise on hydration. Tried and loved by our team, here are our top 12 picks.

The best lip balms, chosen by our beauty team

How we chose the best lip balms

A number of the products we tested when reviewing the best lip balms

(Image credit: Future)

Here at woman&home, we've got collective experience with hundreds of lip products, and know that a good lip balm can be one of the most important beauty purchases out there. To make sure we picked the best of the best, we've selected the top lip balms for different requirements, whether it's a vegan formula or something with a long-lasting tint. Every single product featured in this guide has been carefully vetted by our expert team.

How to choose the best tinted lip balm for you

When it comes to selecting the right tinted lip balm, take a close look at the following:

  • Ingredients: For long-lasting hydration, the typical lip balm will be packed with wax-based ingredients such as mineral oil, beeswax or lanolin. "If you suffer with dry lips, the best ingredients to look for in a lip balm are occlusive, emollient and humectant," explains Dr Daron Seukeran, Group Medical Director for skincare clinic group sk:n. Unsure which is which? Our guide to the best face moisturisers has a handy cheat sheet.
  • Fragrance: If you have parched or sensitive lips, Dr Seukeran advises, "Keep it simple. Many people like using a nice-smelling or tasting lip balm but it is best to use a non-fragranced lip balm, which also contains a sun protection ingredient."
  • Texture: Balms that are purely focused on skin-softening properties will often set into a more solid formula. Formulas like Summer Fridays Lip Butter Balm or rhode peptide lip tints are more liquid but come with active skincare ingredients such as vitamins E, D, A, and peptides.
  • Packaging: Some tinted lip balms should be applied with your finger, which could be a little messy if you're out and about. If you want a tinted balm that applies like a lipstick, we've selected a number of tubes that swipe on for subtle but buildable colour.
  • Pigmentation: Many tinted lip balms provide a subtle flush of colour, but others in our guide provide a bit more concentrated pigment, as well as a stain that will last throughout the day.
]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/best-tinted-lip-balms/ bf9PuCimE9WQ6fwaKFfu7a Mon, 19 Feb 2024 15:35:56 +0000
<![CDATA[ Milk perfumes are trending for summer 2024 - here are our best picks for a fresh, cosy scent ]]> From sweet hints of coconut to rich, velvety cream, these multi-faceted milk perfumes are truly food for the senses...

While the list of best long-lasting perfumes will always include the classics - from floral fragrances to citrus blends - with the rise in demand for skin scents, there's another genre of comforting but distinctive fragrances beginning to garner acclaim. But rather than relying upon musky and wood hints to give them that signature appeal, these perfumes draw on a different and potentially polarizing note - milk.

Now, of course, we're not asking you to retire your best perfumes for women in favour of dousing yourself in the semi-skinned milk you've got kicking about in the fridge. Nor do these scents draw any similarities to that sour smell that emanates from the bottle, post-expiry. Instead, they combine rich and delicate lactonic accords to capture everything, from the smooth nuttiness of an almond milk latte to the sweetness of whipped cream. So, if you're intrigued or already a fan of gourmand scents - here are nine milk-themed fragrances to add to your collection...

The 9 best milk perfumes to make your mouth water

Now, whether you're looking for a sweet, coconutty fragrance for summer or a comforting, everyday skin-like scent - that works for indoor and outdoor activities - these milk perfume picks are surprisingly versatile and smell good enough to eat (but please don't)...

What are milk perfumes?

  • Standout perfume notes: milk accords, latte accords, marshmallow, condensed milk and ice cream

Now that we've perused the most popular creamy scents on the market, let's now address the elephant in the room - what are milk perfumes, exactly?

Vicken Arslanian, founder of Commodity (a modern perfumery renowned for their hero Milk scent): "More commonly referred to as 'lactonics,' milk perfumes have notes or accords that evoke a glass of fresh milk, milky beverages or creamy desserts. They fall under the gourmand category, which are fragrances with food-inspired notes."

As for what notes constitute a "milk" perfume: "A variety of notes can be used to create a milk-like aroma. To name a few: milk accords, latte accords, marshmallow, condensed milk and dessert notes like rice pudding, ice cream and more."

Certain musk, cashmeran and wood notes can also afford a perfume that signature, milky softness.

Why are milk perfumes popular?

"Milk-like scents are becoming more and more popular because they bring a sense of cosiness and comfort to a fragrance," explains Arslanian, adding, "They call forth a fond childhood memory of eating milk and cookies or indulging in a favourite dessert."

They're also the perfect choice for those who steer clear of very heavy and powerful scents - like oud perfumes - or very feminine floral aromas. Milk perfumes are sweet but also often layered with woody and musky notes, to create a warm and subtle fragrance.

Are milk perfumes like skin-scents?

Yes and no, "Milky perfumes can be skin scents, but the two are not mutually inclusive," says Arslanian. You can find some creamy perfumes that are just that - and don't feature the tell-tale notes of a skin scent (like that of musk) though still offer a similar soft and comforting smell.

What seasons are milk perfumes best for?

"Milk perfumes can really be worn year-round," says Arslanian but, "traditionally, fragrance wearers gravitate toward lighter scents in the warmer seasons and heavier scents as the weather cools. Someone newer to fragrance may want to follow this trend to start and try a milky skin scent in the summer or a heavier version in the winter.

"For those familiar with fragrance and already know what they like, we encourage wearing a milky fragrance whenever you want. There are no rules."

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/milk-perfumes/ vFzTx3VGm5k2P5geJgQUpV Sun, 11 Feb 2024 07:01:58 +0000
<![CDATA[ The 9 best hair dryers for curly hair, reviewed by our curly experts ]]> The key to finding the best hair dryer for curly hair is ensuring a model caters to these hair types' specific and unique needs. Dryer requirements often focus on things like speed, power and heat – but it's not the same story for curls. In a way, they need the opposite, as a big whoosh of hot air will generate excess frizz and flatten curl patterns, resulting in a lack of definition. Sound familiar? Our expert beauty testers have the insights on the tools that won't do this.

Instead, the best hair dryer for our hair will be lightweight (drying gently means you spend a long time holding it) and have at least one setting that won't blast and disrupt delicate curls. A dryer that works with one of the best diffusers for curly hair is therefore hugely important. Eugene Smith, style director at John Frieda Mayfair, confirms this is the ideal way to dry curly hair: "The dispersed air allows the drier to evenly dry the curls without disturbing their natural spiral texture."

With all this in mind, I asked two more hair experts some of the most common questions on blow drying curls and put several hair dryers and diffusers to the test on my type 3a curly hair. This guide includes my detailed reviews of the top-performing models, drawing on my years of beauty editor experience testing dozens of hair tools, including picks from ghd, Dyson and Revlon.

Best hair dryers for curly hair deals

Get 17% off now

Enjoy a 17% saving on Revlon's coconut oil-infused hairdryer, which works to encourage long-lasting smooth and glossy strands. Its powerful airflow and ceramic tourmaline ionic technology allows for a fast drying process, while minimising frizz. View Deal

Get 37% off now

Get a decent 37% (more than £66!) off the tool that tops this guide, the ghd Helios Hair Dryer. Offering more styling control and added shine, this dryer boasts a lightweight and noise-reducing design that leaves your locks with salon-worthy results. View Deal

Get £70 off now

Make a notable £70 saving on Hershesons' The Great Hairdryer, beloved by hairdressers. This ultra-lightweight dryer has not only been engineered to avoid that dreaded arm ache but also to dry your locks in a speedy time. Equipped with Oxy Active Technology to help preserve hair colour and boost shine, while boasting a multiplying air flow, this quiet hair dryer is a must-have for achieving a salon-worthy blow dry. View Deal

Our top 6 best hair dryers for curly hair

The best hair dryers for curly hair, reviewed by our beauty experts

The best hair dryer for curly hair overall

A shot of the ghd hair drier alongside a shot of Senior Beauty Editor Rhiannon Derbyshire's hair after using it

How Rhiannon's curls looked after using the ghd Helios (Image credit: Rhiannon Derbyshire)

1. ghd Helios Professional Hair Dryer

Best hair dryer for curly hair overall

RRP: £179 | Diffuser type: Pronged | Heat settings: 2, plus cool shot | Speed settings : 2 | Weight: 780g | Included diffuser: No; extra £29

Brilliant all-rounder
Will last years of use
Fuss-free and hardworking
Available in different colors
Diffuser has to be purchased separately

I've had my Helios for years and it still works as well as the day I unboxed it. It's the dryer I always come back to, even after trialling countless tools over my decade in the beauty industry. It's just great. Unpretentious, extremely powerful and easy to use, it has simple controls and well-made attachments that come on and off with ease.

It's the first tool I'll recommend to anyone asking for the best hair dryer for curly hair, working just as well to diffuse curls as it does smoothing my hair on those (extremely rare) days when I can be bothered to try my hand at a sleeker blow dry. That you have to pay extra for the matching diffuser is, admittedly, a little annoying, but this still makes it cheaper than many of the other options on this list – so in my opinion, this balances things out to make it the top choice for curls. Sometimes I worry that this classic ghd dryer has taken a bit of a back seat in the hair tool world – ultra-fancy and higher-tech options seem to launch on a near-monthly basis. But I'll always be loyal to ghd; it's never let me down.

See our full ghd Helios review for a thorough guide to its capabilities

The best hair dryer for curly, coily and Afro hair

A shot of the Dyson Supersonic Hair Dryer alongside a shot of Senior Beauty Editor Rhiannon Derbyshire's hair after using it

The Dyson Supersonic Hair Dryer and how Rhiannon's curls looked after using it (Image credit: Rhiannon Derbyshire)

2. Dyson Supersonic Hair Dryer

Best hair dryer for curly, coily and Afro hair

RRP: From £329.99 | Diffuser type: Pronged cup | Heat settings: 3, plus cool shot | Speed settings: 3 | Weight: 659g | Included diffuser: Yes, and a wide tooth comb

Industry leader
Made to prevent damage
Comes with all the kit, plus a stylish box
Very quiet
Expensive

You knew this one was coming. The Dyson was always going to make this list; it really is as good as everyone says it is. My colleagues waxed lyrical about the Dyson Supersonic for months before I tried it, so needless to say my expectations were high. I'll admit I also had a tiny amount of pessimism in my back pocket. How good can one hair dryer really be?

Well, I can confirm it's worth the hype. It's lightweight, user-friendly and genuinely feels fun to use. I mostly loved how quiet it is; drying my mid-length hair can take forever, so by the end of the session my ears can start to feel a little sensitive. This was an absolute delight and my curls were left soft, defined, bouncy and definitely shinier compared to when I air dry them. Not only am I a fan, it's contributing beauty editor Lucy Abbersteen's go-to for drying her hair curly, too. She describes it as "the best combination" for curls, adding that many hairdressers agree. Though the brand has released two new dryers since the original, we still think this is a winning buy for curly hair. The scalp protect mode of the Dyson Supersonic Nural – one of the new tool's biggest draws – is a great feature, but isn't designed to work with the new and improved diffuser when you hover it close to your head. The Nural is still great and a noticeable level up, but you could save some money here and still get a great curly-compatible tool if you only want to diffuse your hair.

The wide tooth comb attachment, primarily for styling coily and Afro hair, coming as standard also sets Dyson dryers aside from others in this guide. I also love that it comes with so many different attachments as standard, making it a great, inclusive buy. Not so inclusive, however, is its price tag – though we will say that, in 2025, many dryers on the market are now a lot closer to Dyson-level pricing.

See our full Dyson Supersonic review for more details

Best cheap hair dryer for curly hair

Revlon Smoothstay Hair Dryer

The Revlon SmoothStay Coconut Hair Dryer (Image credit: Revlon )

3. Revlon SmoothStay Coconut Oil Hair Dryer

Best affordable hair dryer for curly hair

RRP: £30 | Diffuser type: Pronged | Heat Settings: 3 plus cool shot | Speed settings: 2 | Weight: 957g | Included diffuser: Yes

Incredibly affordable
Designed to dry with care
Combines ceramic and ionic technology
Heaviest on this list
Loud

Although I’d consider the best hair dryer for curly hair to be one of the bigger and most important beauty investments you can make, that doesn't mean you have to spend a fortune on one. This bargain tool is a perfect example of that. It costs a tenth of the price of the Dyson. A tenth. That's a discount to not... er, discount.

Though at first look this tool may appear to be quite no-frills, it stood out to me that it does feature some fairly impressive smoothing gadgetry, including both ionic and ceramic technology and a coconut oil-infused nozzle. While I can’t vouch for this coconut infusion working any noticeable shine-boosting magic, all this does clearly make for a dryer that puts hair health first, in my opinion.

As a simple, straightforward dryer, this one works well and the diffuser really helped to boost volume and lift my roots. It's louder and heavier than some of the snazzier and pricier options on this list, but if you're looking for something very affordable that won't compromise your curls, we think this is it.

Best versatile hair dryer for curly hair

A shot of the Shark FlexStyle with the diffuser on, next to a shot of Rhiannon's hair after using it

The Shark FlexStyle and how Rhiannon's curls looked after using it (Image credit: Rhiannon Derbyshire)

4. Shark FlexStyle Air Styler & Hair Dryer

Best versatile hair dryer for curly hair

RRP: From £269.99 | Diffuser type: Pronged cup | Heat settings: 3, plus cool shot | Speed settings: 3 | Weight: 700g | Included diffuser: Yes

5 tools in one
Light and easy to use
Great for travel 
A much more affordable take on the air styling technology 
If you only want to diffuse, you won't need all the extra bits and pieces

The FlexStyle is another multi-styler that launched with quite a lot of hype and swiftly built a reputation as one of the closest Dyson Airwrap alternatives. So, at first, I'll admit that it didn’t really register as a candidate for the best hair dryer for curly hair over a styling tool. However, it doubles as a standalone hair dryer – and a very good one, too. It's also incredibly pleasing clicking the styler into dryer mode, a very slick little twist and lock mechanism that feels a bit 007.

This hardworking bit of kit also comes with a diffuser as one of its six included attachments – and it's an especially clever one with a lever that can lower or raise the spikes. I haven't seen anything like it before; it means you can raise them towards the end of drying to give your roots an extra boost if you feel the need after more focused gentle drying. I was wowed before I'd even switched the thing on.

As for the actual drying, it's a dream – quick, easy and provides impressive volume when you use said clever lever. It is definitely louder than the Dyson Airwrap, though not dramatically so – and nowhere near enough to put me off. In fact, it may even have knocked my trusty ghd off the top "go-to-styler" spot. I'm also really excited to use all the other accoutrements on days when I want more of a blow-dried style.

If you don’t want or need all these added extras – the waving, the blow dry brush, et cetera – then I’d say you could stick to the original Shark Hair Dryer, which is a brilliant standalone tool. But seeing as it’s not dramatically more expensive, I’d wager you might as well have the extra bits that come with the FlexStyle, alongside the very light and travel-friendly dryer.

See our Shark FlexStyle review for more details on this versatile tool

Best travel-friendly hair dryer for curly hair

Trio of original images showing various angles of the Bellissima Prestige Diffon Supreme Hot Air Diffuser either laying on or held above a dusky pink fabric backdrop

(Image credit: Lucy Abbersteen)

5. Bellissima Prestige Diffon Supreme Hot Air Difuser

Best travel-friendly hair dryer for curly hair

RRP: £149.99 | Diffuser type: Pronged cup | Heat settings: 2, plus cool shot | Speed settings: 2 | Weight: 720g | Included diffuser: N/A; it IS a diffuser!

Does one job and does it well
Easy to use
Specially designed with curls in mind
It only dries hair curly, so not very versatile

In terms of attachments, this tool is the complete opposite to Shark FlexStyle as it's always a dryer-and-diffuser in one. But if you're only planning to use your new dryer to diffuser your curls, it's an ideal one-stop shop. It's a standalone diffuser with three heat settings and two power settings, so you can be as gentle as you want to keep that dreaded frizz from forming.

I've long recommended the original Bellissima diffuser as an affordable, easy hair dryer for curly hair – and Lucy agrees it's a great all-in-one tool – but the newer, swisher Prestige version is a perfect if you want something a bit more luxe. This updated version also features ceramic technology to aid a smoother, frizz-free drying session.

I enjoyed using this tool; it's pleasing that it's specifically geared towards defining curls and I liked how fuss-free the user experience was. However, I have to say that the results aren't massively different to the original Diffon, so if your budget is smaller I'd stick to that one. This tool is also more compact than other models, which makes it a great option for the best travel hair dryer if you only plan to wear your hair curly while you're away. Because nobody wants to risk frying their curls with the dodgy hotel dryer...

Best stylish hair dryer for curly hair

Hershesons The Great Hair Dryer and diffuser

Hershesons' The Great Hair Dryer with its diffuser (Image credit: Hershesons)

6. Hershesons The Great Hairdryer

The best stylish hair dryer for curly hair

RRP: £225 | Diffuser type: Pronged cup | Heat settings: 3, plus a cool shot | Speed settings: 3 | Weight: 294g | Included diffuser: Yes

Incredibly lightweight
Pleasant to use
Striking, stylish design
Expensive

Hershesons is one of my favourite spots in London to get a blow dry, so I was curious to see how its own brand dryer performed, especially when it comes to drying curls. (I have to admit, when I'm at a salon I do tend to opt for a swishy, straight blow dry – for the novelty factor, more than anything.)

Right off the bat, this looks so different to many dryers. It's got a slim, conical shape in a full-blown electric blue – even the cord and plug match, which is hugely pleasing. The roomy diffuser slotted in satisfyingly and it still felt incredibly lightweight and nicely balanced, not tipping at an angle with the attachment. It was very quiet, too, thanks to the petite motor.

Overall, I really enjoyed using this dryer; I normally find drying my hair a huge chore, but this tool really took that feeling away. It’s not the cheapest option for curly hair, but if you’re looking for a stylish, exciting newcomer that looks gorgeous on your dressing table and does it all, this is it.

Best hair dryer for long curly hair

A shot of the curlsmith hair drier alongside a shot of Senior Beauty Editor Rhiannon Derbyshire's hair after using it

The Curlsmith Defrizzion Dryer & XXL Diffuser and how Rhiannon's curls looked after using it (Image credit: Rhiannon Derbyshire)

7. Curlsmith Defrizzion Dryer & XXL Diffuser

Best hair dryer for long curly hair

RRP: £159 | Diffuser type: Pronged | Heat settings: 3 plus cool shot | Speed settings: 3 | Weight: 900g | Included diffuser: Yes, and a comb

A huge diffuser for speedy styling for longer hair types
From a curl-centric brand
Easy to use and effective
The big diffuser might not work as well on very short hair
A little bit loud

It makes sense that this curly haircare brand has created a drier specifically with curls in mind. They’ve focused their area of innovation on the diffuser, which is the biggest we’ve ever used – or seen. At eight inches, it's practically the size of a dinner plate. When you consider most hover at about half that (ghd's is just five), it's a pretty notable USP.

I used it on my relatively short, shoulder-length hair and I will admit that the diffuser felt a bit necessarily big for me. However, if you have long or very thick hair (or both), it will be a huge time saver.

Putting shape and curl definition at the forefront, this dryer uses a lot of hair health-boosting technology, like ionising and ceramic tech to prevent frizz. It also comes with a smoothing attachment, should you want to create a sleek finish, as well as a pik attachment for type 4 coils. In short, it's a brilliant option at a reasonable price point and the best hair dryer for curly hair created by a dedicated curl brand.

Best luxury hair dryer for curly hair

A shot of the Zuvi hair drier alongside a shot of Senior Beauty Editor Rhiannon Derbyshire's hair after using it

The Zuvi Halo Hair Dryer and how Rhiannon's curls looked after using it (Image credit: Rhiannon Derbyshire)

8. Zuvi Halo Hair Dryer

Best luxury hair dryer for curly hair

RRP: £329 with diffuser | Diffuser type: Pronged cup | Heat settings: 3 | Speed settings: 4 | Weight: 433g | Included diffuser: Yes

Designed for an ultra gentle dry
Sleek, stylish design
Ultra light and easy to use
Expensive

The Zuvi Halo is perhaps lesser-known than some of the tools from big-name brands on this list, but its launch had beauty editors really excited. Alongside air, it dries hair using light, not high heat, which makes it an extra gentle option. It's designed to emulate the way hair would dry in the sun – accelerated by light, not just heat. Curly hair types will know that air drying can be a nicer idea in theory than in practice, but this is still an interesting concept from a newer tech brand.

I was surprised by how much I was wooed by the slick design here. There's a reason it's been called the Tesla hair dryers; it's quite beautiful – light, slim and a little bit sexy. The low weight and the lights that illuminate when you switch it on make it a genuine joy to use, while the magnetic attachments click on satisfyingly and firmly – no slipping and sliding here. The ultra-gentle drying experience makes it one of the best hair dryers for curly hair because it prioritises care over speed or mega-watt power. It's sleek, high-tech and really innovative. I’m very impressed.

See our full Zuvi Halo review for more details

Best salon-style hair for curly hair

Bird's eye view of the Parlux Alyon hair dryer with two concentrator nozzle attachments and a diffuser

(Image credit: Stephanie Maylor)

9. Parlux Alyon Hair Dryer

Best salon-style hair for curly hair

RRP: £139.95 | Diffuser type: Pronged cup | Heat settings: 4 | Speed settings: 2 | Weight: 425g | Included diffuser: No but can be if bought as part of a set

Durable and reliable
Loved by hairdressers
Surprisingly light
Available in different colours
Not a very sexy option
No diffuser included

With so many all-singing, all-dancing hair dryers having launched in recent years – and continuing to hit the market – it’s easy to forget about the classics. But underestimate Parlux at your peril, because there’s a reason it’s been hairdressers’ dryer brand of choice for decades. (Several, in fact.)

This Italian brand is known for its durable, hard-working hair dryers, one of which you'll find in most hair stylists' kit bags – as has been the case for years and years. They're petite but powerful, creating a big blow dry with body in minutes. Though with some colourways you have to buy the compatible diffuser separately, Parlux does offer bundle deals, meaning there's a small saving when you buy it as one set. Either way it's a robust, sizeable attachment that will still work well on longer hair.

I forgot how much I liked the Alyon until I picked it up to re-test for this guide. It feels sturdy and reliable, while the smaller shape helps it feel light and useable. It's a little loud, but only compared to whisper-quiet output of some newer designs. If you're looking for a tool that will last you years – if not a decade – of regular use, this is the one.

See our Parlux Alyon hair dryer review for more details

How we tested the best hair dryer for curly hair contenders

A selection of the best hair dryers for curly hair tested for this guide from (left-right) Curlsmith, ghd, Zuvi, Shark and Dyson, set against a pale pink fabric backdrop

A selection of the curl-friendly hair dryers that were tested for this guide (Image credit: Rhiannon Derbyshire)

Each dryer in this guide was thoroughly tested and outperformed the contenders that didn't make it onto the final list. As all dryers were tested on my 3a curls, but I also looked out for signs that each one would suit other curl types, from tighter type 4 coils to looser type 2 waves. The models are generally universal, with notes in the specifications and reviews if it suits one particular kind specifically. After trying a broad range of the different tools on the market, I narrowed the list down based on the following factors.

  • Design and ease of use: An ergonomic design that wasn't too fiddly or weighty was a must, particularly given the extra time and care needed to dry curly hair types gently for soft and defined results.
  • Variety of settings: A good range of both speed and heat settings, including a cool shot, is a must to allow for customisable drying and the "low and slow" method. Mega power wasn't necessarily important factor here, as too much can be a direct route to excess frizz in curly hair types.
  • Innovative tech: Any features that were especially compatible with and styled curls well all scored points. These could have been be ionic technology (which helps to reduce frizz by balancing the ions in hair), ceramic element (helps with even heat and retaining moisture in the hair) or tourmaline (can reduce drying time and improve smoothness), for example.
  • Compatible attachments: A very important factor was the availability of a compatible diffuser attachment, while a comb attachment also scored points, to ensure that a tool could style various curly hair types. I wasn't too snippy about paying extra for attachments for an otherwise excellent dryer; it's nice to have as standard but including these in every box is arguably wasteful for those who won't use them (but that's a debate for another day).
  • Price: Advanced tech may go some way to justify a larger price tag, but these tools needed to be good value for money in line with their user experiences and results.

How to choose the best hair dryer for curly hair

When your goal is to order a dryer that's particularly suitable for curly hair, looking out for the following features is a good place to start.

  • Heat and speed settings: Especially important for styling, as curls need to be dried carefully at a lower temperature to help avoid damage and generating excess frizz.
  • Wattage: Those with curly, coily or wavy hair will benefit from a powerful wattage, between 1,800 to 2,000 watts, to help reduce drying time and potential damage.
  • Ion technology: Works to break down water molecules and spread moisture evenly throughout the hair. The result? Reduced frizz and static, sealed in moisture and a high-shine finish.
  • Ceramic and tourmaline: Both elements are worth looking for. Ceramic is ideal for those with delicate and/or damaged curls as it works to evenly distribute heat, yielding smooth and shiny results. Tourmaline, however, is ideal for a gentler approach, as it locks in moisture and allows for a shiny, frizz-free, salon-worthy finish.
  • Cable length: Beneficial in any hair dryer, a long cord comes in extra handy when diffusing curls as it makes it easier to move the dryer around – not to mention preventing you from being limited to the vicinity of a wall socket.

FAQs

How do you dry curly hair without ruining curls?

If you're using even the best dryer for curly hair in the wrong way, your curls can look undefined and flat – and even damaged. Afro and textured hair specialist Michelle Thompson, who is also an ambassador for ghd, has shared the best routine.

  • Step one: "First, semi-dry the roots by using a 'hover method' and slowly circulate [the dryer] around the curls towards the ends. This will help to prevent frizzing during the drying process.
  • Step two: "Once the hair is 60% dry, start to cup the curls into the diffuser, gently moving the dryer towards the root area, and hold for up to 10 seconds. This is called the "scrunch method". Doing this will enhance your curls, giving them volume and bounce.
  • Step three: "Make sure the scalp, roots and hair are 100% dry as this will give you a longer-lasting result."

Should I blow dry curly hair with hot or cold air?

Thompson advises using a low heat and speed setting to prevent frizz from forming; we recommend sticking to slightly warm air, usually the first setting on your dryer. A cold shot is good to lock in the style or for a quick blast if you're overheating, but it'll take a lot longer to dry it completely on this setting. Yes, extreme heat can seriously affect curls, but you'll need some of it if you want to get the job done in reasonable time.

Curly hair specialist and founder of TREPADORA Keisha Jo Lawler confirms you can get away with a slightly warmer heat when drying with a diffuser. "When using a diffuser in our salon we generally recommend our guests to use medium speed, medium temperature," she says. "The beauty of a diffuser is that it is not concentrated heat, so it is a lot gentler for your curls."

Is ceramic or ionic hair dryer best for curly hair?

Both of these technologies have their benefits, including when it comes to drying and styling curly hair. According to Smith, "Ionic is best suited for thicker, dry, and/or frizzy curly hair due to its ability to lock in moisture and leave behind a soft, smooth finish."

Thompson agrees: "The ionic technology produces negative ions while you dry and style to neutralize the positive static charge on hair which reduces frizz and flyaways."

Our expert panel

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/best-hair-dryer-for-curly-hair/ ksNqhoYFLKghCsm4cJJU9R Wed, 03 Jan 2024 12:01:56 +0000
<![CDATA[ The best weighted blankets to calm anxiety and get a restful night's sleep ]]> The best weighted blankets are ideal for those who suffer from anxiety or want to ensure a better night’s sleep. There are a variety of different weight options out there, and depending on your body weight and specific needs, it’s worth doing some research into what weighted blanket to get before you invest.

As one of the most-loved sleep aids and top self-care and wellness gifts all year round, weighted blankets work by recreating the feeling of a hug. They apply light pressure to the body, resulting in a feeling of calm that soothes anxiety and allows you to sleep easier. 

Little beads made of usually either glass or plastic make up the filling of a weighted blanket and the fabric casing is often a brushed cotton, polyester or soft fleece material. No matter the type of blanket you buy, the total weight should be 10% of your body weight. 

We tested many of the best weighted blankets for both sleeping and relaxing over several days and nights to round up a list of nine favourites. While deciding our selection of the best picks, we took weight, materials and how we felt while using them into consideration. 

The best weighted blankets, as tested by us

How we tested the best weighted blankets

A selection of the best weighted blankets as tested by Hannah Holway on a grey sofa.

A selection of the best weighted blankets as tested by shopping writer Hannah Holway.  (Image credit: Hannah Holway)

There were a few things we kept in mind when we tested the best weighted blankets, including:

  • Weight: As we've said, the weight your blanket should be is dependent on your own body weight. Despite this, I tried a few different weights to see if it made a difference to how relaxed I felt and how they operated as sleep aids.
  • Anxiety and sleep: As this is the purpose of a weighted blanket, I paid close attention to how I felt during and after using the blankets, asking questions such as: did I sleep better under it? Did I feel noticeably more relaxed?
  • Price: Weighted blankets are often at a similar price, but some of the more premium sleep brands such as Emma and Simba can charge a bit more for a blanket.

FAQ

How heavy is a weighted blanket?

There are lots of different weighted options out there when it comes to a weighted blanket, and often there are several weights to choose from when you purchase the blanket. Generally the lowest weight is 4kg, which is recommended if your body weight is around 40-50kg (or for a child or teenager - but children should never use a weighted blanket without adult supervision). The heaviest blanket we’ve seen is 9kg, which is recommended for someone with a body weight of around 90kg.

How to look after your weighted blanket

Fabio Perrotta, the director of buying at Dreams says knowing how to clean a weighted blanket is the first step to properly taking care of one. "Start by checking the care instructions provided by the manufacturer, as different blankets may have specific washing guidelines. For small stains, spot cleaning with a mild detergent and a soft cloth is often effective. If your blanket is suitable for it, you can hand wash it in a bathtub or large basin using a gentle detergent. Alternatively, many weighted blankets are machine washable - use a front-loading washing machine on a gentle cycle with cold water, however, make sure to check your washing machine load weight beforehand!" 

When it comes to drying, he says, air dry the blanket to prevent damage to the weighted inserts." Lay it flat or drape it over a railing, avoiding hanging it from a single point, which could stress the seams. Keep in mind that weighted blankets don’t require frequent washing, and using a duvet cover can make cleaning easier.”

Tips for using a weighted blanket

  • Make sure you’re using the right weight: Sammy Margo, a certified physiotherapist and sleep expert at Dreams says, “When using a weighted blanket, it’s crucial to make sure you’re choosing the right weight. Opt for a blanket that’s approximately 10% of your body weight." For example, if you weigh 65kg then your weighted blanket should be no heavier than 6.5kg. 
  • Start using a blanket gradually: “If you’re new to using a weighted blanket, start gradually, allowing your body to adjust by beginning with shorter durations and then increasing the time," says Margo. 
  • Opt for the right material for you: The physiotherapist also tells us that “you should consider the material of the blanket, especially if you’re sensitive to heat, as weighted blankets can be warm.” It's often why they are one of the best sleep aids for the winter months but not the best to use during the summer as the temperature rises.
  • Keep your head, neck and feet out of the blanket: For safety reasons, it's best to keep your head and neck out from under the blanket while sleeping. If your feet tend to get too warm in bed then shuffle them out from under the blanket as well. 
  • Sleep on your back: When it comes to finding the optimal sleeping position for your weighted blanket, try sleeping on your back first. This will help to evenly distribute the weight of the blanket across your body. 

How can weighted blankets aid with sleep and anxiety?

Weighted blankets are so valuable to those who struggle with anxiety or insomnia as they provide Deep Touch Pressure (DTP), Margo says, which simulates the sensation of being held or hugged. "This, in turn, can stimulate the production of serotonin and melatonin, promoting relaxation and better sleep. The gentle pressure from the blanket may also help reduce cortisol levels, contributing to a decrease in stress and anxiety. Many users report enhanced sleep quality and an overall sense of security and comfort when incorporating a weighted blanket into their routine."

She continues, "These blankets are often used in sensory integration therapy, making them beneficial for individuals with sensory processing disorders, autism, or ADHD." 

If you struggle with knowing how to fall asleep fast or find yourself waking up in the middle of the night and being unable to get back to sleep, a weighted blanket could help.

Sleep scientist and coach Dr Kat Lederle agrees. She says, “Weighted blankets provide deep pressure or touch stimulation. Humans are touch sensitive, so they convey safety and can calm us down. Because of the calming effect, it can help to reduce anxiety. Anxiety often gets in the way of good sleep, so using a weighted blanket of the right weight can help to lower activation of the sympathetic nervous system and instead activate the parasympathetic nervous system. When we are calmer, we find it easier to sleep.”

Dr Lederle also tells us: "Another factor that might help lower anxiety is that the blankets can give us a sense of being 'tucked in' and if this is something our parents used to do before saying good night, it can trigger happy, relaxing memories. However, there isn’t a lot of research or scientific evidence for this. They can safely be used by people who can remove the cover themselves, so not babies, children or frail adults." 

Can anyone use a weighted blanket?

In short, no. Those with circulation issues, elderly people, pregnant women, very young children and anyone with conditions such as sleep apnoea should not use a weighted blanket. 

Make sure you do your research before you buy a weighted blanket - and if you have a medical condition and feel unsure, definitely speak to your GP or another healthcare professional first.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/health-wellbeing/best-weighted-blankets/ WerdNpXNxHJqkuCDUV8hp7 Tue, 26 Dec 2023 07:30:40 +0000
<![CDATA[ The 8 best thick yoga mats in 2025, tried and tested by us for maximum support ]]> Whether you have a specific pain point and want extra support in your yoga flow or would rather have a little more spring in your step during a weights weights, one of the best thick yoga mats should have you covered.

Sitting among the best yoga mats, the extra cushioning can protect knees, ankles, and hip joints from discomfort during more cardio-focused workouts and even inversion poses "where the neck muscles are weight-bearing, like headstand and shoulder-stand variations," says yoga instructor Jamie Kent.

A non-slip mat with a thickness above 6mm is the minimum requirement for a good thick yoga mat, but many people worry about choosing a yoga mat that goes too far the other way. A mat that's too thick may be unstable, heavy to carry, hard t ostore, and difficult to roll out. To find the happy medium, we've scoured a huge selection to bring you a tried-and-tested edit of the best thick yoga mats, testing each one against criteria like thickness, grip, design, and weight. We also spoke to the experts to determine which ones were worth buying.

The best thick yoga mats as tested by us

How we tested

How we tested the best thick yoga mats

The woman&home health team and our expert testers put all the thick yoga mats in this guide to the test through multiple yoga sessions, ranging from intense cardio-based Vinyasa yoga classes to gentle stretching sessions. We also tested the mats in HIIT classes and strength training workouts at home and even used one mat as a base for an indoor cycling set-up.

The mats were initially tested last year. However, we've reviewed them again in 2024 once again and can confirm these are the very best thick yoga mats to buy.

When reviewing the mats, we considered the following criteria:

  • Thickness: Every yoga mat we tried had to be above 4mm thick as the minimum required to be a thick yoga mat. Anything above 6mm was great and all yoga mats above 8mm were prioritised as specialist mats.
  • Grip: Was the mat non-slip? We noted whether each mat offered plenty of grip and support. After all, you don't want to be sliding around while trying to get into downward dog.
  • Design: Not only did we look at the designs and colourways on offer, but we also evaluated the materials. We tested mats made from everything from natural rubber and man-made rubber to PVC.
  • Weight: A weighty mat will feel luxe and durable, and it could help with stability, but for those who want a yoga mat for on-the-go, a lightweight option is best. We considered a range of weights to highlight the best ones in each category.
  • Price: When testing, we also considered the price. Quality yoga mats don't have to be expensive, and sometimes it's best to opt for a budget option if you're new to the practice. Yoga should be an accessible activity for everyone, so as well as including luxury buys, we've included mats from across the market's price spectrum.

A photograph of a selection of the best thick yoga mats, tried and tested by the health team

Ciara McGinley and Grace Walsh tried and tested many of the best thick yoga mats on this list. (Image credit: Ciara McGinley/Future)

How thick should a yoga mat be?

A yoga mat is about 3mm thick, while thicker options are usually 6mm or above. Anything thinner than 3mm and you risk not having adequate support for your back, feet, knees, and other parts of the body that come under pressure during the practice.

When figuring out how to choose a yoga mat you like, thickness should be a consideration. For maximum thickness, opt for a mat of at least 8mm, but a mat of at least 6mm should be enough to support the major joints in the body.

Ultimately, how thick your yoga mat should be is down to you and your practice. "There is no real ideal thickness for a yoga mat, it all depends on the person practising, style of yoga being practised and where the practice is taking place," Georgie Davies, a yoga teacher who teaches vinyasa yoga as well as gentler classes, tells us.

"For instance, you may not need as much padding in the mat if you're practising at home on carpet compared to the wooden floor of a studio," says Georgie, who also created an online yoga platform, Yogipod. "If the class you're taking explores a lot of postures on the hands and knees or if you have any conditions that make that uncomfortable then more padding would be ideal."

It's also worth noting that the extra padding of thicker mats may feel nice for certain poses, but you're less connected to the floor. This could impact your ability to balance or land correctly during higher energy movements.

"Thicker mats can make it harder to find balance in one-legged postures such as Vrksasana (tree pose) or stability in standing postures due to the depth of padding underneath the foot," explains Georgie. "This can be mitigated though by moving balancing postures off the mat so that the padding is there when required and also creating more stability and strength in the ankles, feet and legs."

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/health-wellbeing/fitness/best-thick-yoga-mats/ RewrmbKvSvkKJrqRg7u2md Wed, 20 Dec 2023 15:35:10 +0000
<![CDATA[ The best Royal-approved gifts to spoil your loved ones with this year ]]> When it comes to the best Royal-approved Christmas gifts, we’ve got you covered. We’re always looking at what the Royals are wearing and buying, from fashion picks to beauty essentials.

Royals like Kate Middleton, Meghan Markle and Duchess Sophie are known for their high-end beauty and fashion favourites, but that’s not to say they’re not affordable. If you’re looking for some of the best beauty gift ideas or a new festive outfit to gift your loved one this year, we’ve rounded up all of our favourite gift ideas that get the Royal stamp of approval.

Royal-approved fragrances

Royal-approved beauty gifts

Royal-approved fashion gifts

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/life/royal-approved-gifts/ RUBeJLX4w8ne85r2JKpXKe Sat, 09 Dec 2023 12:00:29 +0000
<![CDATA[ These are the best vegan boots to see you through winter in style ]]> The best vegan boots may surprise you. Leather is typically the material that most of us gravitate towards for winter footwear, as it's notoriously sturdy and can battle against the elements. But with more and more vegan options hitting stores every day, the quality and style credentials of vegan boots have never been better.

If you think chic boots can only come in leather, think again. Vegan and sustainable materials are growing in popularity by the day, so if you don't already have a pair of the best vegan boots in your collection, now might be the time to invest. With many footwear brands probably offering vegan alternatives to hero styles, and an abundance of new and emerging labels bringing out timelessly chic vegan boots, the options are multiplying.

Whether you're after a practical pair to withstand the rain or you want something more trend-led to see you through party season, we've found a range of the best winter boots made from vegan-friendly materials at every budget. From elegant pointy heels to platform stompers, these boots don't use animal products and they certainly don't compromise on style.

The best vegan boots for the season ahead

Do vegan leather boots last?

"Vegan boots, in my experience, have lasted me just as long as non-vegan boots which I've purchased second-hand," says our shopping writer Hannah Holway. "In fact, I've owned my pair of vegan Doc Martens far longer than any other boots, and they've not let me down in terms of comfort and durability.

"While vegan boots are often made of plastic, rather than leather, I've found that they're just as waterproof and hard-wearing as any second-hand leather I own: I've had my DMs for coming up to four years now and they're just as comfortable as the first day I bought them. A little scuffing is to be expected if you wear them often for years (as I have), but all the stitching is perfectly intact and I've never had to reckon with any breakages or damage to the heel or sole."

Do vegan boots feel different from leather boots?

"While vegan leather or vegan-friendly boots used to feel less buttery soft than their leather counterparts", explains woman&home fashion editor, Rivkie Baum. "The fabric technology industry has come a long way and new developments are being made all the time. Subsequently leather alternative materials are not only increasing in number, but sometimes the difference can be hard to spot, meaning you can buy great footwear in a more sustainable way".

Almost every high street retailer offers vegan or vegan-friendly boots at great prices, so no matter your budget, there is a chic and stylish pair out there for you. Look out for vegan leather alternatives for high-quality, sustainable pieces, or seek out synthetic materials if you're after a brilliant budget buy.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/fashion/best-vegan-boots/ 4Qvn5WBbk3Y7w5XdGTPaWR Sat, 09 Dec 2023 10:24:31 +0000
<![CDATA[ The 9 best Diptyque perfumes to invest in, whether you prefer sweet florals or smoky woods ]]> Those in search of a luxurious and niche signature have no doubt stumbled across the best Diptyque perfume. After all, the Parisian perfumery has a long history of curating iconic blends that are beloved all over the world - 9 of which, line our own dressers...

Beginning as a bazaar in 1961, Diptyque evolved into a fragrance brand a few years later with the launch of the first Eau de Toilette, L’Eau – and they have been making some of the best long-lasting perfumes and best perfumes for women and men, in general, ever since. It is truly a brand for the fragrance lover, with each scent boasting its own unique story. Take Orphéon, a gorgeous, fragrant imagining of the very jazz bar next to the original Parisian boutique and that the brand's three founders visited regularly.

For those struggling to choose from Diptyque's luxe lineup though, we're here to help narrow down the selection. Our beauty team have tried (and loved) a whole host of the best Diptyque perfumes, while our contributing beauty editor has shared in-depth reviews on nine, in particular - all of which reside in different olfactory families and radiate timelessness.

Diptyque Eau Nabati, Ilio, and Eau Capitale

Diptyue's Eau Nabati, Ilio and Eau Capitale perfumes (Image credit: Lucy Abbersteen)

The 9 best Diptyque perfumes, reviewed by a beauty editor 

Whether you favour fresh perfumes or powdery musks, Diptyque's illustrative oval bottles boasts notes to suit every preference - as these nine signatures prove...

How we tested the best Diptyque perfumes 

A selection of the best Diptyque perfumes tested for our guide, including Eau des Sens, Tam Dao, Do Son, Philosykos, Fleur de Peau, Eau Capitale, Orpheon, and Ilio

Selection of the best Diptuque perfumes tested for this guide (Image credit: Lucy Abbersteen)

In order to write the most thorough possible guide to these scents, our expert tested and re-tested a broad range of Diptyque fragrances, including both long-time best sellers and newer releases, and from different olfactory families. During the testing process, she took all of the following factors into account.

  • Olfactory family
  • How it smelled initially, as well as within the first hour of wear
  • How long it lasted on the skin
  • Projection
  • Sillage
  • Whether it felt particularly suited to one season, or year-round wear
  • Price

When comparing fragrances from different brands, we would usually take packaging into account, but of course, the best Diptyque perfumes are all housed in beautifully illustrated oval bottles. This deserves some recognition, as it definitely contributes to the luxurious feel of the brand and adds to each fragrance's uniqueness.

How to choose the best Diptyque perfume for you

Fragrance is arguably the most subjective of all beauty purchases, but we can give you a few starting points to help you find the best Diptyque perfume for you, along with our in-depth reviews above.

  • Think about your favourite perfumes: If you know you prefer certain kinds of scents, consider this before you begin browsing. Knowing the olfactory families you are drawn to will give you a starting place with Diptyque. You might have a favourite from another perfume house, like a Dior perfume, Tom Ford perfume or Jo Malone perfume that you want to use as a reference or starting point. Keep in mind the sort of notes you like, too, whether that's musky, floral or fruity
  • Intensity: As well as composition, consider how intense you like your perfume to be. This will influence whether you opt for Eau de Parfum, Eau de Toilette or a solid perfume.
  • Visit a Diptyque counter or boutique: Fragrance advisers have a wealth of knowledge and know the brand's fragrances and know the full range inside out. Tell them a bit about what you want from your new fragrance and they'll be able to suggest a few different options that you should like.
  • Test the fragrances IRL: Once you like a perfume you've sprayed on a blotter, then be sure to test it on your own skin – fragrances can smell completely different wearer to wearer, so it's the best way to see if it suits you.

Your burning Diptyque perfume questions, answered

What is the best-selling Diptyque perfume?

Diptyque has not disclosed which of its fragrances is the overall best-seller, but Do Son, Philosykos, Eau des Sens, Orphéon and Fleur de Peau are all named as some of the most popular on its website.

What is Diptyque's signature scent?

It’s difficult to choose just one scent that perfectly captures the brand, though the best-sellers are all very recognisable as being Diptyque fragrances. Strong contenders are without question Philosykos and Do Son, though L’Eau, L’Autre, and L’Eau Trois are the brand’s three oldest fragrances, launched in 1968, 1973, and 1975, respectively.

What's the longest-lasting Diptyque perfume?

We found that those scents with richer notes, such as Tam Dao, Eau Capitale or Eau Nabati, for example, tend to last longer on the skin than lighter concoctions. It also goes without saying that Eau de Parfum will last longer than Eau de Toilette, as the former has higher concentration of perfume ingredients. But, of course, the very best way to see which is the longest-lasting Diptyque perfume for you is to try a few in-person and see how long they last on your own skin.

What is the difference between Eau de Toilette, Eau de Parfum and solid perfume?

You may have noticed that for each Diptyque perfume on this list, we noted its form, whether that was an Eau de Toilette, Eau de Parfum or a solid perfume. Some will be one or the other, while others are available in all three. This is helpful to know because it impacts how intense the scent is, how long it lasts and the price. Eau de Toilettes are a lighter type of fragrance and normally contain between 5 and 15% perfume oil which means the initial scent payoff is quite light and will only last for around four or six hours before you might want to top up again. Eau de Parfum, on the other hand, is heavier on the perfume oil, making up between 10 and 20% of the formulation. As a result, they linger for longer on the skin and will stay with you for eight hours for even more. Solid perfumes are more intense still, as the concentration is even higher. With a solid perfume, you don’t need a lot to get quite an intense smell, but as they have a waxy consistency, the scent is more confined to the area you’ve applied it to, rather than enveloping you in a cloud of scent.

What is the difference between top notes, heart notes and base notes in a fragrance?

For the uninitiated, the world of fragrance can seem quite complicated. But actually, once you’ve got your head around a few key terms, it’s pretty simple. Take top notes, heart notes (also known as middle notes) and base notes for example. Top notes are the first bit of the fragrance that hits you when you apply it. They tend to be quite light notes, and won’t stick around for very long. Middle notes, come afterwards and will become more apparent as the fragrance dries into the skin. They’ll outlast the top notes and will be sniffable for a good hour or so. After that, comes the base notes which are the most intense part of the fragrance. These tend to be things like amber and musk, and you’ll notice them more when the top and heart notes have faded away.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/beauty/best-diptyque-perfumes/ QyD9oab6xFmNRLtkGHQ9yR Mon, 04 Dec 2023 16:00:26 +0000